Crucible
Short Description
Download Crucible...
Description
UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS FIELD AND WEAPONS TRAINING COMPANY WEAPONS AND FIELD TRAINING BATTALION (MCRD SAN DIEGO) EDSON RANGE AREA P.O. BOX 555181 CAMP PENDLETON, CA. 92055-5181
CRUCIBLE SOP & EDSON RANGE TRAINING AREA INSTRUCTOR HANDBOOK
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
Table of Contents Document
Page
Base Order
1
¾ Annex A—Task Organization
A-1
¾ Annex B—Range and Training Area Operations
B-1
9 Appendix 1—Safety Brief
B-1-1
9 Appendix 2—Ammunition Handling Procedures
B-2-1
9 Appendix 3—Range Checklist
B-3-1
9 Appendix 4-SAW and AT-4 Tracer-Trainer Safety Protocol
B-4-1
¾ Annex C— Crucible Operations 9 Appendix 1—Day’s Defense/Team Shoot & Ballard’s Success
C-1 C-1-1
Tab A—Day’s Defense/Team Shoot
C-1-A-1
Tab B—Ballard’s Success
C-1-B-1
9 Appendix 2—Iam’s Drive
C-2-1
Tab A—Body Sparing
C-2-A-1
Tab B—Pugil Sticks
C-2-B-1
9 Appendix 3—Night Patrol Rehearsal
C-3-1
9 Appendix 4—Sky Scraper & Two-line Bridge
C-4-1
Tab A—Sky Scrapper
C-4-A-1
Tab B—Two-line Bridge
C-4-B-1
9 Appendix 5—Stairway to Heaven & Baptista’s Weaver
C-5-1
Tab A—Stairway to Heaven
C-5-A-1
Tab B—Baptista’s Weaver
C-5-B-1
9 Appendix 6—Hansen’s Counters
C-6-1
9 Appendix 7—Compass/Pace Course
C-7-1
9 Appendix 8—Howard’s Assault & Fire Team Obstacle Course
C-8-1
Tab A—Howard’s Assault
C-8-A-1
Tab B—Fire Team Obstacle Course
C-8-B-1
9 Appendix 9—Bordelon’s Assault & PE Station 1
Tab A—Bordelon’s Assault
C-9-1 C-9-A-1
Document
Page
Tab B—PE Station 1 (H&A Signals, Formations, and Day & Night Individual Movement)
C-9-B-1
9 Appendix 10— Weapons Maintenance
C-10-1
9 Appendix 11—Three-Mile Hike
C-11-1
9 Appendix 12—Copeland's Assault/Fire Team Assault Course
C-12-1
9 Appendix 13—PE Station 2 & Core Values (“Isms”)
C-13-1
PE Station 2 (IA Drills)
C-13-A-1
Core Values (“Isms”)
C-13-B-1
9 Appendix 14—PE Station 3 (Map Reading and Camouflage, C-14-1
Cover, & Concealment)_ 9 Appendix 15—Noonan’s Casualty Evac & Jenkins’s Pinnacle
C-15-1
Tab A—Noonan’s Casualty Evacuation
C-15-A-1
Tab B-Jenkins’s Pinnacle
C-15-B-1
9 Appendix 16—Twelve Stall LRC & Core Values
C-16-1
Tab A—Twelve Stall LRC and Medical Check
C-16-A-1
Tab B-Core Values (“Who am I?”)
C-16-B-1
Tab C-Twelve Stall Operational Risk Assessment
C-16-C-1
9 Appendix 17—Garcia’s Engagement & Basilone’s Challenge
C-17-1
Tab A—Garcia’s Engagement
C-17-A-1
Tab B—Basilone’s Challenge
C-17-B-1
9 Appendix 18—Cukela’s Wall & Gonzalez’s Crossing
C-18-1
Tab A—Cukela’s Wall
C-18-A-1
Tab B—Gonzalez’s Crossing
C-18-B-1
9 Appendix 19—Jansen’s Thrust
C-19-1
9 Appendix 20—Night Fire Team Satellite Patrol
C-20-1
Tab A—Course Diagram & Instructor Guidance
C-20-A-1
Tab B—Team Leader’s Patrol Order
C-20-B-1
9 Appendix 21—Night Infiltration Course
C-21-1
9 Appendix 22—Reaper 10-Mile Hike
C-22-1
Tab A-Edson Raider PME
C-22-A-1
Tab B-Hike Checkpoints and Route Overlays
C-22-B-1
Tab C-Hike Brief
C-22-C-1
9 Appendix 23—Crucible Route Matrix/Timeline
ii
C-23-1
Document
Page
¾ Annex D—Logistics
D-1
9 Appendix 1—Recruit Gear List
D-1-1
9 Appendix 2—Subsistence
D-2-1
9 Appendix 3—Sanitation
D-3-1
9 Appendix 4—Ammunition Delivery Matrix
D-4-1
9 Appendix 5—Billeting
D-5-1
9 Appendix 6—Vehicles
D-6-1
9 Appendix 7—Supply
D-7-1
¾ Annex E—Maintenance
E-1
9 Appendix 1—Concept and Relations
Tab A—Inspection Worksheets
¾ Annex F— Dangerous and Inclement Weather SOPs
E-1-1 E-1-A-1 F-1
9 Appendix 1—Hot Weather SOP
F-1-1
9 Appendix 2—Thunderstorm & Lightening SOP
F-2-1
9 Appendix 3-Cold and/or Wet Weather SOP
F-3-1
¾ Annex H—Medical
H-1
9 Appendix 1—MEDEVAC Procedures
H-1-1
9 Appendix 2-Sick Call; Referral Criterion; ATC Protocols
H-2-1
¾ Annex K—Communications
K-1
iii
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS FIELD & WEAPONS TRAINING COMPANY WEAPONS FIELD TRAINING BATTALION (MCRD) EDSON RANGE AREA, BOX 555181 CAMP PENDLETON, CALIFORNIA 92055-5181
P1513.8 FWTCO 24 Jul 06 CRUCIBLE & EDSON RANGE TRAINING AREA SOPS (U) (U) REFERENCES: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l)
Marine Corps Order 1510.32D (Recruit Training) Marine Corps Order 1553.2A (Formal Schools Management) Marine Corps Order 1510.89B (MCCS Volume 1) Recruit Training (Male) Program of Instruction CG, TECOM ITS Conference Implementation MSG dtd R211600ZJUL06 Army Training Circular 25-10: Leaders Guide to Lane Training MCRD San Diego DepO P1510.30L (Recruit Training SOP) Camp Pendleton Base Range Regulations (BO P3500.1M) Camp Pendleton Contingency Plan for Range and Training Area Accidents and Injuries (BO 3040.1D) Marine Corps Martial Arts Program (MCMAP) Order MCO 1500.54A Weapons & Field Training Battalion/31 Cantonment Area Force Protection-05 (31A FP PLAN 05) MCRD Parris Island Operations Order 01-01 (Crucible SOP)
(U) TIME ZONE:
Uniform
1. (U) Purpose. The purpose of this order is to provide policy and instructions for the conduct of the Crucible and Field Skills range operations aboard Edson Range, MCB Camp Pendleton. The Crucible is a pivotal graduation requirement in Marine Corps recruit training that brings together and tests all the discipline and field skills that recruits have learned during the previous weeks of boot camp. It is a grueling, 54-hour field training exercise and evaluation which is highlighted by food and sleep deprivation, over forty miles of forced marches, and an operational tempo that presents continuous physical and mental challenges. Designed to emphasize the importance of selflessness and teamwork in overcoming adversity, it is truly a defining moment in recruit training. The Crucible is also a challenge to the leadership of the Recruit Training Regiment, Weapons and Field Training Battalion, and the Branch Medical Clinic as they strive to reinforce training standards through proper repetition of skill sets and ensure that the safest possible conditions exist for the conduct of this rigorous exercise. The contents of this SOP will be adhered to in order to enhance the training value of the Crucible while minimizing the risks to our recruits. 2.
(U) Task Organization.
3.
(U) Situation.
See Annex A.
UNCLASSIFIED
P1513.8 a. (U) Enemy. Complacency is our most critical vulnerability! Each running of the Crucible is unique. Each recruit, each platoon, each training event and each training day is unique. Weather and the physical condition of both recruits and recruit trainers are not the same during any two Crucibles. There must be sound judgment and proactive leadership prior to, and throughout, the conduct of the event. Recruit training company commanders must complete detailed planning prior to the Crucible. Further, face-to-face coordination with all instructors involved in the Crucible, from both the training company and Field and Weapons Training Company, must be made before commencement of this exercise. Proactive small unit leadership by the Drill Instructor(s) assigned to lead each Crucible Squad is the key to success. Throughout the Crucible, and even after its completion, critiques will be conducted to address problems and to provide solutions to the leaders of both companies to avoid reoccurrence. b. (U) Terrain and Weather. (1) (U) Terrain. Lesson ID 1200 (Hazardous Local Wildlife) of reference (d) shall be given to all recruits prior to Field Training aboard Edson Range. This class describes hazardous wildlife, terrain, and vegetation. (2) (U) Weather. Edson Range is a coastal area, located in a temperate, semi-arid climate. The following statistical data is provided:
2 UNCLASSIFIED
P1513.8 c. (U) Friendly. (1) (U) Headquarters, U.S. Marine Corps. This headquarters provides direction and guidance relative to recruit training. Reference (a) outlines the Commandant's intent regarding the role of recruit training in producing the premier guardians of our nation’s freedom. It also provides guidance on the role of the Crucible in the “Transformation” process. (2) (U) Training and Education Command (TECOM). TECOM, through Ground Training Branch, Training Command, has oversight of recruit training; maintains the Program of Instruction for recruit training, to include the Crucible; and ensures standardization of recruit training between MCRD Parris Island and MCRD San Diego, references (a) through (d). Reference (d) is the Recruit Training (Male) Program of Instruction. Reference (e) authorizes replacement of specific Crucible events in order to provide evaluation of recruit learning and proper repetition of field skills as taught in accordance with references (a) through (f). Such evaluations are critical as they supply feedback on the efficacy of instruction which, in turn, becomes the catalyst for continuous improvement of our training and preparation of recruits for service in the operating forces. (3) (U) Marine Corps Recruit Depot Parris Island, South Carolina (MCRD PISC). MCRD PISC conducts the Crucible in accordance with references (a) through (f), (j) and (l). They coordinate with MCRD San Diego, California to ensure standardization in the execution of the Crucible. (4) (U) 31 Area Branch Medical Clinic, Naval Hospital Camp Pendleton (31 ABMC). 31 ABMC provides medical support for the Crucible as outlined in Annexes A (Task Organization) and H (Medical) to this SOP. (5) (U) U.S. Army Research Institute for Environmental Medicine (USARIEM). USARIEM conducts evaluations of training as requested, and provides recommendations concerning the impact of environmental and nutritional factors on the execution of the Crucible and the health and well-being of recruits. 3. (U) MISSION. Conduct the Crucible in accordance with the references and instructions outlined herein in order to better prepare recruits for service to their country and Corps as a United States Marine. 4. (U) EXECUTION. Field & Weapons Training Company (Edson Range) and Recruit Training Companies from MCRD San Diego will conduct the Crucible in accordance with the references and guidance outlined herein.
3 UNCLASSIFIED
P1513.8 a. (U) Commander's Intent and Concept of Operations. (1) (U) Commander's Intent. It is my intent that every aspect and detail of each Crucible be carefully assessed, planned, and executed. This begins with the events outlined in the milestones leading up to the Crucible, to medical pre-screening of recruits, to proper maintenance of obstacles and observance of safety considerations, to expert repetition of Marine Corps Common Skills during the conduct of the Crucible, and culminating in a well-deserved and professionallypresented Warrior’s Breakfast. I expect constant vigilance, forward thinking, good judgment and professionalism from all hands—commanders, Drill Instructors, Field Instructors, and corpsmen. The end state of each Crucible is for every recruit to have been physically and mentally challenged; that they have demonstrated competency in the requisite Marine Corps Common Skills as taught up to that point in the recruit training POI; that they have completed the Crucible safely, imbued with our Core Values and Warrior Ethos; and that they are ready to report to the School of Infantry and Marine Combat Training upon successful completion of the final phase of boot camp. (2) (U) Training philosophy. We will zealously apply the acronym SERES in our training philosophy: We will train recruits to uniform and consistent Standards in accordance with the appropriate references; we will strive to ensure that all recruit trainers are Experts in this SOP and the skills that we teach recruits; we believe that recruits learn through proper Repetition of the skills they are taught; we, as trainers, will Evaluate recruits to ensure that learning has taken place and to ensure that we continually improve the quality of our instruction; and every commander will Support training through resourcing valid requirements and ensuring that all recruit trainers are in fact experts, thoroughly indoctrinated in the contents of this SOP and the Recruit Training Program of Instruction. (3) (U) Concept of Operations. Operations).
See, Annex C (Crucible
b. (U) Tasks. (1) (U) Commanding Officer, Recruit Training Company (a) (U) You are the supported commander for the planning and execution of the Crucible. (b) (U) Ensure that the Crucible is conducted in accordance with provisions herein. (c) (U) Ensure that subordinate commanders are properly supported and that they conduct face-to-face coordination with Field and Weapons Training Company leadership prior to each execution of the Crucible. 4 UNCLASSIFIED
P1513.8 (d) (U) Ensure that recruits are maintaining their permanent buddy team and fire team integrity throughout the Crucible as established NLT T-17 in accordance with paragraph 12009 of reference (g). The exceptions to this requirement occurs when a recruit is dropped from training or is picked-up and when specifically authorized under Annex C (Crucible Operations) of this order. (e) (U) Conduct a debrief and make appropriate recommendations for improvement. (f) (U) Provide periodic Crucible SOP training to Drill Instructors to ensure the integrity and safe execution of this event. (2) (U) Field Training Platoon Leader, Field & Weapons Training Company (FWTCO) (a) (U) You are the supporting commander for the planning and execution of the Crucible. (b) (U) Ensure that all safety mechanisms are in place and that all Field Instructors involved in the execution of this event are thoroughly familiar with the provisions of this SOP. (c) (U) Ensure that recruit training company commanders are properly supported and that they conduct face-to-face coordination with FWTCO leadership prior to each execution of the Crucible. (3) (U) Director, 31 Area Branch Medical Clinic (a) (U) Provide medical support to the Crucible in accordance with your Table of Organization mission statement and the personnel provided therein to support WFTBN, Edson Range. (b) (U) Ensure medical planning and execution are conducted in accordance with the provisions herein. c.
(U) Coordinating Instructions.
(1) (U) Crucible Preparation. Preparation for the Crucible starts in Phase 1 of recruit training. After arrival at Edson Range, a separate and distinct coordination meeting will be held prior to the Crucible. It will not be conducted on a "by exception" basis, nor will it assume a "pro forma" mindset. Appropriate representatives from Weapons and Field Training Battalion, 31 Area Branch Medical Clinic, and the participating recruit training company will attend. (2) (U) Debriefs. A summary "hot wash" will be conducted daily during the conduct of the Crucible in order to evaluate the conduct of the day's training, and to coordinate upcoming events. At a minimum, this meeting will be held at Range 501 or the Field and Weapons 5 UNCLASSIFIED
P1513.8 Company (FWTCO) office with the Senior Drill Instructors, Series Chiefs and FWTCO SNCOIC in attendance. During winter months, this meeting will occur after the night events; during the summer months, it may occur between the Operational Pause (1900 and EENT). Additionally, a detailed "hot wash" will be conducted following the completion of the entire Crucible event with Weapons and Field Training Battalion S-3, the recruit training company commander, the FWTCO commander, and senior enlisted representatives from both companies. Appropriate representatives from other staff sections may attend when deemed necessary. The purpose of this detailed meeting is not to embarrass any particular personality or unit but rather to continuously improve the training value of the Crucible. (3) (U) Safety. The safety of recruits and trainers is paramount. The Crucible will be conducted in strict compliance with references (f) through (k). In the event of a conflict between these references, reference (h) shall take precedence on matters pertaining to Base Range Operations, see also Annex B (Crucible Range and Training Area Operations) to this order. Annex C (Crucible Operations) provides detailed operational risk management assessments associated with each Crucible event; it also outlines the controls necessary to mitigate the risks connected with Crucible training. (4) (U) Contingency Plans. Weather conditions at Edson Range may, on occasion, present significant threats to the safety of recruits and recruit trainers. Annex F (Dangerous and Inclement Weather) provides detailed procedures to minimize the risks associate with both hot and cold weather and even lightning storms. Because the Crucible is a graduation requirement entailing 54 consecutive hours of execution, it will be conducted during all flag conditions subject to the risk mitigation procedures outlined in Annex F. The Crucible will, however, be paused during periods of lightning, or when thunderstorms endanger recruits. Reference (k) provides detailed instructions relating to force protection measures. (5) (U) SOP Review and Recommendations for Changes. This order will be reviewed tri-annually in conjunction with the required Course Curriculum Review Board process listed in reference (b). Recommended changes will be made to the commanding officer, Field & Weapons Training Company and/or to the Weapons and Field Training Battalion operations officer. d. (U) Completion Criteria. The Crucible is a graduation requirement for all recruits. Per references (a), (d), (g) and (l), the following completion criterion for each recruit is provided as information: (1) (U) Demonstrate integrity in the accomplishment of each event. Any breach of integrity, to include lying or cheating, will result in failure of the Crucible. There will be no second chances to stay with their training company where integrity is involved. 6 UNCLASSIFIED
P1513.8 (2) (U) Demonstrate a sincere attempt to accomplish all events. Any refusal to train will result in failing the entire Crucible. Any recruit who refused to train will be immediately counseled by his Series Officer, Company First Sergeant, or Company Commander. If the recruit still refuses to train, he shall fail the Crucible and dropped from the training company. (3) (U) Physically progress through all stations and events of the Crucible. Should any recruit be injured while conducting the Crucible, his Senior Drill Instructor and Series Commander shall make recommendations to the Recruit Company Commander for disposition based on that recruit’s performance up to the point of injury. The Company Commander will then determine the disposition of the recruit. (4) (U) Merit a favorable recommendation by the recruit’s Senior Drill Instructor. Any case that includes actions which compromise the goals of the Crucible as outlined in this order, or actions that demonstrate a lack of understanding with regards to our Core Values and/or Warrior Ethos, shall be dealt with on a case-by-case basis and may result in failure of the Crucible. (5) (U) Recruits who fail Field Skills Performance Evaluations will be remediated and retested. 4.
(U) ADMINISTRATION AND LOGISTICS. a. (U) Equipment. (Logistics). b. (U) Subsistence. (Logistics). c. (U) Sanitation. (Logistics).
Appendix 1 (Recruit Gear List) to Annex D
Appendix 2 (Subsistence) to Annex D
Appendix 3 (Sanitation) to Annex D
d. (U) Ammunition and Pyrotechnics. Appendix 4 (Ammunition Delivery Matrix) to Annex D (Logistics). e. (U) Billeting. During the conduct of the Crucible, Recruits will be bivouacked at Range 501. After the Crucible, recruits will return to their assigned barracks and checkout of the barracks in accordance with the procedures listed in Appendix 5 (Billeting) to Annex D (Logistics). f. (U) Transportation. (Logistics). g. (U) Supply.
Appendix 6 (Vehicles) to Annex D
Appendix 7 (Supply) to Annex D (Logistics).
h. (U) Maintenance of Crucible Obstacles, Media, and Training Areas. Annex E (Maintenance). 7 UNCLASSIFIED
P1513.8 i. (U) Medical. 5.
Annex H (Medical).
(U) COMMAND AND SIGNAL.
a. (U) Command Relationships. The Recruit Training Company Commanders are the supported unit commanders and are responsible for the training of recruits during the Crucible. The Field & Weapons Training Company Commander is the supporting unit commander and is responsible for the support, structure, and facilitation of the Crucible. b. (U) Signal.
Annex K (Communications).
c. (U) Command Post. A command post, designated the Crucible Operations Center (COC), will be established and staffed in accordance with Annex A at the FWTCO office during the conduct of the Crucible day events. ANNEXES: ABCDEFHK-
Task Organization Range and Training Area Operations Crucible Operations Logistics Maintenance Dangerous and Inclement Weather SOPs Medical Communications
ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
R. B. RICHARDSON Major, U. S. Marine Corps Commanding
DISTRIBUTION: All recruit trainers involved with Crucible training aboard Edson Range; WFTBn S-3; MCRD San Diego (G-3); Recruit Training Regiment (S-3); Director, DI School MCRD San Diego; and WFTBN, MCRD Parris Island.
8 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 ANNEX A (TASK ORGANIZATION) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) (U) REFERENCES: (a) (b) (c)
MCRD San Diego Recruit Training SOP Field & Weapons Training Company’s 2005 Table of Organization Marine Corps Base Camp Pendleton, Base Range Regulations (BO P3500.1M)
(U) TIME ZONE:
Uniform
1. (U) Purpose. The purpose of this annex is to provide guidance for the task organization required to support the command and control of the Crucible aboard Edson Range (MCRD San Diego) in accordance with the references. This annex provides specific details on the organization of recruit Crucible Squads and the minimum number of support personnel (Drill Instructors, Field Instructors, and corpsmen) required to safely conduct the Crucible at each event. 2. (U) General. The Crucible is comprised of nineteen (19) day events, two (2) night events, and a 10-mile “Reaper Hike.” The daytime events generally consist of two stations each, see Annex C and/or paragraph 7 below. During the daytime events, two Crucible Squads are normally paired together so that they may travel collectively to each event and then rotate the conduct of each event’s stations in the time allotted per Appendix 23 (Crucible Route Matrix/Timeline) to Annex C (Operations). Night events are conducted by an entire series. 3. (U) Recruit Crucible Squads. Recruits will be assigned to their Crucible Squads by their permanent fire teams. Therefore, Crucible Squads shall consist of four teams (16 recruits), five teams (20 recruits), or a maximum of six teams (24 recruits). The number of fire teams assigned to each Crucible Squad shall be determined by the recruit series staff based on total series’ strength. The recruit fire team leader shall remain in-charge of his assigned fire team at all tactical events—the exceptions are Leadership Reaction Coursestyle stations (e.g. “Twelve Stall”). 4. (U) Drill Instructor Leadership. Each Crucible Squad will be led by a Drill Instructor assigned to the Recruit Training Company conducting the Crucible. Crucible Squads may be paired up so that the two Crucible Squads, each led by at least one Drill Instructor from the training company, will travel together to each daytime event. Additionally, the Recruit Training Company has minimum command and control-manning requirements as outlined in the table under paragraph 7 below. 5. (U) Field Instructor Safety Oversight. Field instructors will ensure the proper conduct of all specified Crucible events and stations in order to ensure equipment accountability and recruit safety. Field Instructors will also provide technical assistance to A-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 the Drill Instructor(s) supervising his recruits at specified stations. The table in paragraph 7 below highlights the minimum field instructor-manning requirements when the Field Training Platoon is under T/O strength (36 Marines). (Note that the Sky Scraper and Gonzalez’s Crossing lists a range for Field Instructors. If Field Instructors are not available to assist at these stations, then the Series Chiefs will have to sign out and in equipment at the Sky Scraper and Gonzalez’s Crossing (i.e. one “Fred” Dummy and 24 Field Protective Masks, respectively) each day and night of the Crucible.) 6. (U) Corpsman Support. Medical support for the Crucible comes from the 31 Area Branch Medical Clinic, Naval Hospital Camp Pendleton. The 31 Area Branch Medical Clinic maintains the corpsmen assigned to Weapons and Field Training Battalion, Edson Range. a. Range 501. In accordance with reference (c), all live-fire training events aboard Camp Pendleton require a dedicated nontraining corpsman and safety vehicle. Therefore, “Day’s Defense/Team Shoot,” Event 1A, requires one dedicated corpsman to support it when the range is in a “hot status.” b. Oscar-1 and 31 Area Cantonment. All non-live-fire training for the Crucible aboard Edson Range takes place within the Oscar-1 Training Area and 31-Area Cantonment. Reference (c) states that at least one non-training corpsman and a safety vehicle will be present to support non-live fire training events. The Range Safety Officer and/or Officer-in-Charge shall dispatch this corpsman throughout the training area as needed. However, as a matter of routine, the 31Area Branch Medical Clinic normally staffs the non-training events of the Crucible with three (3) corpsmen: the first corpsman is usually posted at the “12-Stall” to conduct foot checks, the second at R505, and the third at the Confidence Course. 7. (U) Minimum Command and Control (C2) Manning Requirements. MINIMUM CRUCIBLE MANNING REQUIREMENTS RTR Company C2 Responsibility Commissioned Officer @ R501/Team Shoot per Recruit SOP 1 OFFICER Range Officer-In-Charge (Entire Crucible) 1 SNCO/OFF FWTCO SNCOIC (Entire Crucible) NA Range Safety Officer: Team Shoot/R501
NA
Assistant Range Safety Officer: Non-Live Fire/Oscar-1 Crucible Operations Center Corpsman Support R501 Live Fire: Non-training Corpsman Oscar-1 Training Area: Non-training Corpsman
A-2 UNCLASSIFIED
NA 1 SNCO/OFF NA NA
FWTCo NA NA 1 SNCO/OFF 1 SGT or Above 1 SGT or Above (Ops Chief or CI)
1 1
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 Event/Station # LEAD 1A 1B 2 3 4A 4B 5A 5B 6 7 8A 8B 9A 9B 10 11 FOLLOW 12 13A 13B 14 15A 15B 16 17A 17B 18A 18B 19 20 20A 20B 20C 20D 20E 20F 20G 20H 20I 21 21A 21B 21C 21D
Station Name
DI
FI
DAY'S DEFENSE/TEAM SHOOT BALLARD'S SUCCESS IAMS’ DRIVE NIGHT PATROL REHERSAL SKY SCRAPER TWO-LINE BRIDGE STAIRWAY TO HEAVEN BAPTISTA'S WEAVER HANSEN'S ENCOUNTER COMPASS COURSE HOWARD'S ASSAULT FIRE TEAM OBSTACLE COURSE BORDELONE'S ASSAULT PE STATION 1 (H&A SIGNALS, FORMATIONS, & INDIVIDUAL MOVEMENT) WEAPONS MAINTENANCE 3-MILE HIKE/FOOT CHECK
1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2
3 0 2 1 0-1 0 1 0 1 1
2 2 2
0 0
COPELAND’S ASSAULT/FIRE TEAM ASLT CR PE STATION 2 (IA DRILLS) CORE VALUES “ISMs” PE STATION 3 (MAP READING AND CAMMO, COVER, & CONCEALMENT) NOONAN'S CASUALTY EVAC JENKINS'S PINNACLE 12-STALL & CORE VALUES GARCIA'S ENGAGEMENT BASILONE’S CHALLENGE CUKELA'S WALL GONZALEZ'S CROSSING JANSEN'S (BAC) & CORE VALUES NIGHT FIRE TEAM PATROL Review Circles LOD Route Green Checkpoint 8 IA Drill Box Near Ambush Near Ambush Bunker Operator LOA (Gravel Road) Line Out on R501 Road NIGHT INFILTRATION: R505 AAVs Between AAVs and Wire Wire First Trench Line A-3
2 2 1 OR 2
2 1 0
2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 9 Total
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0-1 1 10 Total
UNCLASSIFIED
1 1
2 0 1 0 1 0 2 2 1 9 Total
1 1 1 1 2 2 0 1 1 8 Total
2 0 0 1
1 1 1 0
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 21E 21F 21G 21H 21I 21J 21K 21L 22
Wall Crawl Under Wire Berm Culverts Trench Between Logs and Obj Line Out/Bleachers Tower NCO REAPER HIKE
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 ALL
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0
*Notes: 1) The Recruit Company Commander and FWTCo Commander will be notified if the minimum manning requirements above are not met IOT recommend options to the WFTBn CO. 2) CamPen Range Regs state that a non-training corpsman must be present at all live fire events. Non-live fire events may have a single corpsman for the entire Training Area; therefore, at a minimum, one corpsman can support both Field and Crucible Week training companies in the Oscar-1 TA. However, SOP is to have one corpsman for each training company in the Oscar-1 TA. 3) Not all events/stations are necessary active at the same time.
ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
R. B. RICHARDSON Major, U. S. Marine Corps Commanding
A-4 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 ANNEX B (RANGE & TRAINING AREA OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) (U) REFERENCES: (a) (b) (c) (d)
Marine Corps Base Camp Pendleton BO P3500.1M (Base Range Regulations) MCRD San Diego DepO P1510.30L (Recruit Training SOP), Ch 12 MCB Camp Pendleton Facility Directive 10-06 dated 28 April 2006 MCO 1500.54A (MCMAP)
(U) TIME ZONE:
Uniform
1. (U) Purpose. The purpose of this annex is to provide policy for the assignment of Range Officer-in-Charge (OIC) and Range Safety Officer (RSO) responsibilities during Field and Crucible Week training aboard Edson Range. 2. (U) Background. Reference (a) defines the role of the Range OIC and RSO and lists the requirements for these duties. As stated in the Recruit Training SOP, reference (b), a series officer must be physically present when any training is conducted. Supported units do not abdicate command to the supporting unit when receiving training; the recruit training company commander is still ultimately responsible for everything that happens or fails to happen within his command. Except in cases representing an unwarranted risk to recruit safety, changes to the training schedule require coordination with the Field & Weapons Training Company Commander; Weapons & Field Training Battalion (WFTBN), Operations Officer; and ultimate approval from the Commanding Officer, WFTBN. 3. (U) OIC/RSO Policy. The Range OIC responsibilities for all training rest solely with the recruit training company conducting it. Field and Weapons Training Company (FWTCO) will provide the RSOs for all Field and Crucible Week training. All Range OICs and RSOs shall be governed by the references in the performance of their duties. a. (U) The Range OIC and RSOs must be located in the same training area as the training event they are supervising and they must be thoroughly familiar with the conduct of training. This means that they must “shadow” an experienced OIC/RSO before being assigned to these duties. b. (U) Both the Range OIC and RSOs shall maintain radio communications with each other and also Longrifle and WFTBN S-3. During Crucible training, they will also maintain contact with the Crucible Operations Center (COC), see Annex K to this SOP. 4. (U) Training Facilities. MCB Camp Pendleton has published reference (c) to better support recruit training aboard Edson Range. B-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 MCB Camp Pendleton Facility Directive 10-06 does this by simplifying the administrative call-in procedures and associated OIC/RSO requirements during Field and Crucible Weeks by defining each of these weeks as a “Facility” and managing them accordingly in the Range Facility Management Information System (RFMIS). The only exception to this “facility system” is the AT-4 Tracer-Trainer and SAW live fire on Range 501 which will be called in as a normal range with its own OIC and RSO, separate from the following requirements and procedures: a. (U) Field Week, “Edson Field.” (1) (U) This training facility consists of TA Oscar 1, R505, R505A & R505B. (2) (U) This training facility requires a single OIC & RSO. (3) (U) This training facility includes the following munitions: A080 (5.56MM Blanks), G982 Smoke Grenades on R505 burn pits and/or TA Oscar-1 upper shelf. It also includes the use of trip flares on R505A and R505B burn pits. All munitions will be used in accordance with the current Fire Danger Rating (FDR). (4) (U) Proper call-in procedures to conduct training will be, “Longrifled, this is Edson Range, requesting to go ‘hot’ on Edson Field….” b. (U) 31 Area NBC Confidence Chamber. (1) (U) This training facility consists of the gas chamber, located with in the Oscar 1 training area at grid 630 808. (2) (U) This training facility requires a commissioned officer as Range OIC and an RSO in the grade of E-6 or above. (3) (U) An NBC specialist, MOS 5711, must be present at the NBC Chamber to conduct training. (4) (U) This training facility includes the following munition: K765 Riot Control Agent (CS). (5) (U) Proper call-in procedures to conduct training will be, “Longrifled, this is Edson Range, requesting to go ‘hot’ in the 31 Area Gas Chamber….” c. (U) Crucible Week, “Edson Crucible.” (1) (U) This training facility consists of TA Oscar 1, R501, R505, R505A and R505B. (2) (U) This training facility requires a Range OIC & RSO at R501 and an Assistant Range Safety Officer (A-RSO) (RSO certified B-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 sergeant of above) within the confines of TA Oscar 1 and R505. The Range OIC is permitted to rove R501, R505, and the TA Oscar 1 during this event in order to properly supervise all aspects of Crucible training. (NOTE: In accordance with reference (b), the recruit training company must also ensure that at least one commissioned officer observes all live fire training—this is separate from Range OIC duties as required by MCB Camp Pendleton.) (3) (U) The OIC/RSO will provide Range Control with the OIC and RSO’s information, and maintain the A-RSO in TA Oscar-1. However, the A-RSO information does not need to be identified to Range Control except in the case of an emergency and/or MEDEVAC. (4) (U) This training facility includes the following munitions: A080 (5.56MM Blanks), G982 Smoke Grenades on R505 burn pits. During night evolutions, B535 WSP will be used in the Oscar-1 training area near R501. All munitions will be used in accordance with the current Fire Danger Rating (FDR). (5) (U) The COC shall be staffed by the recruit training company. The COC shall keep the FWTCO Company Gunnery Sergeant and/or Chief Instructor apprised of the status of training and notify them in the event of any injuries or unusual events. The COC shall keep constant radio communications with both the OIC and the RSOs (Non-live fire Crucible stations and the Team Shoot at R501) and shall have an updated list of the recruit company leaderships’ cell phone numbers posted on the board at the COC at all times. (6) (U) Proper call-in procedures to conduct Crucible training will be, “Longrifled, this is Edson Range, requesting to go ‘hot’ on Edson Crucible….” d. (U) Conditioning Hikes, “Edson Hikes.” (1) (U) All hikes are conducted in Oscar 1 and/or Oscar 2 training areas. (2) (U) The recruit training company will provide both the OIC and RSO for all conditioning hikes. (3) (U) Proper call-in procedures to conduct conditioning hikes will be, “Longrifled, this is Edson Range, requesting to go ‘hot’ for a conditioning hike in the Oscar __ TA using route____....” (Training companies will use only the approved routes as listed in the WFTBN S-3 and/or Appendix 22 of Annex C to this SOP.) 5. (U) Coordinating Instructions. a. (U) The OIC and RSO shall both have two SABRE radios and maintain communications per Annex K of this SOP. A cell phone may be used as a backup. All cell phone numbers shall be given to the B-3 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 Crucible Operations Center prior to the start of training. The recruit training company in Crucible Week shall sign out their radios from the S-4 prior to the start of training. There is a SABRE recharger in the COC. b. (U) Reference (d) is the Marine Corps Order on the Marine Corps Martial Arts Program (MCMAP). To mitigate risk of recruit injury, the MCMAP instruction/bouts at both Iam’s Drive and Hansen’s Encounter will be officiated by at least one Green-belt Instructor certified Marine provided by FWTCO. (NOTE: A second Green-belt Instructor or SNCO/Officer must be on-hand as a safety observer when any pugil stick training is conducted.) c. (U) When FWTCO recruits return to the shall ensure that Base the bivouac status and Control accordingly.
sponsored training is complete each day and bivouac area, the recruit company commander Range Control and the WFTBN S-3 are notified of that the bivouac area is signed out from Range
d. (U) At 0540 each morning of the Crucible, the recruit training company Range OIC and FWTCO A-RSO will meet at the COC with at least one Series Chief Drill Instructor, the COC watch stander(s), and the FWTCO Company Gunnery Sergeant (or Chief Instructor) to confirm that all safety requirements are in place, radio communications checks are made, PE Grading Sheets are given to the appropriate stations, and all recruit trainers are ready to commence Crucible operations. (Since the R501 RSO will be at Range 501 to sign for ammunition, he will call the COC by radio/phone to confirm his readiness to go “hot.”) The Range OIC and RSOs shall confirm that a copy of the Crucible SOP is available to all recruit trainers associated with the Crucible and that the controls listed in the ORM assessments of Annex C are in place (e.g. Green Belt Instructor qualified Marines at MCMAP stations, all recruits having mouth guards, read-boards in place, and corpsmen are posted with their Unit Ones and backboards/head-braces per Annex A). The Range OIC, Series officers, RSOs, and corpsmen will disseminate cell phone numbers to each other at this time and ensure that the COC posts these important phone numbers on the board. After this is done, the COC will be stood up. The Crucible will not begin unless the Range OIC and A-RSO are physically present for this meeting at the COC and the Range 501 RSO calls in to the COC by phone/radio. (Note: Administrative foot movement from the Range 501 bivouac site to the Crucible start points inside the Oscar-1 training area is authorized before officially starting the Crucible but only after the recruit training company conducts internal radio checks with all of their Crucible squads.) e. (U) The Range OIC/RSO for pre-Crucible training (T-42 and T43) will checkout the appropriate Training Area, Range, or Confidence Course, as necessary per the procedures noted above for “Edson Crucible” or “Range 501.” B-4 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 f. (U) Range OICs and RSOs must have a current RSO certification from Base Range Control and be on the WFTBN master RSO qualification roster to stand duty. As a consequence, recruit training companies will verify their RSO qualification rosters with WFTBN S-3 during Grass Week training. When the RSO/OIC contacts Range Control for a hot time they are acknowledging, through their possession of a valid Camp Pendleton RSO card, that: (1) (U) RSO and OIC are on deck and have good communications with each other. (2) (U) The Duty Corpsman is on deck, his name is verified, and radio communications have been established. (3) (U) A safety vehicle is on deck. (4) (U) The RSO/OIC understands all applicable range regulations and the content of the Crucible SOP in its entirety, especially the operational risk assessments contained in Annex C. 6. (U) Admin and Logistics. See Annexes D (Logistics) and H (Medical) for detailed information on health services and casualty evacuation procedures. Medical support for the Field and Crucible Week training comes from the 31 Area Branch Medical Clinic, Naval Hospital Camp Pendleton. As it pertains to Range RSO/OIC duties, the following overview applies: a. (U) Medical Support at Range 501. In accordance with reference (a), all live-fire training events aboard Camp Pendleton require a dedicated non-training corpsman and safety vehicle. Therefore, “Day’s Defense/Team Shoot,” Event 1A, requires one dedicated corpsman to support it when the range is in a “hot status.” This corpsman shall have a backboard and neck-brace on hand in case of a MCMAP injury at Iam’s Drive b. (U) Medical Support for Oscar-1 and 31 Area Cantonment. All non-live-fire training aboard Edson Range takes place within the Oscar-1 Training Area and 31 Cantonment Area. Reference (a) states that at least one non-training corpsman and a safety vehicle will be present to support non-live fire training events. The Range Safety Officer and/or Officer-in-Charge shall dispatch this corpsman throughout the training area as needed. However, the 31-Area Branch Medical Clinic normally staffs the non-training events of the Crucible with three (3) corpsmen: the first corpsman is usually posted at the “12-Stall” to conduct foot checks, the second at R505, and the third at the Confidence Course. 7. (U) Safety. The RSO and Range OIC will review the Crucible SOP in its entirety before each Crucible event. Particular attention will be paid to the safety requirements in this Annex, Annex C, and Appendix 2 to Annex C (Iam’s Drive MCMAP sustainment training). The RSOs and B-5 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 OIC will also ensure that all recruits participating in the Crucible receive a safety brief the night prior to its execution using Appendix (a) to this Annex. This safety brief will be given again to each Crucible Squad before they conduct the live-fire station (“Team Shoot”) at Range 501. Appendices (1) through (4) to this annex are provided. 8. (U) Signal.
See Annex K (Communications) to this Crucible SOP.
APPENDICES: 1-Range Safety Brief 2-Ammunition Handling Procedures 3-Range Checklist 4-SAW and AT-4 Tracer-Trainer Safety Protocol ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
R. B. RICHARDSON Major, U. S. Marine Corps Commanding
B-6 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 APPENDIX 1 (SAFETY BRIEF) TO ANNEX B (RANGE AND TRAINING AREA OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIGEO CRUCIBLE SOP (U)
SAFETY BRIEF Good morning, I am ______________________, and I will be the Range Safety Officer for today’s event. The OIC for today’s event is __________________. Additionally, everyone out here is a Safety Officer. Safety is paramount in conducting these operations. We do not want anyone injured. If at any time you witness an unsafe act or see one developing, call for a safety timeout and operations will cease until the situation is corrected and can continue in a safe manner. You will not be punished for calling a safety timeout. I will be located at: _______________ 1. WEAPONS HANDLING Ensure that you follow all standard Weapons Handling Safety Rules: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Treat every weapon as if Keep your weapon on safe Keep your finger off the Do not point your weapon shoot.
it were loaded. until you intend to fire. trigger until you intend to fire. at anything you do not intend to
2. SAFETY GEAR All 782 gear will be worn while conducting training. Dummy-corded 782 gear consists of flak, Kevlar, and LBV. (Soft cover may be worn if prescribed by both the RSO and OIC) 3. PYROTECHNICS/SMOKE GRENADES No pyrotechnics will be used without first consulting with Range control. Pyrotechnics will only be used in a burn barrel designed for that specific purpose. When the FDR is 81 extreme or higher and Range Control may prohibit use of ammunition. In such cases, notify the Chief Instructor, XO, or CO FWTCO in order for them to enact appropriate waivers with Range Control. If existing waivers don’t apply, the OIC/RSO will get approval from Chief Instructor, XO, or CO FWTCO before notifying the ammo techs not to bring specific types of ammunition to the training area/range. UNCLASSIFIED B-1-1
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
Do not employ smoke grenades within a confined space. The live smoke grenade must be placed on a hard surface or an open, sandy/dirt area. 4. CASUALTY HANDLING Casualties will be evacuated from the training area during a MEDEVAC. The RSO (or OIC) will first radio Range Control (“Longrifle” Channel 12) to request casualty evacuation. Once the MEDEVAC request has been made to Range Control, the RSO will use the Operations Net (Channel 1) to notify WFTBN staff. Company Corpsmen will be in the area during all events. The RSO (or OIC) will direct them to the desired location in the event of a MEDEVAC. (For Land Navigation exercises, ensure recruits know that if an injury occurs, to stay in their buddy teams and send the other buddy team for help.) (All recruit trainers will be thoroughly familiar with the MEDEVAC procedures contained in Annex H to the Crucible SOP.) 5. VEHICLE SAFETY Maximum speed is 15 MPH for tactical vehicles and not to exceed safe operations in light of road and weather conditions. A safety vehicle will always be present during training. 6. COMMUNICATIONS All OIC’s and RSO's will carry two (2) radios and be in contact with S-3 and Range Control. ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
R. B. RICHARDSON Major, U. S. Marine Corps Commanding
UNCLASSIFIED B-1-2
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 APPENDIX 2 (AMMUNTION HANDLING PROCEDURES) TO ANNEX B (RANGE AND TRAINING AREA OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIGEO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) AMMUNITION HANDLING PROCEDURES 1. Ammunition must be strictly accounted for using NAVMC 11381, AND DD Form 1348-1A. 2. Ammunition will only be used in the manner for which it was designed. 3. No ammunition crate or box will be opened until it is ready to be expended. 4. Ammunition will be stored off the deck and protected from the elements. (There must be 12 inches from the ammunition and the protection.) 5. All ammunition will be unopened boxes/crates or repacked with original packing materials. 6. No expended or unexpended ammunition will be left on the range. 7. All ordnance items will be turned into WFTBN Ordnance (Callsign, “Alpha Six”) when firing is complete. 8. Individuals will personally check their weapons, pockets, magazines, and equipment pouches for loose ammunition prior to being inspected by the RSO or representative. 9.
Ammunition will be issued from a single issue point.
10. All filling of magazines will be done in a designated area. 11. No ammunition will be loaded or unloaded in waiting or rest areas set aside for those waiting to fire. 12. Weapons will be kept in Condition 4 until the shooter is on the firing line and receives a command from a recruit training instructor to load. (Applies to live-fire events only) 13. All malfunctions will be cleared in an expedient manner. 14. The OIC/ RSO will verify that no recruit leaves the range with ammunition. The RSO will supervise and ensure a thorough shake down is conducted by the Drill Instructors. 15. All donnage and brass will be police called. 16. BFA’s will be attached to every weapon for blank fire events. UNCLASSIFIED B-2-1
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
R. B. RICHARDSON Major, U. S. Marine Corps Commanding
UNCLASSIFIED B-2-2
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 APPENDIX 3 (RANGE CHECKLIST) TO ANNEX B (RANGE AND TRAINING AREA OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIGEO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) RANGE CHECKLIST 1. READ/REVIEW ALL RANGE REGULATIONS. Have a copy present with you at the range. 2.
Range signed out with range control.
3.
Range flag posted at entrance to range.
4. Corpsman or other medical personnel present, with appropriate medical equipment, see Annex A to the Crucible SOP. 5.
Safety vehicle with driver present.
6. Proper communication with Range Control and WFTBN Operations (or the 31 Area Guard after-hours, call sign “Phoenix”). 7.
Required Safety Personnel and AI’s in place.
8. Fire fighting equipment available and in place near burn pits and blank firing stations. 9.
Call in to go "HOT" once everything is in place.
10. While firing, ensure RSO is maintaining positive communication with range control. 11. Ensure clear redundant cease fire signals are understood by all personnel on range (i.e., whistles and bull horns). 12. Upon termination of firing call in "COLD" to Range Control. Ensure that strict accountability is made of all fired and saved ammunition. 13. Get accountability of all personnel, equipment, and ammunition. 14.
Conduct a detailed shake-down before securing any personnel.
15.
Conduct a detailed police call of range.
16. Recruit training companies will sign out with Range Control and Phoenix when going into their bivouac status and maintain radio communications as required. 17. When the FDR is 81 extreme or higher and Range Control may prohibit use of ammunition. In such cases, notify the Chief Instructor, XO, or CO FWTCO in order for them to enact UNCLASSIFIED B-3-1
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 appropriate waivers with range control. If existing waivers don’t apply, the OIC/RSO will get approval from Chief Instructor, XO, or CO FWTCO before notifying the ammo techs not to bring specific types of ammunition to the training area/range. 18. For any Land Navigation Practical Application, ensure recruits know that if an injury occurs, to stay in their buddy teams and send the other buddy team for help. 19. Ensure that a red smoke is available on Range 501 to be used by the RSO to mark an LZ in case of MEDEVAC or to wave-off wayward aircraft and make a cease fire. ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
R. B. RICHARDSON Major, U. S. Marine Corps Commanding
UNCLASSIFIED B-3-2
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 APPENDIX 4 (SAW & AT-4 TRACER-TRAINER SAFETY PROTOCOLS) TO ANNEX B (RANGE AND TRAINING AREA OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIGEO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) (U) REFERENCES: (a) (b) (c)
FM 23-14 M249 Light Machine Gun in the Automatic Rifle Role, TM 08671A-10/1, Operator’s Manual, Machine Gun, 5.56mm, M249, FMFM 23-31 FM 23-25, pages 3-1 through 6-9, A-1 through A-4, B-6 through B-12, and C-1 through C-8
(U) TIME ZONE:
Uniform
1. (U) Purpose. This appendix provides policy for the safety procedures that will be followed when handling the M249 SAW and AT-4 Tracer-Trainer at Range 501. 2.
M249 SAW.
a. All SAWs will be designated with appropriate armory tags. The tags identify them as having received a PFI/LTI for use on the firing line or as SAWs designated only for weapons handling. Weapons that have not received a PFI/LTI will not be fired. b. Field instructors will clear and inspect all SAWs before and after transporting the weapons to the firing line or to the weapons handling tables. Every SAW will be cleared by conducting a Five-Point Safety Check and punching the barrel with four cleaning rods. (1) Check the feed pawl assembly under the feed cover. (2) Check the feed tray assembly. (3) Lift the feed tray assembly and inspects the chamber. (4) Check the space between the bolt assembly and the chamber. (5) Insert two fingers of the left hand in the magazine well to extract any ammunition or brass. c. The RSO will personally perform a secondary check of each SAW before it is moved to/from the firing line, weapons handling tables, returned to the armorer, or placed on the truck. He will complete each safety check with a functions check.
UNCLASSIFIED B-4-1
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 d. All instructors and recruits on the firing line must wear hearing protection, flack, and helmets. NO EXCEPTIONS. e. SAWs will only be fired from the prone position and with bipods supported by half-full sandbags in order to prevent inadvertently being kicked into an unsafe direction. f. Strict accountability and control of all ammunition will be maintained by the RSO and instructors on the firing line. Ammunition will only be issued to the recruits when they are in position to fire. Ammunition will not be transported by recruits to or from the firing line. g. Recruits will only move to or from the firing line when told to do so by an instructor on the line. h. There will be a minimum of one instructor for every two firing points. i. Once the recruit assumes a prone position behind a Condition 4 SAW, the instructor shall give the recruit a belt of 20 rounds and give the command, “Shooter, with a belt of 20 rounds, make a Condition 1 weapon.” When the shooter is ready, the instructor shall give the command, “With 5-7 round bursts, engage _____ -colored targets to your direct front.” Once the shooter has finished shooting, he will put the weapon in Condition 4 and wait to be told to move by his instructor. The new shooter will not load until told to do so by the instructor. j. Recruits will not conduct barrel changes. k. Before recruits exit the training area, a complete shakedown of all gear and personnel will be conducted by Drill Instructors. l. SAWs will be turned-in to the armorers in Condition 4 with the buttstock first. The ejection port cover will be shown to the armorer to verify the bolt is forward. 3. AT-4 Tracer-Trainers. a. Field instructors will clear and inspect all AT-4 TracerTrainers before and after transporting the weapons to the firing line. b. Recruits will only move to or from the firing line when told to do so by an instructor on the line. Recruits will prepare the tracer-trainer in the sitting position. c. All ammunition will be accounted for by the RSO. UNCLASSIFIED B-4-2
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 d. Recruits will never be given ammunition. An instructor will personally load each round into the tracer-trainer with the arming-key. Instructors will closely supervise recruits handling the tracer-trainer; the weapon will only be fired from the sitting position. e. Tracer-trainers will always be pointed down range, especially during loading. f. Instructors will instruct the recruits to visually check the back blast area and give the appropriate warning. g. After all live fire training is complete, a thorough gear and personal shakedown will be conducted by the Drill Instructors. h. After training, all AT-4 Tracer-Trainers will be cleared by field instructors and then double-checked by the RSO before being turned over to armory personnel. 4. Coordinating Instructions. a. Ammunition will be issued from a single issue point. b. Ammunition will not be broken out until the recruits have started their SAW and AT-4 weapons handling examinations. c. All malfunctions will be cleared under the direct supervision of an instructor. d. An armorer will be at R501 during the conduct of this training to assist with any malfunctions and/or properly tag weapons needing repair. e. The RSO will ensure that Red Smoke is on-hand at R501 in case of emergency. Smoke may be used to mark an LZ for an urgent MEDEVAC, signal a “Cease Fire,” or to wave-off wayward aircraft. ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
R. B. RICHARDSON Major, U. S. Marine Corps Commanding
UNCLASSIFIED B-4-3
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIGEO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) (U) REFERENCES: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m)
Marine Corps Order 1510.32D (Recruit Training) Marine Corps Order 1553.2A (Formal Schools Management) Marine Corps Order 1510.89B (MCCS Volume 1) Recruit Training (Male) Program of Instruction CG, TECOM ITS Conference Implementation MSG dtd R211600ZJUL06 Army Training Circular 25-10: Leaders Guide to Lane Training MCRD San Diego DepO P1510.30L (Recruit Training SOP) Camp Pendleton Base Range Regulations (BO P3500.1M) Camp Pendleton Contingency Plan for Range and Training Area Accidents and Injuries (BO 3040.1D) Marine Corps Martial Arts Program (MCMAP) Order MCO 1500.54A Weapons & Field Training Battalion/31 Cantonment Area Force Protection-05 (31A FP PLAN 05) MCRD Parris Island Operations Order 01-01 (Crucible SOP) MCO 1500.54B (MCMAP)
(U) TIME ZONE:
Uniform
1. (U) Purpose. This annex provides instruction for the proper conduct of each Crucible event and station. 2. (U) Situation. Recruits have completed Field Skills training in accordance with the references and are now ready to start their Crucible with their established fire teams. Recruit trainers responsible for the conduct of the Crucible are thoroughly familiar with the contents of this SOP and references (c) and (d) as it relates to the proper performance of Marine Corps Common Skills that are reinforced during the Crucible. a. (U) Area of Operations. Edson Range is located in the southwest portion of Camp Pendleton and includes the 31 Cantonment Area, the Edson Range Impact Area, and the Oscar-One Training Area (which includes Ranges 501, 502, 503, 505, 505A, 505B and an NBC Chamber). The Edson Range area is bordered by Stuart Mesa Road to the west, MASS-3 Road and the 32 Area to the east and south. Aliso Canyon Road is Edson Range’s northern boundary. Notable structures in the Edson Range area include three command posts, a chapel, mess facility, several recruit barracks that house up to 640 recruits each, an armory and four ammunition bunkers. 3. (U) Mission. Conduct the Crucible in accordance with the references and instructions outlined in this SOP to better prepare recruits for service to their country and Corps as a United States Marine. C - 1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 4. (U) Execution. a. (U) Concept of Operations. (1) (U) Crucible Squads shall be organized and led according to the instructions contained in Annex A (Task Organization) of this Crucible SOP and the references above. The provisions of this SOP shall govern the conduct of the Crucible. (2) (U) The Crucible is comprised of nine-teen (19) day events and two (2) night events plus a 10-mile “Reaper Hike” at the conclusion of the Crucible. During the day events, two Crucible Squads are normally paired together so that these squads may travel together to each event and then rotate the conduct of each event’s stations in the time allotted per Appendix 23 (Crucible Route Matrix/Timeline) to Annex C (Crucible Operations). Night events are conducted by the whole recruit series, or when not on a “Series Track,” by the entire company. (3) (U) Operational Graphic. The following graphic illustrates the general location of Crucible Events at Edson Range: HEAD
RANGE 501
CONFIDENCE CHAMBER
BLEACHERS
MED EVAC PT #21 EDSON’S RIDGE
NOONAN’S EVAC
MED EVAC PT #12
H
CRUCIBLE
DAY/NIGHT PATROL
PE 3: MAP READING & C3 CRUCIBLE 3-MILE HIKE START&WPN MAINT O’COURSE
M ED CU K
C
D
FIRE TEAM ASS COURSE (R505)
B
COMPASS CRS
C M R
THE ‘CIRCLES’
HOWARDS ASSAULT
PMI SHACK
RANGES
EV AC
W AL L
GONZALES X’ING JANSEN’S PE STATION THRUST 2: IA DRILLS BAC
BORDELON’S PE STATION 1: ASLT H/A + FORMATIONS+ DAY&NIGHT IND MVMNT
PISTOL RANGE
EL A ’S
GARCIA’S ENGAGEMENT BRAVO DRAW
CHECK POINT 8
EDSON RANGE
JENKIN’S PINNACLE
HEAD
SU CC ES S CRUCIBLE 3-MILE HIKE END
MED EVAC PT #9 RANGE 131
BLEACHERS
UPPER SHELF
PT
12 STALL
COPELAND’S ASSAULT RANGE 505 MED EVAC PT #3
ARMORY H EN AN CO SO UN N ’S TE RS
N MAIN GATE
PARADE DECK
LEGEND
MED EVAC PT #6 SUPPLY
MED EVAC PTS 3,5,8 MILE HIKE START POINT
HIKE ROUTE BN CP
BARRACKS
C - 2 UNCLASSIFIED
SNCO BARRACKS
STAIRWAY TO HEAVEN
CRUCIBLE CP
31611
31612
31613
31614
BAPTISTA’S WEAVER
SKY SCRAPER
MED EVAC PT #7 MCTSSA BCH ACCESS
E IN -L O G TW BRD
CONFIDENCE COURSE
MED EVAC PT #5
#1
BA CH SILON AL LE E NG E RE AP ER
M IA
BA LL AR D ’S
MED EVAC PT #2
VE RI ’S D
M IN I
DAY’S DEFENSE (TEAM SHOOT)
BAS
BIVOUAC SITE HIKE STRT PNTS
H
HELO PAD
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 b. (U) Conduct of Operations. (1) (U)
Preparation.
(a) (U) Field & Weapons Training Company. FWTCO shall ensure that read-boards, bivouac areas, ranges and obstacles are all clean and serviceable prior to each Crucible. Moreover, the Commanding Officer of Field & Weapons Training Company shall ensure that all of his instructors are thoroughly trained and versed in all matters pertaining to this SOP. FWTCO will also provide one SNCOIC or officer aboard Edson Range and in the training area during all FWTCO sponsored events to act as a direct liaison to the recruit training company and supervise the proper conduct of events. (b) (U) Drill Instructors and Series Officers. Drill Instructors and Series Officers will be provided with a Crucible orientation during their respective schools at the Depot. However, Drill Instructors and Series Officers must shadow an experienced Drill Instructor or another Officer before leading a Crucible Squad on his own or be assigned to Range OIC duties. Exceptions to this policy will be made on a case-by-case basis by the Commanding Officer, Weapons and Field Training Battalion. In any case, recruit training companies shall ensure that Drill Instructors are familiar with each station, MOH citations, and Core Values before being assigned to lead a Crucible Squad. (c) (U) Recruit Training Companies. Recruit Training Companies will ensure that all of their recruit trainers are thoroughly familiar and comply with the contents of this SOP. Recruit Companies are authorized to establish a bivouac the night prior to the Crucible at Range 501. (2) (U) Crucible Event Execution. (a) (U) General. Each Crucible Event (and their substations) will be executed in strict compliance with this SOP; Appendixes 1 - 23 to this annex provide specific instructions to all recruit trainers on the proper conduct of each Crucible Event/Station. (b) (U) Sleep and Food Deprivation. By design, the Crucible is a difficult exercise meant to challenge recruits physically and mentally. Part of this physical test is induced by sleep and food deprivation as authorized by references (a), (d), (g) and (l). Accordingly, recruits will only be authorized four (4) hours of sleep each night of the Crucible and one (1) MRE per day to be eaten concurrent with training. As authorized by reference (g), recruits will also be allowed seasonal food supplements under the special conditions set forth in this SOP. C - 3 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 1 (U) Bivouacking at R501/Guardian Angel. The recruit company will bivouac at Range 501 during the Crucible. During the bivouac status, designated recruits will still maintain their security watch in accordance with reference (d), (e), and (g). This security watch shall include practical application of the Guardian Angel Concept and Introduction to Fighting Positions, as prescribed by reference (d). The two-man fighting positions are located at grids 6024 8193, 6067 8021, and 6067 8208 and the Guardian Angel is located at the R501 Tower. The two-man Guardian Angel position shall post the three two-man fighting positions with watch standers as prescribed by the recruit training company NOT TO EXCEED 30 MINUTES. All two-man positions will be manned by assigned buddy teams in accordance with Chapter 12 of reference (g). The Guardian Angel at the tower will stay on the second rung of the stairwell—they will not climb the ladder to the control box. (See Annex K (Communications) for the communications diagram that supports the Guardian Angel requirement during bivouacking at Range 501. The FWTCO SNCOIC or designated representative will sign out I-COM radios to the Series Chiefs each night of the Crucible to support this requirement.) 2 (U) Hot/Cold Wets. During cold/wet weather (60 degrees Fahrenheit or less), “hot wets” will be provided to recruits conducting the Crucible twice during the day events and once while waiting for the night event to commence, per reference (g). The recruit company will coordinate with the WFTBN S-4 and 31 Area Mess Hall for hot wets. During Red or Black Flag conditions in hot weather, Gatorade supplements may be provided as deemed appropriate by the recruit company commander and coordinated with the WFTBN S-4 and 31 Area Mess Hall. (3) (U) Event Timelines and Training Schedules. Appendix 23 (Training Timeline/Crucible Squad Route Matrix) to this annex provides detailed training timelines/schedules for each Crucible Squad. (a) (U) Crucible Start and End Times. When seasonal daylight permits, the day events of the Crucible will run between 0600 and 1900. The night events will occur only after it is visually dark; recruits will be seated in their respective bleachers for their night event briefs at sunset (colors) during the summer months. During winter months, the Crucible start time may be delayed until 0700 in order to allow enough sunlight to fill the sky and safely conduct the daylight events. Also during winter months, the day events will end at sunset (evening colors) and the Crucible Squads will have 45 minutes to be seated in their respective bleachers for their night event briefs. C - 4 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 (4) (U) Warrior Breakfast/Edson Raider Field Skills Award. Following the Reaper 10-Mile Hike, recruit companies will conduct a foot check on the 31 Area parade deck with the support of corpsmen from the Branch Medical Clinic. While on the parade deck, the Edson Raider Field Skills Award may be presented to the recruit platoon who obtained the best overall average in field skills performance evaluations at the discretion of the recruit training company commander as coordinated with FWTCO. After the foot checks and any award presentation by FWTCO, the recruit training company will proceed to the 31 Area Mess Hall for their “Warriors’ Breakfast” in accordance with Annex D of this SOP. c. (U) Coordinating Instructions. (1) (U) Crucible Route Markings. The Crucible is clearly marked on the ground with reflective red signs in accordance with the operational graphic above. These signs include: (a) (U) Award Citation Read-boards. These read-boards contain a photo of the award recipient along with his/her citation for the Core Value discussions contained in the appendixes to this annex. (b) (U) Crucible Route Direction. Red reflective signs are posted throughout the training area to aid Crucible Squads in navigating to their next event. (c) (U) Stars. Throughout the Crucible, signs with white star(s) are posted. These signs signal the Drill Instructor leading his Crucible Squad to have the recruits execute one of the five Immediate Action (IA) Drills as taught during Field Week. Prior to the Crucible, Drill Instructors will discuss/rehearse the following drills with the recruits so that they know what to expect. The IA Drills are: 1 (U) Establish a Hasty Ambush. Drill Instructors will give the appropriate verbal command, “Hasty Ambush Left (OR Right)!” The recruit team leaders, acting independently of each other, will then take charge of their teams. For example, Hasty Ambush Left—the recruit fire teams traveling behind the Drill Instructor would immediately give the appropriate hand-and-arm signals, face to the left, maintain their proper dispersion, and lay down in the prone behind available cover and/or concealment. In other words, on order from the DI (“HASTY AMBUSH _____!”), the team leaders, acting independently of the other teams, will give the signal for Halt, Enemy in Sight, and Hasty Ambush _____. Once the team is in the prone facing the threat, the team leader will then initiate the ambush (BANG, BANG, BANG!). When the drill is over, the Crucible Squad will continue its tactical movement to the next Crucible event. C - 5 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 2 (U) Break Contact. Drill Instructors may choose for their fire teams to Break Contact. In this drill, the DIs would first have their recruits ground their daypacks and then simply give the command, “Get down, Take Cover! Break Contact, ___ O’clock, 100 meters! ____Cover us!" This drill is done by teams, therefore, the Drill Instructor may want to choose a direction that is perpendicular to the Crucible Squad’s original direction of movement. Note that the Drill Instructors shall not have the fire teams move/break contact for more than 200 meters. 3 (U) React to Near Ambush. If the Drill Instructor chooses this drill for the fire teams of his Crucible Squad, he will first designate the location of the enemy and then give the command using the acronym “CNA.” For example, the preparatory command is “Contact (Right), 50 meters”, the command of execution is “Near Ambush,” and the recruits’ response ditty is “Assault Through!” In this example, the recruits would face to the right and individually assault 50 meters to the right and establish a hasty limit of advance. 4 (U) Short Halt (5-Meter Check). This drill teaches recruits to check their immediate surroundings for an IED or suspicious material before taking a short halt. Recruits will simply be given the hand-and-arm signal to halt and before taking a knee, they will do a quick circular inspection of their immediate individual surroundings. This drill should be done every time the Crucible Squad halts while moving from event to event in a tactical formation. 5 (U) React to Indirect Fire. This IA Drill will only be conducted at the sign (near the top of “Alpha Draw”) with two (2) white stars on it. In this drill, the DIs would first have their recruits ground their daypacks and then simply give the warning, “Incoming!” The team leaders will then give a direction and distance for their fire teams to break contact to as a whole fire team. Recruits will not break contact for more than 200 meters. When this drill is complete, the DI will reform his Crucible Squad and continue on to the next event. (2) (U) Tactical Environment. Most of the Crucible events are tactical evolutions and the proper use of individual movement, tactical formations, and use of cover and concealment will be enforced at all times. Recruits must maintain proper dispersion during the entire Crucible event when feasible. Proper dispersion for the Crucible means a minimum of 10-15 paces between each recruit. When at a tactical obstacle, unless otherwise directed in this SOP, the recruits will get in the prone position to provide security. It is C - 6 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 the Drill Instructor’s responsibility to ensure the recruits stay awake. (a) (U) Every recruit will carry his own pack. Recruits will not carry more than one pack nor will they run while wearing packs. (b) (U) Recruit will use proper fire team formations while moving from event to event with their Crucible Squad. For example, fire team column or wedge, Crucible Squad column. Again, one of the goals of the Crucible is to properly reinforce the field skills that are taught to the recruits. (3) (U) Hot Washes/Debriefs. Recruit training companies will conduct a hot wash/debrief each night of the Crucible with the FWTCO RSO and SNCOIC. During the winter months, this hot wash will go after the night events. A formal after action report will be submitted in person by the recruit training company commander to the WFTBN S-3 and FWTCO Company Commander before returning to the Depot. (4) (U) Modifications to the Training Schedule. The Commanding Officer, Weapons and Field Training Battalion must approve any modifications to the training schedule upon receiving recommendations to such effect as coordinated between the recruit training company commander, the FWTCO commander, and the WFTBN operations officer. (5) (U) Instructor Food and Drink. Under no circumstances will any recruit trainer eat or drink commercial food products (e.g. Coke, Gatorade bottles, chips, etc) in front of recruits. (6) (U) Force Protection. For force protection measures aboard Edson Range, see reference (k). (7) (U) Media Relations. All media inquires will be directed the Weapons and Field Training Battalion S-3 via the MCRD San Diego Public Affairs Officer. The recruit training company commander will have the final decision on all interview requests of recruits under his charge. (8) (U) MCMAP Risk Management. Reference (m) is the Marine Corps Order on the Marine Corps Martial Arts Program (MCMAP). To mitigate risk of recruit injury, the MCMAP training/bouts at Iam’s Drive and Hansen’s Encounter will be officiated by at least one Green-belt Instructor certified Marine provided by FWTCO. Additionally, another green-belt instructor or SNCO or Officer must be present at Iam’s Drive when pugil sticks are used. (9) (U) Performance Evaluation Stations. The recruit training company will fill out the three Performance Evaluation grading sheets for each Crucible Squad indicating the name of the Recruit Fire Team Leaders and team number assigned to each Crucible Squad. These grading sheets must be handed to the Field Training Platoon Leader in Squad order, and sorted by each of the three PE stations, 24 hours C - 7 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 prior to the start of the Crucible. A copy of these grading sheets can be found in the appendix for each PE or by asking the FWTCO Chief Instructor. 5. (U) Admin and Logistics.
See Annex D (Logistics) to this SOP.
a. (U) Recruit Gear List. See, Appendix 1 (Recruit Gear List) to Annex D of this SOP for the equipment required by recruits to complete the Reaper Hike and otherwise conduct the Crucible. b. (U) Retention of Individual Gear. As required by reference (d), recruits will maintain their gear by using the prescribed dummy cording technique. All canteen pouches will be dummy-corded with a Scaffold Knot secured by the Overhand Knot using the extra pair of bootlaces that recruits are required to maintain see, http://www.go.fireinnovations.com/page.cfm?name=Knots, or Lesson ID 1221LP, on the FWTCo website. c. (U) Obstacle Equipment, Maintenance, and Contingency Manning. Field Instructors will maintain accountability of all equipment and obstacles and perform maintenance in accordance with Annex E (Maintenance) of this SOP. In accordance with Annex A (Task Organization) Field Instructors will also provide technical assistance to Drill Instructors supervising their recruits at designated stations during the conduct of the Crucible. When the Field Training Platoon is manned under T/O strength, 36 Marines, Iam’s Drive, the Sky Scraper, and Gonzalez’s Crossing may not be manned with the requisite number of Field Instructor as listed in Annex A. If Field Instructors are not available to assist at the Sky Scraper and Gonzalez’s Crossing, then the Series Chiefs will sign out and in equipment for these two stations each day and night of the Crucible (i.e. one “Fred” Dummy and 24 Field Protective Masks, respectively). If a second Martial Arts Instructor or SNCO or Officer is not available as a safety observer at Iam’s Drive, then pugil sticks may not be used and only one pit can be active for the body-sparring. 6. (U) Command and Signal a. (U) Command. (1) (U) See Basic SOP Order and Annex A for Command Relationships and Task Organization of Crucible Squads and recruit trainers. (2) (U) A face-to-face meeting between the recruit training company staff and FWTCO staff will be conducted prior to each Crucible as coordinated during the Field Week In-brief. (3) (U) Crucible Operations Center. The Crucible Operations Center (COC) shall be manned by the recruit training company in accordance with Annex A to this SOP. The COC shall have a roster of all Drill Instructors and recruits assigned to each Crucible Squad. C - 8 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 The COC shall inform the FWTCO staff anytime an unusual incident occurs with regard to training (e.g. a recruit getting hurt and being evacuated to the Naval Hospital, read-boards missing from stations, Crucible Squads missing time hacks, etc). (4) (U) (U) At 0540 each morning of the Crucible, the recruit training company Range OIC and FWTCO A-RSO will meet at the COC with at least one Series Chief Drill Instructor, the COC watch stander(s), and the FWTCO Company Gunnery Sergeant (or Chief Instructor) to confirm that all safety requirements are in place, radio communications checks are made, PE Grading Sheets are given to the appropriate stations, and all recruit trainers are ready to commence Crucible operations. (Since the R501 RSO will be at Range 501 to sign for ammunition, he will call the COC by radio/phone to confirm his readiness to go “hot.”) The Range OIC and RSOs shall confirm that a copy of the Crucible SOP is available to all recruit trainers associated with the Crucible and that the controls listed in the ORM assessments of Annex C are in place (e.g. Green Belt Instructor qualified Marines at MCMAP stations, all recruits having mouth guards, read-boards in place, and corpsmen are posted with their Unit Ones and backboards/head-braces per Annex A). The Range OICm Series officers, RSOs, and corpsmen will disseminate cell phone numbers to each other at this time and ensure that the COC posts these important phone numbers on the board. After this is done, the COC will be stood up. The Crucible will not begin unless the Range OIC and A-RSO are physically present for this meeting at the COC and the Range 501 RSO calls in to the COC by phone/radio. (Note: Administrative foot movement from the Range 501 bivouac site to the Crucible start points inside the Oscar-1 training area is authorized before officially starting the Crucible but only after the recruit training company conducts internal radio checks with all of their Crucible squads.
b. (U) Signal. See basic operation order or Annex K (Communication Information Systems). ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
R. B. RICHARDSON Major, U. S. Marine Corps Commanding
APPENDIXES: 9 Appendix 1—Day’s Defense/Team Shoot & Ballard’s Success Tab A—Day’s Defense/Team Shoot C - 9 UNCLASSIFIED
C-1-1 C-1-A-1
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 "
Tab B—Ballard’s Success
! Appendix 2—Iam’s Drive
C-1-B-1 C-2-1
"
Tab A—Body Sparing
C-2-A-1
"
Tab B—Pugil Sticks
C-2-B-1
! Appendix 3—Night Patrol Rehearsal
C-3-1
! Appendix 4—Sky Scraper & Two-line Bridge
C-4-1
"
Tab A—Sky Scrapper
C-4-A-1
"
Tab B—Two-line Bridge
C-4-B-1
! Appendix 5—Stairway to Heaven & Baptista’s Weaver
C-5-1
"
Tab A—Stairway to Heaven
C-5-A-1
"
Tab B—Baptista’s Weaver
C-5-B-1
! Appendix 6—Hansen’s Counters
C-6-1
! Appendix 7—Compass/Pace Course
C-7-1
! Appendix 8—Howard’s Assault & Fire Team Obstacle Course
C-8-1
"
Tab A—Howard’s Assault
C-8-A-1
"
Tab B—Fire Team Obstacle Course
C-8-B-1
! Appendix 9—Bordelon’s Assault & PE Station 1 "
Tab A—Bordelon’s Assault
"
Tab B—PE Station 1 (H&A Signals, Formations, and Day & Night Individual Movement)
C-9-1 C-9-A-1 C-9-B-1
! Appendix 10— Weapons Maintenance
C-10-1
! Appendix 11—Three-Mile Hike
C-11-1
! Appendix 12—Copeland's Assault/Fire Team Assault Course
C-12-1
! Appendix 13—PE Station 2 & Core Values (“Isms”)
C-13-1
"
PE Station 2 (IA Drills)
C-13-A-1
"
Core Values (“Isms”)
C-13-A-1
! Appendix 14—PE Station 3 (Map Reading and Camouflage, C-14-1
Cover, & Concealment)_ ! Appendix 15—Noonan’s Casualty Evac & Jenkins’s Pinnacle
C-15-1
"
Tab A—Noonan’s Casualty Evacuation
C-15-A-1
"
Tab B-Jenkins’s Pinnacle
C-15-B-1
! Appendix 16—Twelve Stall LRC & Core Values C - 10 UNCLASSIFIED
C-16-1
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 "
Tab A—Twelve Stall LRC and Medical Check
C-16-A-1
"
Tab B-Core Values (“Who am I?”)
C-16-B-1
"
Tab C-Twelve Stall Operational Risk Assessment
C-16-C-1
! Appendix 17—Garcia’s Engagement & Basilone’s Challenge
C-17-1
"
Tab A—Garcia’s Engagement
C-17-A-1
"
Tab B—Basilone’s Challenge
C-17-B-1
! Appendix 18—Cukela’s Wall & Gonzalez’s Crossing
C-18-1
"
Tab A—Cukela’s Wall
C-18-A-1
"
Tab B—Gonzalez’s Crossing
C-18-B-1
! Appendix 19—Jansen’s Thrust
C-19-1
! Appendix 20—Night Fire Team Satellite Patrol
C-20-1
"
Tab A—Course Diagram & Instructor Guidance
C-20-A-1
"
Tab B—Team Leader’s Patrol Order
C-20-B-1
! Appendix 21—Night Infiltration Course
C-21-1
! Appendix 22—Reaper 10-Mile Hike
C-22-1
"
Tab A-Edson Raider PME
C-22-A-1
"
Tab B-Hike Checkpoints and Route Overlays
C-22-B-1
"
Tab C-Hike Brief
C-22-C-1
! Appendix 23—Crucible Route Matrix/Timeline
C - 11 UNCLASSIFIED
C-23-1
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 APPENDIX 1 (DAY’S DEFENSE/TEAM SHOOT AND BALLARD’S SUCCESS) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIGEO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) (U) REFERENCES (a) (b) (c) (d)
U.S. Army Training Circular 25-10: A Leader’s Guide to Lane Training MCWP 3-11.2: Marine Rifle Squad Marine Corps Combat Marksmanship Program Table 2 MCRD San Diego RTR Recruit Knowledge Student Handout
1. (U) Purpose. The purpose of this document is to provide specific guidance on the conduct of Crucible Event 1: Day’s Defense/Team Shoot and Ballard’s Success. 2. (U) General. Crucible Event 1 is comprised of two substations, Day’s Defense/Team Shoot and Ballard’s Success. Both Crucible Squads shall execute Day’s Defense/Team Shoot together and then complete Ballard’s Success. See Tabs A and B to this appendix for specific instructions on each station. 3. (U) Safety. All recruit trainers will refer to Annex B to this order for the range safety brief, the range checklist, and ammunition procedures before conducting this live-fire event. Tabs: a. Day’s Defense/Team Shoot b. Ballard’s Success
R. B. RICHARDSON Major, U. S. Marine Corps Commanding
C-1-1 UNCLASSIFIED
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 TAB A (DAY’S DEFFENSE/TEAM SHOOT) TO APPENDIX 1 (DAY’S DEFFENSE/TEAM SHOOT AND BALLARD’S SUCCESS) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U)
DAY’S DEFENSE/TEAM SHOOT
PURPOSE: Provides recruits with a lane training exercise that reinforces Individual Movement, Fire Team Formations, Hand-andArm Signals, and Table II Combat Marksmanship skill sets (Multiple Threats, Hammered Pairs, Speed Reloads, and Reassessment/Failure Drills) in a challenging environment. By combining this station with Ballard’s Success, this lane training exercise also reinforces casualty evacuation carries and critical first aid life saving skills.
C-1-A-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
CORPORAL JAMES L. DAY UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS * * * * * MEDAL OF HONOR CITATION For conspicuous gallantry and intrepidity at the risk of his life above and beyond the call of duty as a squad leader serving with the Second Battalion, Twenty-Second Marines, Sixth Marine Division, in sustained combat operations against Japanese forces on Okinawa, Ryukyu Islands from 14 to 17 May 1945. On the first day, Corporal Day rallied his squad and the remnants of another unit and led them to a critical position forward of the front lines of Sugar Loaf Hill. Soon thereafter, they came under an intense mortar and artillery barrage that was quickly followed by a fanatical ground attack of about forty Japanese soldiers. Despite the loss of one-half of his men, Corporal Day remained at the forefront, shouting encouragement, hurling hand grenades, and directing deadly fire thereby repelling the determined enemy. Reinforced by six men, he led his squad in repelling three fierce night attacks but suffered five additional Marines killed and one wounded whom he assisted to safety. Upon hearing nearby calls for corpsman assistance, Corporal Day braved heavy enemy fire to escort four seriously wounded Marines, one at a time, to safety. Corporal Day then manned a light machine gun assisted by a wounded Marine, and halted another frenzied night attack. In this ferocious action, his machine gun was destroyed, and he suffered multiple white phosphorous and fragmentation wounds. Assisted by only one partially effective man, he reorganized his defensive C-1-A-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 position in time to halt a fifth enemy attack with devastating small arms fire. On three separate occasions, Japanese soldiers closed to within a few feet of his foxhole, but were killed by Corporal Day. During the second day, the enemy conducted numerous unsuccessful swarming attacks against his exposed position. When the attacks momentarily subsided, over 70 enemy dead were counted around his position. On the third day, a wounded and exhausted Corporal Day repulsed the enemy's final attack and dispatched around 12 of the enemy at close range. Having yielded no ground and with more than 100 enemy dead around his position, Corporal Day preserved the lives of his fellow Marines and made a primal contribution to the success of the Okinawa campaign. By his extraordinary heroism, repeated acts of valor, and quintessential battlefield leadership, Corporal Day inspired the efforts of his outnumbered Marines to defeat a much larger enemy force, reflecting great credit upon himself and upholding the highest traditions of the Marine Corps and the United States Naval Service.
C-1-A-3 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 DAY’S DEFENSE/TEAM SHOOT: 15 Min to Brief/Load 55 Min to Execute Critique on Fire Line -1 Drill Instructor -3 Field Instructors (But usually 5 Field Instructors) -RSO and OIC per Annex A OVERVIEW: Upon arrival to the station, the Drill Instructor will have recruits stage packs in the designated area. Once the packs have been staged, recruits will stand at attention near the wooden benches and a Drill Instructor will read the Medal of Honor Citation. Next, the recruits will be seated and given the following brief and the safety brief from Annex B to the Crucible SOP. After the brief, the recruits will remain in their existing fire teams and move by fire team along the pre-determined route to their firing points while transitioning from one fire team formation to the next as appropriate for the terrain they are traveling through. After the recruits conduct the team shoot, they will immediately conduct the casualty evacuation as part of Ballard’s Success under the supervision of the Drill Instructor. After the casualty evacuation, recruits will be read Ballard’s citation and debriefed by the instructors. 1. SITUATION: You are about to conduct a local fire team foot patrol in the Karbala Province. At some point during your patrol your fire team will encounter numerous insurgents armed with AK47’s at close range. 2. MISSION: PATROL RANGE 501 USING PROPER FIRE TEAM FORMATIONS AND HAND-AND-ARM SIGNALS. UPON CONTACT WITH ENEMY, DESTROY ALL ENEMY COMBATANTS USING PROPER COMBAT MARKSMANSHIP TECHNIQUES. 3. EQUIPMENT: You will wear your helmet, LBV, and flak jacket and carry your service rifle. You will also have the following equipment: (2) M-16 magazines (each with 5 rounds) (1) Set of earplugs (10) 5.56mm rounds 4. COORDINATING INSTRUCTIONS: a. From the Attack Position represented by your current location here at these wooden benches, your Fire Team will start their patrols by crossing the LOD in Condition 4 in a C-1-A-4 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 Wedge Formation. You will move in a through the bivouac area and down past the head facility to the Field Instructor at the bottom of the draw. You will move up the draw in a Column to the dirt road and another Field Instructor. At the road, you will transition into Skirmishes Right all the way to your firing points. b. On order from the Field Instructor, each member of your fire team will make a Condition 1 weapon and engage the enemy from their assigned color-coded billet block at the same color-coded automated pop-up targets. c.
Treat every weapon as if it were loaded.
d. Do not point your weapon at anything you do not intend to shoot. e. Keep your trigger finger straight and off the trigger until you are ready to fire. f.
Keep the weapon on safe until you intend to fire
g. You will execute this mission by permanent fire team billets. h. Again, teams will start off in a fire team wedge formation. i. Each team member will have two magazines of five (5) rounds each. INSTRUCTOR NOTE: THE FIELD INSTRUCTOR WILL DESIGNATE A FIRE TEAM TO QUICKLY DEMONSTRATE THE THREE FIRE TEAM FORMATIONS, LOAD THEIR MAGAZINES WITH FIVE ROUNDS EACH AND PUT THE MAGAZINES INTO THEIR MAGAZINE POUCHES AND BEGIN THE COURSE.
5. PLAN AND EXECUTION: Drill Instructors will have the squads broken down in their designated teams, assigning each team member a firing point. All magazines will be filled with five (5) rounds each and placed in the weak side of the LBV. 6.
FIRING LINE COMMANDS: a. “Recruits: Maintaining muzzle awareness, make a Condition one weapon.”
b. “Recruits: On my command, make the proper threat assessment and fire on your color-coded targets with a Hammered Pair to each target from the standing to kneeling position and then perform a C-1-A-5 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 Re-assessment Drill if your targets reappear with the remaining ammunition in your first magazine. When you are out of ammunition in your first magazine conduct a Speed Reload while remaining in the kneeling and Cease fire. We will then repeat this series of drills with the second magazine. Questions? Ready, FIRE!” INSTRUCTOR NOTES: 1) THE FIELD INSTRUCTORS ON THE FIRING LINE WILL ENSURE STRICT ADHERENCE TO THESE FIRING PROCEDURES. INSTRUCTORS WILL CHECK TO SEE THAT THE RECRUITS CORRECTLY SHOT THEIR FIRST TWO ROUNDS FROM THE STANDING POSITION ENGAGING THE NEAREST THREAT FIRST WITH A HAMMERED PAIR. NEXT, THE RECRUITS SHOULD HAVE ENGAGED THE FURTHEST THREAT WITH A HAMMERED PAIR FROM THE KNEELING POSITION AND THEN USED THEIR FIFTH ROUND (OF THE FIRST MAGAZINE) ON REASSESSING THE NEAR THREAT. AT THAT POINT, THE RECRUITS SHOULD HAVE DONE A SPEED RE-LOAD AND CEASED FIRE WITH THEIR WEAPONS ON SAFE. 2) AFTER CRITIQUING THE FIRST MAGAZINE’S WORTH OF DRILLS, THE FIELD INSTRUCTORS WILL HAVE THE RECRUITS REPEAT THIS SERIES OF DRILLS WITH THE SECOND MAGAZINE OF FIVE ROUNDS AND THEN HAVE THE RECRUITS UN-LOAD AND SHOW CLEAR. 3) AFTER THE FIELD INSTRUCTORS VERIFY THE WEAPONS ARE CLEARED, THEY WILL ASSESS ONE CASUALTY FROM EACH FIRE TEAM AND HAVE THEM CONDUCT BALLARD’S SUCCESS’ CASEVAC. 4) HEARING PROTECTION IS MANDATORY DURING LIVE FIRE ON THE RANGE.
DRILL INSTRUCTOR NOTE: 1) COMPANY DRILL INSTUCTORS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR CONDUCTING A SECONDARY UNLOAD SHOW CLEAR AND AMMO AND BRASS PAT DOWN OF THEIR RECRUITS AFTER BALLARD’S SUCCESS. 2) THE COMPANY DRILL INSTRUCTOR WILL SUPERVISE BALLARD’S SUCCESS.
C-1-A-6 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
C-1-A-7 UNCLASSIFIED
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 TAB B (BALLARD’S SUCCESS) TO APPENDIX 1 (DAY’S DEFFENSE/TEAM SHOOT AND BALLARD’S SUCCESS) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U)
BALLARD’S SUCCESS
Purpose: By combining this station with Day’s Defense/Team Shoot, it completes the lane training exercise by reinforcing casualty evacuation carries and critical first aid life saving skills.
C-1-B-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
HOSPITAL CORPSMAN SECOND CLASS BALLARD, DONALD E UNITED STATES NAVY
*****
MEDAL OF HONOR CITATION For conspicuous gallantry and intrepidity at the risk of his life and beyond the call of duty while serving as a HC2c. with Company M, in connection with operations against enemy aggressor forces. During the afternoon hours, Company M was moving to join the remainder of the 3d Battalion in Quang Tri Povince. After treating and evacuating 2 heat casualties, HC2c. Ballard was returning to his platoon from the evacuation landing zone when the company landing zone when the company was ambushed by a North Vietnamese Army unit employing automatic weapons and mortars, and sustained numerous casualties. Observing a wounded Marine, HC2c. Ballard unhesitatingly moved across the fire wept terrain to the injured man and swiftly rendered medical assistance to his comrade. HC2c. Ballard then directed 4 Marines to carry the casualty to a position of relative safety. As the 4 men prepared to move the wounded Marine, an enemy soldier suddenly left his concealed position and, after hulling a hand grenade which landed near the casualty, commenced firing upon the small group of men. Instantly shouting a warning to the Marines, HC2c. Ballard fearlessly threw himself upon the lethal explosive device to protect his comrades from the deadly blast. When the grenade failed to detonate, he calmly arose from his dangerous position and resolutely continued his determined efforts in treating other Marine casualties. HC2c. Ballard’s heroic actions and selfless concern for the welfare of his companions served to inspire all who observed him and prevented possible injury or death to his fellow Marines. His courage, daring initiative, and unwavering devotion to duty in the face of extreme personal danger, sustain and enhance the finest traditions of the U.S. Naval Services.
C-1-B-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 BALLARD’S SUCCESS 10 Min to Execute 10 Min to Critique/Line-out 1 Drill Instructor OVERVIEW: After completing the Team Shoot and showing clear with the weapons, the Field Instructors will designate one casualty per fire team. After the casualty has been identified, the Drill Instructor will supervise the fire teams as they evacuate the simulated casualty 100 meters using a proper casualty evacuation carry (e.g. Fireman’s Carry) while maintaining security at all times. At the completion of the movement, the Drill Instructor will have the recruits apply the life saving steps and treat the casualty for any of the injuries covered under the First Aid portion of Recruit Knowledge [reference (d))] (e.g. sucking chest wound). Once all teams have completed the team shoot and casualty evacuation, the Drill Instructor will read Ballard’s citation, critique the recruits on their handling of the casualties, and perform a thorough secondary line-out before moving on to the next Crucible Event. 1. EQUIPMENT:
Recruits will wear their helmets, LBVs, and carry
their service rifles. They will have the following equipment: 4 sets – Assorted medical supplies at the end movement lane 2. CRITIQUE: a. Do you feel more confident with all of these battle drills after practicing them continuously under different scenarios? b. How do Day’s and Ballard’s citations relate to the battle drills that you have just done? c. Why is it important to constantly perform these battle drills to include first aid?
Is it something a team only gets
good at through constant repetition?
C-1-B-3 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
C-1-B-4 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 APPENDIX 2 (IAMS’ DRIVE) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) (U) REFERENCES (a) (b)
MCO 1500.54B (MCMAP) MCO 1510.122B (MCMAP Procedures)
1. (U) Purpose. The purpose of this document is to provide specific guidance on the conduct of MCMAP training during Crucible Event 2: Iam’s Drive. 2. (U) General. Crucible Event 2 is designed to reinforce the MCMAP skills, specifically body-sparing, originally taught during Phase 1 of Recruit Training. The purpose of body sparring is to train entrylevel students in punches, angles of movement, and serve as an initial inoculation to interpersonal violence. This is the final stage of training punches, the first two being, “in the air” and “on striking pads.” This activity adds the element of resisting opponents. However, due to the availability of safety equipment needed to support this event and the MCMAP skill progression of each recruit company being different, the recruit training company commander may coordinate with FWTCO to substitute pugil stick-based MCMAP training for body sparring. Tabs A and B to this appendix provide specific instructions for each eventuality. 2. (U) Safety. As required by the references, all recruit trainers associated with this event will follow the safety procedures as outlined in the tabs to this appendix. Additionally, recruit trainers associated with any pugil stick training shall refer to the reprinted Martial Arts Center of Excellence (MACE) lesson plan in the Tab B to this appendix before conducting pugil sticks at Iam’s Drive. Tabs: a. Iam’s Drive (Body-Sparing) b. Iam’s Drive (Pugil Sticks)
R. B. RICHARDSON Major, U. S. Marine Corps Commanding
C-2-1 UNCLASSIFIED
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 TAB A (IAM’S DRIVE BODY-SPARING) TO APPENDIX 2 (IAMS’ DRIVE) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U)
IAMS’ DRIVE (BODY SPARRING)
PURPOSE: The purpose of body sparring is to train entry-level students in punches, angles of movement, and serve as an initial inoculation to interpersonal violence. This is the final stage of training punches, the first two being, “in the air” and “on striking pads.” This activity adds the element of resisting opponents. This is a very important aspect of our training we cannot afford to forget. It is very unlikely that in any of our endeavors we will come across an opponent who will allow us to do what ever we like while offering no resistance during the process.
C-2-A-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
SERGEANT IAMS, ROSS LINDSEY UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS * * * * * MEDAL OF HONOR CITATION In company with members of the 5th, 13th, 23d Companies and marine and sailor detachment from the U.S.S. Connecticut, Sgt. Iams participated in the attack on Fort Riviere, Haiti, 17 November 1915. Following a concentrated drive, several different detachments of Marines gradually closed in on the old French bastion fort in an effort to cut off all avenues of retreat for the Caco bandits. Approaching a breach in the wall which was the only entrance to the fort, Sgt. Iams unhesitatingly jumped through the breach despite constant fire from the Cacos and engaged the enemy in a desperate hand-to-hand combat until the bastion was captured and Caco resistance neutralized. His actions reflected great credit upon himself and upholding the highest traditions of the Marine Corps and the United States Naval Service.
C-2-A-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 IAMS’ DRIVE (BODY-SPARRING) 5 Min to Brief/Prep 50 Min to Execute 5 Min to Critique 2 Drill Instructors 2 Field Instructors (Minimum of One Green-Belt Instructor & SNCO/OFF or a second Green-Belt Instructor)
OVERVIEW: This station is usually conducted by designated buddy teams as long as the assigned buddies are in the same weight class. Upon arrival at the station, the recruits will form a school circle and a Drill Instructor will read a Medal of Honor citation and then a FWTCO Martial Arts Instructor will give all of the recruits the following brief and a quick demonstration to review strike skills. After the brief, the Crucible Squads will be assigned evenly to one or more pits, depending on size and number of Marital Arts Instructors available to officiate each bout, in a manner that facilitates recruits from the different Crucible Squads competing against each other in the pit. Recruits will be debriefed the last five minutes of the event with the questions provided below. I. Purpose. The purpose of body sparring is to train entry-level students in punches, angles of movement, and serve as an initial inoculation to interpersonal violence. This is the final stage of training punches, the first two being, “in the air” and “on striking pads.” This activity adds the element of resisting opponents. This is a very important aspect of our training we cannot afford to forget. It is very unlikely that in any of our endeavors we will come across an opponent who will allow us to do what ever we like while offering no resistance during the process. II. Safeties. a. Personnel. Ideally you should have at least two Martial Arts Instructors (MAIs) (i.e. minimum of Green-belt instructor). One MAI will be in the ring with the students and the other should function as a safety observer. However, while not the preferred technique, it is permissible to have a Staff Sergeant (or above) function as the RSO, with a minimum of one MAI coaching in the ring. In addition you will need to have a corpsman readily available at Range 501 with a backboard, Unit One, and head brace. b. Gear. All participants in body sparring will wear the following safety gear: - Headgear. - Mouthpiece. C-2-A-3 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 - Groin Protection. - 18 oz. boxing gloves (preferred); 16 oz. boxing gloves (minimum). - Wrist wraps (optional). - Flack jacket (for females) c. Training Area. The authorized MCMAP pits at Range 501 will be used for body sparring during Iam’s Drive. d. Briefing. All of the following will be covered by the MAI or RSO prior to conducting training with all recruits. e. Safety personnel and required gear. Gear will be worn properly, and if at any time it is not, the bout will stop immediately until the gear has been adjusted. f. Safety procedures. All punches are to fall on the front of the opponent’s torso, below the neck and above the beltline. No punches will fall on the: [1] Head or neck. [2] Groin. [3] Back, Kidneys, or Spine. g. Authorized techniques include only: [1] [2] [3] [4]
Lead hand punch. Rear hand punch. Hook. Uppercut (to the body).
III. Conduct of Bout. a. All bouts will begin and end with both participants touching gloves (one MAI per bout of two opponents). This signifies that the Marine is ready to train, and shows respect to the other that he is training with. a. b. As this is entry-level training, the bouts will only last two to three minutes(two 24-man Crucible Squads can execute this event in 48 minutes using two minute bouts), depending on the fitness and ability of those participating. Recruits not participating in the bout will be conducting bag drills or donning protective gear in anticipation of their own bout. The recruits waiting for their bouts will be paired up by weight and conduct a “round robin” of various bag drills. The bag drills are posted on signs around the outside of the ring. The recruits will start and change over on the whistle blast from the Field Instructor supervising the bouts. The recruits will rotate to the next station upon the completion of the bout in the ring. The bag drills that will be conducted are: C-2-A-4 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 [1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
Horizontal hammer fist. Vertical hammer fist. Upper cut. Lead hand punch. Rear hand punch.
c. Either the safety observer or MAI may stop the bout at any time to rectify an unsafe condition or coach either of the Marines if they are having trouble. d. “Hands Out” This is a position taken by a recruit who cannot safely continue. It also allows the safety observer an opportunity to evaluate the recruit’s condition. When this happens both participants must cease punching and the affected recruit will place his hands on the safety observer’s shoulders, where the MAI/RSO will evaluate his condition and return him to the ring when he is able to continue. e. Although no punches are allowed to the head, participants’ posture, stance, and defense should be as if they were. Hugging your midsection and leaving your head unprotected is a poor combative posture and does not reflect the Basic Warrior Stance taught within the curriculum. IV. Miscellaneous Instructor Notes. a. Role of MAI / RSO. It is important to delineate the responsibilities of each supervisory participant. The most important individual is, of course, the “safety guy” or RSO/second MAI. His only responsibility is the safe training of the Marines. He does not coach, keep time, or otherwise distract himself with any other endeavor but ensuring the safety of the bout participants. The primary MAI responsibility is to coach and to act as a timekeeper. This does not keep the “coach” from stopping the bout should he see an unsafe condition. b. Before the bouts. All participants must be medically screened prior to participation. c. During the bouts. If you are the “coach”, give the Marines constructive feedback on their performance and technique. Control the situation should egos, or tempers flare. d. After the bouts. Give a thorough debrief for all participants. Give constructive points for sustainment of skills. Counsel recruits whose egos or attitudes make them a liability for this kind of training. e. Cultivating the correct mindset. Body sparring is a training tool to develop recruits’ skills. This is not designed as a “beatdown” session. Recruits are introduced to interpersonal violence in C-2-A-5 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 this exercise, and are expected to give and receive some blows. first time you get hit should not be in a real world situation.
The
INSTRUCTOR NOTE: ALTERNATIVELY, PUGIL STICKS MAY BE SUBSTITUTED FOR THIS EVENT AS DICTATED BY AVAILABILITY MAI(S), SAFETY OBSERVERS, SAFETY EQUIPMENT, AND THE DESIRES OF THE RECRUIT TRAINING COMPANY COMMANDER AS COORDINATED BEFORE THE START OF THE CRUCIBLE WITH FWTCO.
C-2-A-6 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 TAB B (IAM’S DRIVE PUGIL STICKS) TO APPENDIX 2 (IAMS’ DRIVE) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) IAM’s DRIVE (PUGIL STICKS)
PUPOSE: Reinforces MCMAP-based MCCSs and instills recruits with a sense of self-confidence, physical courage, and pride through physical competition in rifle-based, close-quarters combat (Pugil Sticks).
C-2-B-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
SERGEANT IAMS, ROSS LINDSEY UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS * * * * * MEDAL OF HONOR CITATION In company with members of the 5th, 13th, 23d Companies and marine and sailor detachment from the U.S.S. Connecticut, Sgt. Iams participated in the attack on Fort Riviere, Haiti, 17 November 1915. Following a concentrated drive, several different detachments of Marines gradually closed in on the old French bastion fort in an effort to cut off all avenues of retreat for the Caco bandits. Approaching a breach in the wall which was the only entrance to the fort, Sgt. Iams unhesitatingly jumped through the breach despite constant fire from the Cacos and engaged the enemy in a desperate hand-to-hand combat until the bastion was captured and Caco resistance neutralized. His actions reflected great credit upon himself and upholding the highest traditions of the Marine Corps and the United States Naval Service.
C-2-B-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 IAMS’ DRIVE (PUGIL STICKS) 10 Min to Brief/Prep 40 Min to Execute 10 Min to Critique 2 Drill Instructors 2 Field Instructors (Minimum of One Green-Belt Instructor & SNCO/OFF or a second Green-Belt Instructor)
OVERVIEW: If conducted, this station is usually conducted with two Crucible Squads competing against each other. Upon arrival at the station, the recruits will form a school circle and a Drill Instructor will read a Medal of Honor citation and then a green-belt Field Instructor will give all of the recruits the following brief and a demonstration to review bayonet skills. After the brief, the Crucible Squads will be assigned evenly to one or more pits, depending on size and number of Green-belt instructors, in a manner that facilitates recruits from the different Crucible Squads competing against each other in the pit. Recruits will be debriefed the last five minutes of the event with the questions provided below. INSTRUCTOR NOTE: USUALLY, BODY-SPARING IS SUBSTITUTED FOR THIS EVENT AS DICTATED BY AVAILABILITY OF MAI(S), SAFETY OBSERVERS, SAFETY EQUIPMENT, AND THE DESIRES OF THE RECRUIT TRAINING COMPANY COMMANDER AS COORDINATED BEFORE THE START OF THE CRUCIBLE WITH FWTCO.
1. SITUATION: You have been forced into close combat with the enemy using your weapon after expending all your ammunition. 2. MISSION: YOUR MISSION IS TO REPEL THE ENEMY’S ASSAULT USING CLOSE COMBAT. 3. EXECUTION: You will wear your flak jacket with neck roll, helmet, groin protector, pugil stick, and mouthpiece. 4. COORDINATING INSTRUCTIONS: b. Start and stop on the instructor's whistle blast. c. Use only the five killing strikes demonstrated during the brief. Thrust, Slash, Smash, Horizontal and Vertical Butt Stroke. d. When eliminated from the fight, exit the pit as instructed.
C-2-B-3 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 e. During the fight, recruits must remain in the pit. If any part of their body leaves the pit, the fight is stopped and re-started back in the pit. f. The bouts will be organized so that your permanent buddy-teams (Rifleman & Fire Team leader or SAW & Assistant SAW-Gunner) fight an opposing permanent buddy-team from the other Crucible Squad as long as the recruits are paired up by weight class as outline in the MACE lesson plan attached below. The bout will end when either both members of one buddy-team are eliminated or after two minutes have elapsed, whichever comes first. INSTRUCTOR NOTE: THE MACE GUIDE REPRINTED BELOW PROVIDES DETAILED SAFETY MEASURES TO BE FOLLOWED DURING ALL PUGIL STICK BOUTS. THE CRUCIBLE SQUADS WILL COMPETE USING THEIR ASSIGNED BUDDY-TEAMS AS LONG AS THESE BUDDY TEAMS WERE MADE BY WEIGHT CLASS AS PRESCRIBED BY THE MACE LESSON PLAN FOR PUGIL STICK TRAINING. IF THE BUDDY TEAMS WERE NOT ASSIGNED WITHIN THE LIMITS OF BODY WEIGHTS AS PRESCRIBED BY THE MACE GUIDE, THEN THE DRILL INSTRUCTORS SHALL HAVE PREDETERMINED THE BUDDY TEAMS TO COMPETE AT THIS STATION BEFORE ARRIVING AT IT. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE RECRUIT TRAINING COMPANY TO CONDUCT RECRUIT WEIGH-INS FOR THIS PURPOSE WITHIN 48 HOURS PRIOR TO THE CONDUCT OF THE CRUCIBLE.
g. In between each fight, the Martial Arts Instructor will give a thirty-second debrief on the techniques used by each team. h. Recruits will assist each other in getting dressed. i. Recruits not participating in the bout will either watch the bouts or be donning protective gear in anticipation of their own bout—IPT/Cohesion Drills are not authorized at this station. Are there any questions? INSTRUCTOR NOTES 1) ENSURE THAT THE CORPSMAN IS STANDING WITH UNIT ONE AND BACKBOARD AND HEAD BRACE. 2) ENSURE THAT EACH RECRUIT IS PROPERLY DRESSED IN ALL OF THE SAFETY GEAR TO INCLUDE A MOUTH PIECE AND THAT ALL OF THE GEAR FITS. 3) INSPECT ALL PUGIL STICKS TO ENSURE SERVICEABILITY. 4) AT LEAST ONE GREEN BELT INSTRUCTOR MUST BE PRESENT FOR EVERY ACTIVE PIT.
C-2-B-4 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 5. PLAN AND EXECUTION: The Field Instructor will break the Crucible Squads down evenly by using fire teams. Once dressed, the recruits will position themselves around the tires to observe the bouts. Recruits will fight in their permanent two-man buddy teams against buddy teams of the other Crucible Squad unless prohibited from doing so because of the weight class restrictions. Once one recruit is eliminated the fight then becomes a two on one and so forth until an entire buddy team is eliminated or two minutes have expired. 6. AFTER ACTION REVIEW: a. Was it important to work together? teamwork?
How did you try to use
b. How was communication important? c. How did your plan change as you got more tired? d. What was the most important thing that would cause you to win or lose? e. How did you feel when you were killed and your partner was still alive? How did you feel when your partner was killed but you were still alive? Why didn't you give up after one was killed? f. How does this event relate to courage discussed in Iams’ citation?
C-2-B-5 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
C-2-B-6 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS MARTIAL ARTS CENTER OF EXCELLENCE THE BASIC SCHOOL MARINE CORPS COMBAT DEVELOPMENT COMMAND QUANTICO, VIRGINIA 22134
APPROVAL SHEET DETAILED INSTRUCTOR OUTLINE
LESSON TITLE PUGIL STICK TRAINING COURSE TITLE TAN BELT
PREPARED BY: ___MACE STAFF____________ DATE: _______________ APPROVED BY: ___MACE STAFF____________ DATE: _______________ UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS Martial Arts Center of Excellence C-2-B-7 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
The Basic School Marine Corps Combat Development Command Quantico, Virginia 22134 INSTRUCTOR PREPARATION CHECKLIST ESSENTIAL DATA LESSON DESIGNATOR
MA-1.05
LESSON TITLE
Pugil Stick Training
DATE PREPARED
December 2004
TIME
6 hrs 30 min
METHOD
EDIP and guided discussion
LOCATION
Training area
INSTRUCTORS REQUIRED
One and assistants as needed
REFERENCES
MCO 1500.54B, MCO 1510.122B*, MCRP 3-2B, MCWP 6-11 MCRP 6-11B, MCRP 6-11D
TRAINING AIDS/EQUIPMENT
Pugil sticks, groin protection, neck rolls, mouthpieces, helmets, flak jackets, and gloves
*NOTE: THE HIGHLIGHTED MCO MAKES THIS MACE LESSON PLAN BINDING THROUGHOUT THE MARINE CORPS. THIS LESSON PLAN REQUIRES THAT ALL SAFETY OBSERVERS READ, UNDERSTOOD, AND HAVE THIS LESSON PLAN ON-HAND DURING ALL PUGIL STICK TRAINING. ACCORDINGLY, IT IS REPRODUCED HERE AS PART OF THE CRUCIBLE SOP. SAFETY PERSONNEL AND RECRUIT TRAINERS WILL PAY PARTICULAR ATTENTION TO THE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS HIGHLIGHTED BELOW. RECRUIT TRAINING COMPANIES WILL ENSURE THAT RECRUITS ARE WEIGHED-IN AND PAIRED UP BY WEIGHT CLASSES PRIOR TO THE START OF THE CRUCIBLE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE INSTRUCTIONS PRESCRIBED BELOW. C-2-B-8 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS Martial Arts Center of Excellence The Basic School Marine Corps Combat Development Command Quantico, Virginia 22134 DETAILED OUTLINE PUGIL STICK TRAINING INSTRUCTOR SECTION INTRODUCTION
_______(3 MIN)
1. GAIN ATTENTION. A pugil stick is a training device used to simulate weapons of opportunity and introduce a Marine to the realities of inter-personal violence. It provides effective, but safe, “full contact” training at entry level and can be an effective tool to enhance sustainment and integration training during free sparring. Pugil stick training further builds on the techniques learned for weapons of opportunity and bayonet because similar movements are executed with the pugil stick. Pugil stick training trains the Marine to function when faced with stress and violence; it prepares the Marine to deliver a blow and take a blow. These skills are the building block to developing the physical skills and mental toughness vital to success on the battlefield. 2. OVERVIEW. This lesson will cover pugil stick training including safety precautions inherent in training and the rules and procedures for conducting and judging a pugil stick bout. Additionally it provides guidance for the three periods of instruction and application given at entry level, pugil stick I, II, and III. 3. INTRODUCE LEARNING OBJECTIVES. The Learning objectives pertaining to this lesson that will be instructed during pugil sticks I, II, and III are as follows: a. TERMINAL LEARNING OBJECTIVES. (1) Given pugil stick protective gear 1 (PPG1), pugil stick, opponent, and without the aid of reference, participate in pugil stick bouts in accordance with the references. (8550.01.05) (2) Without the aid of the reference discuss self-discipline in C-2-B-9 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
accordance the references (8550.01.21) b. ENABLING LEARNING OBJECTIVES. (1) Without the aid of references, given a pugil stick, flak jacket, groin protection, helmet with face guard, mouthpiece, neck roll, and an opponent, participate in a one on one pugilstick bout in accordance with the references. (8550.01.05a) (2) Without the aid of references, given a pugil stick, flak jacket, groin protection, helmet with face guard, mouthpiece, neck roll, and an opponent, participate in a two on one pugil stick bout in accordance with the references. (8550.01.05b) (3) Without the aid of references, given a pugil stick, flak jacket, groin protection, helmet with face guard, mouthpiece, neck roll, and an opponent, participate in a two on two pugil stick bout in accordance with the references. (8550.01.05c) (4) Without the aid of references, discuss the definition of selfdiscipline in accordance with the references. (8550.01.21a) (5) Without the aid of the references, discuss the most crucial element to developing self-discipline in accordance with the references. (8550.01.21b) (6) Without the aid of references, discuss the three elements involved in developing self-respect in accordance with the references. (8550.01.21c) (7) Without the aid of references, discuss the Marine Corps values demonstrated by the Marine who is the subject of the Warrior Study in accordance with the references. (8550.01.22a) (8) Without the aid of references, discuss the leadership principles and traits demonstrated by the Marine who is the subject of the Warrior Study in accordance with the references. (8550.01.22b) 4. METHOD/MEDIA. This class will be taught by EDIP and guided discussion. 5. EVALUATION. This lesson will be evaluated by performance and oral evaluation during pugil sticks I, II, and III. C-2-B-10 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
INSTRUCTOR'S NOTE: Assign specific students to fill out Instructional Review Forms (IRFs). Have them fill out the IRFs after the completion of the period of instruction.
TRANSITION: Review material, probe with questions, and introduce new material. With the proper equipment and supervision of qualified Martial Arts Instructors, pugil stick training can provide effective training in weapons of opportunity and bayonet techniques as well as developing mental toughness. Instructors should be motivated to provide realistic training employing proven techniques in a safe training environment. We will begin by discussing training equipment and safety precautions that the MAI needs to be thoroughly familiar INSTRUCTOR'S NOTE: The material in this lesson is written for righthanded students. Left-handed students should reverse instructions as necessary. with. BODY
(145 MIN)
1. EQUIPMENT AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS DURING PUGIL STICK TRAINING a. Pugil Stick. A pugil stick is a training device that simulates a weapon of opportunity. The pugil stick was designed to provide a safe, but realistic way to train weapons of opportunity. While formerly used to train rifle and bayonet techniques, with the change in Marine Corps bayonet training this function is no longer applicable. However, rifle and bayonet techniques that are applicable when employing a weapon of opportunity can be used during pugil stick bouts. The more important function of the pugil stick is to allow Marines to experience the shock of inter-personal violence in a full contact situation thereby gaining confidence and mental toughness. (1) Design. A pugil stick consists of a stick wrapped in padding at both ends, which can be gripped like a rifle. The pugil stick is approximately the same weight and length of an unloaded rifle with a bayonet attached.
C-2-B-11 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
b. Holding the Pugil Stick. The pugil stick is held as described below; all movement comes from the modified basic warrior stance: (1) With the right hand, grasp the lower end of the pugil stick over-handed. (2) With the left hand, grasp the upper end of the pugil stick under-handed. (3) With the right forearm, lock the lower end of the pugil stick against the hip. (4) Orient the blade end of the pugil stick toward the opponent. c. Safety Equipment. The following safety equipment must be worn during any pugil stick bout: (1) Groin Protection. Groin protection is used to protect the groin from an accidental blow. It should be pulled high around the waist to protect the groin area, with the concave portion against the body. (2) Flak Jacket. The flak jacket provides protection to the body. It is worn completely fastened. (3) Neck Roll. The neck roll is used to prevent whiplash from a blow to the head. The neck roll further supports the head and protects the neck from blows. The neck roll is worn above the flak jacket and below the helmet. Ensure the tied end of the neck roll is facing the front. (4) Helmet. The regulation football helmet is used to protect the face and head. When putting on a helmet, ensure it fits snugly and that the chin straps are adjusted and snapped. (5) Mouthpiece. The mouthpiece is worn on the upper teeth to protect the teeth from banging together. (6) Gloves. Gloves are worn to protect the hands (if the pugil sticks do not have gloves built into them). d. Safety Precautions During Training. The following safety precautions must be adhered to during pugil stick training to prevent injury to students: C-2-B-12 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
(1) Pugil Stick Training Screening. Prior to pugil stick training, you must ask participating students the following questions. Anyone answering yes to the following questions will be prohibited from participating in pugil stick training. (a) Who has had dental surgery within the last 24 hours? (b) Are you in a limited duty or no duty status, or do you have a sick call chit stating “no martial arts training”? (c) Who has stitches or staples on their body? (d) Do you have an ear infection/pain? (e) Do you currently have a sinus infection? (f) Do you have a facial injury, either a black eye or facial bruising? days?
(g) Have you participated in a pugil stick bout in the last 7
(2) Any of the following question answered "yes" requires that the student see a medical officer and have his approval to participate in pugil stick training. (a) Who has had a broken bone (not including stress fractures) within the last six months? (b) Who has had a head /shoulder injury within the last five years? (c) Who has ever dislocated their shoulder? (d) Who has received a blow to the head within the last seven days, for any reason? (e) Who has had a concussion within the last six months and have not been medically screened since arriving for training? (f) Do you have a history of recurring headaches and have not been medically screened since arriving for training? C-2-B-13 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
(g) Have you ever sustained an injury in pugil stick training? (h) Have you ever been knocked out during a recruit training event? (i) Have you become disoriented as a result of a blow received in martial arts training? [1] "Disoriented" is defined as a student who either: - Appears to be dazed or confused; -
Does not respond to/understand commands;
-
Can't remember being knocked down or hit;
-
Has slurred speech or appears abnormally clumsy.
(3) Students answering "yes" to any of the following questions will be examined by a corpsman. The corpsman will recommend to the safety officer or MAI/MAIT whether or not the Marine should participate in pugil stick training. (a) Are you restricted to wearing running shoes by medical personnel? (b) Do you currently have a headache? (c) Who is on light duty? (d) Do you have a medical condition not covered above that prevents you from participating in close combat training? (4) Safety Personnel. The following safety personnel are required to conduct pugil stick training and are responsible for the following: (a) One Martial Arts Instructor will teach all class material and officiate pugil stick bouts. (b) One Martial Arts Instructor or Trainer, SNCO, Officer must be in the training area to serve as the safety observer. They are responsible for: C-2-B-14 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
[1] Ensure the safety of the student. [2] Ensure the safety observer receives a copy of this lesson plan and the Martial Arts SOP. [3] Verify that there are the correct number of safety vehicles and corpsmen present [4] Give a safety brief to all students covering the safety precautions and rules governing the stopping of bouts in this lesson plan. [5] That training is conducted properly and safely. [6] That the proper number of supervisors are present. [7] That students found to have any form of disqualifying medical illness/injury do not participate in pugil stick bouts. [8] That students are weighed not more than 48 hours prior to this class so that the martial arts instructors, supervisors and students have an accurate weight. Students need to be paired up same weight, height. [9] That all supervisors ensure the safety of the student. [10] That supervisors oversee all student preparations for bouts (e.g. getting dressed in proper uniform and equipment). (c) Corpsman are responsible for medical evaluation and recommendations to include: [1] Prescreening medical evaluations per section d / paragraph 3 of this lesson plan. [2] Stopping the bout if a medically unsafe condition occurs. [3] Treatment/referral of injured recruits. e. Training Area. To prevent injury to students, training should take place on an area with soft footing (i.e., sand or grass). (1) Training mats are not recommended because students' feet can stick to the mats, prohibiting movement or causing joint injuries by twisting a knee. (2) Training should not take place on a hard surface area like a flight deck or parking lot. This does not include the bridges. (3) A ring or octagon may be used to conduct pugil stick training. The dimensions of the ring can vary as long as there is C-2-B-15 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
ample room to execute the techniques in the training area and the walls are properly protected with mats, sandbags or equivalent protection devices. f. Second Impact Syndrome. A blow to the head will bruise the brain. A second blow to the head can cause death. This is known as the Second Impact Syndrome. There must be seven days between pugil stick bouts to prevent injury or death. g. Additional Safety Measures. (1) The Martial Arts Instructor will enforce the proper wearing of gear throughout training. (2) Contact lenses or glasses will not be worn in a bout. (3) False teeth will be removed from the mouth. (4) Nothing will be worn around the neck except the neck roll. (5) There will be no intra or inter-platoon competition, either formal or informal (e.g., score keeping, trophies, recognition, etc) during pugil stick training. (6) The bayonet techniques class is a prerequisite to pugil sticks I. Any student who missed the bayonet technique class will receive instruction from a martial arts instructor on the bayonet techniques before participating in pugil sticks I. TRANSITION: Review material, probe with questions, and introduce new material. To be effective, pugil stick training must be safe under the supervision of a Martial Arts Instructor or trainer. It must also employ proven techniques which when properly executed to a vital target area would cause injury or death in a real situation. As part of your duties as a Martial Arts Instructor, you will be responsible for judging pugil stick bouts. 2. RULES AND REGULATIONS GOVERNING PUGIL STICK BOUTS. a. Instructor and Support Personnel. Pugil stick bouts will be officiated by a minimum of one Martial Arts Instructor. C-2-B-16 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
(1) The best position for observation is to the right of a fighter so you can see his facial expression and body movement. (2) The instructor must be placed so he does not interfere with the fight. (3) For safety purposes, it is better to have two instructors judging a bout because each instructor can fully observe one of the fighters. b. Prior to the Bout. (1) Students will be paired according to height, weight, and gender. (a) 165 lbs and below; and 166 lbs and above. (b) Students weighing 165 lbs and below may fight other students of the same weight class who are within +/- 10 lbs. (c) Students weighing 166 lbs and above may fight other students of the same weight class who are within +/- 15lbs. (d) Students from different weight classes may fight each other provided their weight differential is +/- 10 lbs (e.g. a 156 lbs student vs. a 166 lbs student or a 165 lbs student vs. a 175 lbs student, etc.). (2) All students must wear the proper safety equipment to fight. (a) Two students will properly don the safety equipment. On the command of the Martial Arts Instructor, the students will enter the ring. Once in the ring, the Martial Arts Instructor will inspect each student for the proper safety equipment. (b) There should be enough gear so that when two students are fighting, two other students can be donning safety equipment for the next bout. c. During the Bout. C-2-B-17 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
(1) The bout will begin with the Instructor's first whistle blast. (2) All strikes will be directed above the waist. Only techniques taught in bayonet training, armed manipulations or weapons of opportunity are authorized. (a) Straight thrust. (b) Butt stroke (horizontal and vertical). (c) Smash. (d) Slash. (e) Disrupt. (f) Blocks (low, high, left, right). (3) Upon hearing a whistle blast, all fighting will cease immediately. d. Stopping a Bout. There are two reasons for stopping a bout: (1) Scoring Blow. When a scoring blow has been delivered, the Instructor will blow the whistle a second time to stop the bout. He blows the whistle a third time and identifies the student who scored the blow. A forth whistle blow will be used as the Instructor demonstrates the scoring technique. A scoring blow is defined as: (a) A straight thrust with the blade end of the weapon (red end of the pugil stick) to the opponent's face mask or throat. (b) A slash to the side of the opponent's helmet (below the ear) or neck with the red end of the pugil stick. (c) A heavy blow to the opponent's head with an authorized technique using the butt (black end of the pugil stick) of the weapon (i.e., butt stroke, smash). (2) Unsafe Condition. An unsafe condition exists when: (a) If a Student is unable to defend himself, and a student goes down on one or two knees, a student loses his balance, and falls C-2-B-18 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
down, a student's knees buckle, a student's head snaps back or to one side (no muscular tension in neck), or a student loses his grip on the pugil stick. [1] Stop the bout. [2] Separate the two fighters. [3] Re-start the bout. (b) A student is unable/unwilling to defend himself. This includes the following categories: [1] A student drops to a knee, falls, or makes his/her head vulnerable to downward strikes -- or blows to the back of the head; and [2] A student lowers their stick and/or stops fighting. [3] If a student cannot or will not defend themselves after counseling or remediation, the student will not participate in pugil stick training. The bout will end. (c) Any condition deemed unsafe in the judgment of the instructor, safety observer to include: [1] Safety gear becomes unsecured or presents a safety hazard. [2] Safety gear is not fitted or worn properly. [3] A student's mouth piece falls out of his/her mouth. [4] A student moves outside of the ring. [5] A student's gear becomes unserviceable or broken. [6] A student loses his/her grip or the pugil stick itself.
[7] A student fails to use proper techniques. (d) The pugil stick should not be used as a baseball bat; the use of unauthorized techniques will result in expulsion from the ring. Only techniques taught in bayonet training, armed manipulation and weapons of opportunity are authorized.
INSTRUCTOR'S NOTE: Butt strokes to the legs cannot be trained with pugil sticks because it presents a safety hazard in training because there is no protective gear worn on the legs. C-2-B-19 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
e. Interrupting a bout, students will be separated and the stopwatch will be paused. The unsafe condition will be corrected. To resume the bout, students will assume a modified basic warrior stance at 4 to 6 paces apart. The bout will continue upon the Instructor's whistle blast. (1) Evaluate the student to determine if the fight can continue: (a) Ensure the student is alert and responsive both verbally and physically.
(b) Talk to the student to see if he is coherent. Make certain the student comprehends and replies to verbal questions. For example, you may ask the student if he feels he can continue. (c) Look at the student's physical signs. Ensure the student's eyes are focused and not dazed or glazed. Ensure the student's legs are not wobbly or shaking. f. Termination of Pugil Stick Training. Medical conditions could develop that make further participation in pugil stick training unsafe. Students will be continually observed for medical conditions that would make their participation in pugil stick training unsafe. Specifically, a student will not participate in pugil stick training if there are any indications of: (1) Head Injury. Head injuries sustained during pugil stick training can be very serious and even fatal. Second Impact Syndrome (SIS) is a phenomenon in which a second concussion occurs before recovery from the first concussion has taken place. A student will not participate in pugil stick training without a medical officer's evaluation and approval if he/she displays any of the following symptoms of concussion or head injury: (a) Vacant stare (dazed, befuddled facial expression) (b) Delayed verbal and motor responses (slow to answer questions or follow instructions) (c) Confusion and inability to focus attention (easily distracted) C-2-B-20 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
(d) Disorientation (walking in the wrong direction; unaware of time, date or place) (e) Slurred or incoherent speech (making disjointed or incomprehensible statements) (f) Gross observable in coordination (stumbling, inability to walk in a straight line, clumsy) (g) Emotions out of proportion to circumstances (distraught, crying for no apparent reason (h) Memory deficits (exhibited by asking the same question that has already been answered, can't remember being knocked down or hit) (i) Any period of loss of consciousness (2) Other Injuries or Ailments. A student will not participate in pugil stick training if he complains of an ailment (e.g. headache, sore neck, wrist or shoulder). The student will be immediately referred to the duty corpsman for assessment/ treatment in keeping with approved care procedures. All cases of head trauma or symptoms of concussion will be immediately called in by the duty corpsman to a medical officer at the Branch Medical Clinic. SUMMARY
(2 MIN)
Pugil stick training can be an effective motivator because it provides realistic, full-contact training. It is safe training when safety equipment is properly worn, proper techniques are enforced, and safety precautions are adhered to under the direction of a qualified Martial Arts Instructor. Review the above instructor section requirements prior to conducting any pugil stick training.
C-2-B-21 UNCLASSIFIED
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 APPENDIX 3 (NIGHT PATROL REHEARSAL) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) NIGHT PATROL REHEARSAL
PURPOSE: To provide recruits with an opportunity to rehearse formations and designated Immediate Action Drills while reconnoitering Routes “Green” and “Red” in preparation for their fire team’s local, nighttime, satellite patrol. The nighttime portion of this event can be found in Appendix 20, and is meant to provide recruits with a lane training exercise in which they can apply their fire team formation skills and Immediate Action Drills during low-light conditions.
C-3-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 NIGHT PATROL REHEARSAL 5 10 25 5
Min Min Min Min
to brief rehearsal to execute to critique
2 Drill Instructors 1 Field Instructor (3 FIs when Manning allows) OVERVIEW: Upon arrival at this station, the Crucible Squad will be seated by fire teams in a school circle behind the BMPs. The recruits will be given a quick overview of this event and its purpose. When the overview is complete, the recruits will practice their required formations and Immediate Action Drills and then walk through the night satellite patrol course as a Crucible Squad. Once the recruits have reached Range 501 Road at the “near ambush bunkers,” they will be given an opportunity to ask questions and then be released to the next event.
INSTRUCTOR NOTE: There will be a minimum of one Field Instructor to supervise this station. However, when manning levels allow this Field Instructor will be assisted by two (2) other field instructors.
1. COORDINATING INSTRUCTIONS. a. After the Field Instructor provides the recruits with the purpose of this station, he will define what a satellite patrol is: “a force protection measure whereby an independent element patrols, in conjunction with a larger element (i.e. satellites around the larger element), with the purpose of deceiving or confusing the enemy or denying the enemy access to friendly routes.” b. Initial rehearsals will be conducted at Range 501 during this station. The Crucible Squad will practice moving in a fire team wedge, echelon, and column by having no more than three fire teams abreast of each other move from the south end of the firing line to a set of cones twenty five meters away in the direction of the beach. The fire teams will then practice the following Immediate Action Drills while moving from the cones back to the firing line (see Operational Graphic below for rehearsal area). -Reacting to Indirect Fire with a Break Contact Drill -Hasty Ambush -Near Ambush: C-3-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 Time has priority: Ten Minutes. c. Once the Range 501 rehearsals are complete, the Crucible Squad will form a column, using fire team wedges, and move out along “Routes Green” and “Red.” d. Field Instructors will have the recruits execute the same immediate action drills that will be required for the nighttime portion of the event at the appropriate places along Route “Red:” -Reacting to Indirect Fire with a Break Contact Drill -Hasty Ambush -Near Ambush 2. EQUIPMENT. -Eight Cones for the rehearsals -Target Silhouettes on the “Route Red” lanes for the Hasty Ambush Drills 3. AFTER ACTION REVIEW. a. Was it tough moving across the broken terrain? b. How confident are the recruits using hand-and-arm signals? c. Do the recruits use the “Four Golden Rules of Formations?” -Proper Dispersion between members of the Fire Team -Everyone Repeats H&A Signals -Look back every 3-5 paces and ensure the next member of the team is still with you -Everyone moves around the Team Leader/Base Unit. d. Did the recruits use the proper procedures for executing the immediate action drills? For example, the ditty/performance steps for the near ambush drill is “CNA:” Instructor’s Preparatory Command- “CONTACT_______, ____-METERS!,” Instructor’s Command of Execution- “NEAR AMBUSH!,” and Recruit Ditty/Response- “ASSAULT THROUGH!” e. Why is it important to “perfectly practice” IA Drills vice just “practice” them? Do you expect to fight in combat the way you train?
C-3-3 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 4. OPERATIONAL GRAPHIC.
ASSEMBLY AREA
Testing Area
Bleachers
NIGHT PATROL REHARSAL AREA
501 Road
FI
DI DI
RECRUIT COLLECTION / RALLY POINT
FI DI
Night Fire Team Patrol
DI
Gravel Road
LOA DI
FI
DI DI
LOA Bunker
Bunker
FI
DI DI FI
Launching
501 Box
Point
DRAW
FI
FI DI DI FI
FI
KILL ZONE e ut Ro n ee Gr
FI
Checkpoint 8
Lane 1 (Route Red)
Lane 2 (Route Red)
C-3-4 UNCLASSIFIED
Lane 3 (Route Red)
DI
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
C-3-5 UNCLASSIFIED
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 APPENDIX 4 (SKY SCRAPER AND TWO-LINE BRIDGE) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIGEO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) 1. (U) Purpose. The purpose of this document is to provide specific guidance on the conduct of Crucible Event 4: Sky Scraper and Two-line Bridge. 2. (U) General. Crucible Event 4 is comprised of two substations, Sky Scraper and Two-line Bridge. Upon arrival at this event, if two Crucible Squads are traveling together, the first Crucible Squad will conduct the Sky Scraper while the second Crucible Squad detaches and conducts Two-line Bridge. The two squads will then rotate these stations after the allotted time for each station has expired. See Tabs A and B to this appendix for specific instructions on each station. Tabs: a. Sky Scraper b. Two-line Bridge
R. B. RICHARDSON Major, U. S. Marine Corps Commanding
C-4-1 UNCLASSIFIED
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 TAB A (SKY SCRAPER) TO APPENDIX 4 (SKY SCRAPER AND TWO-LINE BRIDGE) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U)
SKY SCRAPER
PURPOSE: Recruits work in fire teams to climb to the top of the tower and rescue a casualty. The casualty must be brought down in a time limit of 45 minutes to complete the mission. The recruits are not given any supporting equipment. This obstacle instills confidence by overcoming a fear of heights and promotes teamwork, unselfishness, and loyalty in recruits as they assist a comrade in need.
C-4-A-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 SKY SCRAPER 5 Min to Brief 30 Min to Execute 10 Min to Critique 0-1 Field Instructor 1 Drill Instructor OVERVIEW: Upon arrival at this station, recruits will form a school circle and a Field Instructor will brief the station to the recruit Squad Leader and Fire Team Leaders. After the brief (below), the recruit leadership will make a plan to retrieve the wounded Marine (“Fred the Dummy”) from the top of the obstacle. Upon successful completion of the station, the recruits will sound off, “Mission Accomplished.” Ten minutes before the recruits are scheduled to rotate stations or upon successful completion of this station, whichever occurs first, the Field Instructor will conduct a critique of the recruits’ performance with the entire Crucible Squad. After the critique, the Crucible Squad will be released to the next station. Instructor Note: When the Field Training Platoon is manned below its T/O strength, this station may not be manned with a Field Instructor. If such is the case, a Series Chief Drill Instructor will sign for one “Fred” dummy each day of the Crucible to be used at this station as coordinated with FWTCO staff prior to the Crucible. 1. SITUATION: Your platoon set up an observation post on top of an adjacent building. It is believed that the Marine on security has been wounded by enemy sniper fire; you can see movement from the Marine. A corpsman is standing by to provide medical assistance. 2.
MISSION:
RETRIEVE THE MARINE.
3. EQUIPMENT: You will wear your helmet, LBV, M16A2 service rifle. You will have the following equipment. 1 – Dummy (“Fred”) on top of the Sky Scraper. 4.
COORDINATING INSTRUCTIONS: a. One recruit will be assigned as the Squad Leader. b. Do not climb up the cargo nets. c. If the Dummy falls from the structure, the recruits have failed the mission and will be instructed to start over.
C-4-A-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 d. Climb to the first level from the sides only—not the mats. e. Do not use the upright poles or touch red boards to climb the tower. f. When climbing down the cargo net, there will only be two recruits at a time side on the net. Weapons will be crossbody, muzzle down. g. Weapons will be handed up the structure butt-stock first. h. Maintain external security. i. After the critique, the dummy will be returned to the top of the tower. j. Recruit Fire Team Leaders will remain in-charge of their teams. Do you have any questions?
AFTER ACTION REVIEW: 1. Did everyone understand the plan before beginning? Why is it important for everyone to have a good idea of what they are assigned to do? How could you have ensured everyone knew the plan? 2. Did anyone need help getting up the obstacle? Does anyone think they could have done this alone? Why is it important to work together? 3. Did the other? Did on his team members for
recruit leadership effectively communicate with each the squad leader do all the directing or did he focus leaders to coordinate the activities of their team the good of the whole unit?
C-4-A-3 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
C-4-A-4 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 TAB B (TWO-LINE BRIDGE) TO APPENDIX 4 (SKY SCRAPER AND TWO-LINE BRIDGE) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) TWO LINE BRIDGE
PURPOSE: The problem is made up of horizontally suspended ropes between two supporting structures over a simulated swiftly flowing river. The mission is for the fire teams to move all personnel and required gear from one side of the “river” to the other using the horizontal ropes in a time limit of 45 minutes. This obstacle instills a sense of confidence and teamwork by having recruits display personal courage in overcoming adversity.
C-4-B-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 TWO-LINE BRIDGE 5 Min to Brief 30 Min to Execute 10 Min to Critique/Move 1 Drill Instructor OVERVIEW: Recruits will form a school circle and a Drill Instructor will give the recruit fire team leaders the brief below. After the brief, the recruit team leaders will develop their plan on how to deliver ammunition, water and medical supplies to the other side of the rope-bridge. Upon successful completion of this station, all recruits will sound off, “Mission Accomplished.” Ten minutes before the recruits are scheduled to rotate stations or upon successful completion of this station, whichever occurs first, the Field Instructor will conduct a critique of the recruits’ performance with the entire Crucible Squad. After the critique, the Crucible Squad will be released to the next station. 1. SITUATION: You are tasked with delivering vital medical supplies, water, and ammunition to your company. On the way you find that the suspension bridge over the canyon has been damaged. All that remains are the suspension cables. A patrol from your company will meet you on the far side of the canyon in thirty five minutes. 2. MISSION: Your mission is to take the vital medical supplies, water, and ammunition to your company on the other side of the canyon. 3. EQUIPMENT: You will wear your helmet, LBV, gloves, and carry your cross-body, muzzle down. You have the following equipment: 4 - Five Gallon Water Cans 4 - Ammo Crates (representing the medical supplies and ammo) 3 - Ropes 8 ft long 3 – Clevises 4. COORDINATING INSTRUCTIONS: a. Recruits will not carry anything across by themselves. b. Nothing will be thrown. c. If a team member or gear falls from the bridge, that team member or gear is eliminated from the problem. d. No more than two recruits per line.
C-4-B-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 e. Recruits will start on the side of the rope-bridge that does not have the ropes hanging down. f. Recruit Fire Team Leaders will remain in-charge of their teams. g. Before you take any action, the fire team leaders must brief your Drill Instructor on the plan. Do you have any questions? INSTRUCTOR NOTES: AFTER 20 MINUTES, ASSIST RECRUITS IN SOLVING PROBLEM BY PROVIDING THEM WITH HINTS. ALLOW TIME TO CRITIQUE RECRUITS. Hint 1: Attach the sling ropes to the heavier equipment and top suspension line IOT slide the equipment across the bridge. Hint 2: Assign supplies and lanes to specific teams/task organize. AFTER ACTION REVIEW: 2. Did everyone understand the plan before beginning? Why is it important for everyone to have a good idea of what they are assigned to do? How could you have ensured everyone knew the plan? 2. Did anyone need help getting up the obstacle? Does anyone think they could have done this alone? Why is it important to work together? 3. Did the other? Did on his team members for
recruit leadership effectively communicate with each the squad leader do all the directing or did he focus leaders to coordinate the activities of their team the good of the whole unit?
C-4-B-3 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
C-4-B-4 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 APPENDIX 5 (STAIRWAY TO HEAVEN & BAPTISTA’S WEAVER) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIGEO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) 1. (U) Purpose. The purpose of this document is to provide specific guidance on the conduct of Event 5: Stairway to Heaven and Baptista’s Weaver. 2. (U) General. Crucible Event 5 is comprised of two substations, Stairway to Heaven and Baptista’s Weaver. Upon arrival at this event, if two Crucible Squads are traveling together, the first Crucible Squad will conduct the Stairway to Heaven while the second Crucible Squad detaches and conducts Baptista’s Weaver. The two squads will then rotate these stations after the allotted time for each station has expired. See Tabs A and B to this appendix for specific instructions on each station. Tabs: a. Stairway to Heaven b. Baptista’s Weaver
R. B. RICHARDSON Major, U. S. Marine Corps Commanding
C-5-1 UNCLASSIFIED
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 TAB A (STAIRWAY TO HEAVEN) TO APPENDIX 5 (STAIRWAY TO HEAVEN AND BAPTISTA’S WEAVER) TO ANNEX C (OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) STAIRWAY TO HEAVEN
PURPOSE: This problem consists of a 40-foot vertical ladder and supporting equipment. The mission is for the recruits to move all required gear from one side of the obstacle, over the topmost rung, to the other side. The team is given four ropes, a ladder, and 45 minutes to complete the mission. This problem instills a sense of confidence and teamwork by having recruits display personal courage in overcoming the universal fear of heights.
C-5-A-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 STAIRWAY TO HEAVEN 5 Min to Brief 35 Min to Execute 10 Min to Critique/Move 1 Drill Instructor 1 Field Instructor OVERVIEW: Recruits will form a school circle and a Field Instructor will give them the station brief below. After the brief, the recruits will don their safety harnesses and the Field Instructor will inspect them. Next, the recruits will line up on the obstacle and start going over it, making sure that the ammo cans get over to the other side as well. Once recruits negotiate the obstacle they will form 180 degrees security and sound off, “Mission Accomplished!” After returning the harnesses and getting a critique on their performance, the Crucible Squad will be released to the next station. 1. SITUATION: Your Crucible Squad is re-supplying a platoon on the top of a building with vital communications gear. While moving to the staging area you notice that they are pinned down by enemy fire and providing them communications gear for air support is critical. The backside of a damaged building separates you from your company, but the frame of the structure is still intact. 2. MISSION: RE-SUPPLY THE COMMUNICATIONS GEAR TO YOUR PLATOON AND RETURN TO YOUR COMPANY BY CLIMBING BACK DOWN THE BACKSIDE OF THE BUILDING. 3. EQUIPMENT: equipment: 2 3 1 2 6 1
– –
You will wear your helmet. You have the following
15-foot boards Ropes Can of communications gear Safety Harnesses and 8 rappel harnesses Locking carabineers Rope log INSTRUCTOR NOTES:
1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
RECRUITS WILL NOT WEAR THEIR LBVs OR BLACK LEATHER GLOVES. DEMONSTRATE HARNESS AND PROPER BELAY PROCEDURES. ROPES MUST BE INSPECTED FOR SERVICEABILITY. INSPECT EACH HARNESS FOR SERVICEABILITY. INSPECT EACH LOCKING CARABINER FOR RUST AND SPURS.
C-5-A-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 4. COORDINATING INSTRUCTIONS: a. Establish and maintain local security and negotiate this obstacle by maintaining fire team integrity b. Only two squad members are to climb the obstacle at a time. c. Do not jump on or off the obstacle. d. Team members will not climb with ammo cans. (1) Team members may not touch the graveled area. Once the ammo cans are in the air, no team member may be within the graveled area. (2) Team members will not throw the end of the rope with the carabineer attached; however, the other end may be thrown. (3) Prior to raising the ammo cans off the deck, a Field Instructor will inspect them to ensure they are properly attached to the carabineers. (4) The ammo cans must be lowered on the opposite side that they were raised. You may not untie any knot or unhook any carabineer once the box leaves the ground. e. All team members must go over the obstacle. f. The two squad members who are attached to the safety line will remain at the top of the obstacle and be the last ones off. They will provide a safety belay for all other recruits negotiating this obstacle. g. The two squad members on the safety line at the top may help with the ammo can, as well as help other team members over the obstacle with the belay line. They will keep the line taut with little slack. h. Recruits must maintain three points of contact at a time. Do you have any questions? INSTRUCTOR NOTES: 1. DEMO THREE-POINTS OF CONTACT. 2. KEEP TRACK OF THE NUMBER OF BELAYS IN THE ROPE LOG— ROPES WILL BE REPLACED AFTER 1000 BELAYS OR WHEN VISIBLY DAMAGED. C-5-A-3 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
5. AFTER ACTION REVIEW: a. What are important questions to ask before developing a plan for this obstacle? Did you ask which team members were afraid of heights before deciding who would go to the top? Why is it important to know people's capabilities before giving them a task? How would you have changed your plan if you knew everyone's capabilities? b. For those who are afraid of heights, would you climb to the top of the obstacle? What is important about overcoming your fears? c. Did your physical conditioning affect the outcome of the mission? How does it relate to combat? d. Did teamwork affect the outcome of the mission? each squad member show courage/initiative? e. What was your commitment to the team? important?
How did
Why is that
f. Did communication within the team affect the outcome of the mission?
C-5-A-4 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
C-5-A-5 UNCLASSIFIED
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 TAB B (BAPTISTA’S WEAVER) TO APPENDIX 5 (STAIRWAY TO HEAVEN AND BAPTISTA’S WEAVER) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) BAPTISTA’S WEAVER
PURPOSE: The problem is made of tandem wooden “A” frames with horizontal logs placed along the frames. The mission is for the recruits to climb over and under the horizontal logs with all required gear in a time limit of 45 minutes. Recruits must use teamwork and personal strength to negotiate a physically demanding obstacle, overcome a fear of heights, and complete specified tasks within a prescribed time limit.
C-5-B-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
SERGEANT LEANDRO F. BAPTISTA UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS * * * * * SILVER STAR CITATION For conspicuous gallantry and intrepidity in action against the enemy while serving as a Team Leader in 2nd Platoon, B Company, 1st Reconnaissance Battalion. On 7 April 2004, in the Al Anbar Province, Iraq, up to sixty enemy combatants in fortified positions ambushed Sergeant Baptista's 25-man reconnaissance platoon instantly wounding six Marines and disabling two vehicles. Observing the attack, Sergeant Baptista immediately dismounted his vehicle and led his team to flank the enemy positions. Sergeant Baptista, miraculously escaping injury, dashed across a shallow canal, climbing a 10-foot berm, and charged towards the enemy. Drawing fire from enemy machineguns onto his position, he silenced one emplacement and then continued to press the enemy by hastily forming a 3-man team and continued the assault. With utter disregard for his own safety, he advanced over yet another berm under heavy enemy fire. Fearlessly, he disabled an improvised explosive device in stride and without missing a step, charged forward uncovering another eleven enemy combatants. He ferociously charged the surprised enemy, single-handedly killing four insurgents at point blank range while directing the fire of three Marines to kill the remaining seven enemy insurgents. Sergeant Baptista then covered the withdrawal of his team while still under fire from different enemy positions. Despite the numerical superiority of a fanatical enemy, Sergeant Baptista's personal heroism, indomitable spirit, and heroic devotion to duty were an inspiration to those with whom he served, reflecting great credit upon himself, and upholding the highest traditions of the Marine Corps and the United States Naval Service.
C-5-B-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 GUIDED DISCUSSION BACKGROUND FOR DRILL INSTRUCTORS On 7 April 2004, 2nd Platoon, Company B was tasked as the Main Effort to lead a patrol south of the city of Al Fallujah, Iraq to occupy a Forward Operating Base approximately twenty kilometers away in order to run counter mortar patrols against AntiCoalition Forces (ACF). The 25-man platoon was organized into an “A” and “B” element comprised of three and two vehicles respectively. At approximately 1600 in the Al Anbar province, Sergeant Baptista’s small reconnaissance platoon was taken under fire in a deliberate ambush set by forty-sixty ACF personnel in wellfortified and concealed positions (38S LB 796 854). The ambush was initiated with a tremendous volley of RPGs, mortars, and automatic fire from at least ten machine gun positions instantly crippling six Marines. The ambush site was organized into three separate kill zones that were approximately 250 meters apart spanning at least one kilometer in total width. The depth of the ambush site extended from eighty meters north of Main Supply Route (MSR) Boston in bermed positions across an embankment and canal to 1,200 meters from the road behind culverts and in houses. There were at least four vehicles that were staged near the structures for egress: a large farm truck, a white four-door sedan, a red four-door sedan, and a blue flatbed truck. A black Mercedes with four gunmen, serving as a mobile gun platform and quick reaction force for the enemy, would also end up engaging the Marines. Once the ambush was triggered with a volley of RPGs that seriously wounded six Marines and crippled two of the platoon’s vehicles caught in the kill zone, Sgt Baptista immediately ordered his vehicle to turn and flank the enemy machine gun positions. Seconds later, Sgt Baptista dismounted and attacked the eastern flank of the ambush site. He courageously led his men directly into an enemy machine gun and small arms position in an effort to distract the terrorists’ attention away from the injured Marines caught in the kill zone. To do so, he had to cross a shallow canal and climb over a ten-foot berm that ran perpendicular to the enemy ambush. Sgt Baptista shouted words of encouragement while leading his team in a charge. Having eliminated the enemy in this first kill zone, Sgt Baptista remounted his team in its open HMMWV and continued his assault to roll up the enemy’s eastern flank. Hearing of another unit being pinned down by fire, Sgt Baptista quickly dismounted a hasty three-man team and assaulted over another culvert under heavy enemy fire. Upon reaching the other side of the berm, Sgt Baptista fearlessly disabled an Improvised Explosive Device C-5-B-3 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 (IED), in stride, by disconnecting the power source. Without missing a step, he aggressively continued his 3-man assault advancing forward to uncover eleven enemy personnel—six to his right and five to his left. Sgt Baptista directed his two Marines to kill the enemy to the right while he single-handedly engaged the enemy to his left with utter disregard for his own personal safety. Sgt Baptista killed four of the terrorists with his rifle, from a range of no more than ten meters, while directing his vehicle gunner to silence the fifth attempting to flee. After this last engagement, Sgt Baptista relentlessly led his team across yet another berm and continued to hunt for the enemy. Sergeant Baptista was finally ordered to return with his team and retrograde near the MSR despite his steadfast reluctance to disengage until he finished rolling up the entire flank. Even then, Sgt Baptista aggressively sought to destroy the concealed terrorists by acting as the rear cover-man for the two teams attempting to break contact under sustained enemy mortar and machinegun fire. He personally withdrew only when the two teams were back on the road in relative safety. It would be confirmed later that Sergeant Baptista’s small reconnaissance platoon came under fire from forty to sixty terrorists who were well fortified and concealed in an ambush parallel to the Main Supply Route. No less than ten enemy machinegun positions, forty unspent enemy RPGs, one large IED, an SA-7, and various other weapons were found at the ambush site. Six Marines were wounded, four seriously; Captain Morel, the platoon commander, sacrificed his life. The platoon confirmed twenty-six enemy dead before breaking contact. Sgt Baptista’s aggressive and vigorously led 3-man assault accounted for thirteen of them and undoubtedly contributed to saving the lives of his fellow Marines caught in the original kill zone. Sergeant Baptista was an inspiration to all that observed his actions. Seven platoon Marines, including his platoon sergeant, witnessed Sgt Baptista’s heroic actions. Sergeant Baptista now lives in Costa Mesa, California and serves his community as a civilian police officer and Marine reservist. UNIQUE ITEMS/TOPICS 1. Sergeant Baptista was a Team Leader in First Reconnaissance Battalion; it’s a special and very demanding unit. Reconnaissance Marines are critical to the execution of any successful complex operation. These Marines are the “eyes and ears” of the Marine Division; they conduct a variety of combat missions from limited-scale raids, to traditional reconnaissance, to economy of forces operations. Recon Marines come from many different MOS’s such as infantry and communications. One of the things that made Sergeant Baptista’s assault so successful was C-5-B-4 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 his ability to apply the fundamentals of combat marksmanship and the Fighter/Leader Concept—he essentially said to his fellow Marines, “Come follow me!” 1. Sergeant Baptista was a leader who believed in both leading from the front, and setting the example. Even when his own safety was in jeopardy, he put the welfare of his fellow Marines and mission before himself. And by doing so, he killed several insurgents and ultimately saved the lives of his fellow Marines that were stranded on the road. CORE VALUE SUGGESTION- COURAGE Instead of remaining in an armored vehicle, Sergeant Baptista used his own initiative and executed well-rehearsed battle drills by charging the enemy positions and rallying three Marines to assist in his assault. His actions were instrumental in eliminating enemy combatants and saved the lives of his fellow Marines.
C-5-B-5 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 Baptista’s Weaver 5 10 30 5 1
Min Min Min Min
to Brief Guided Discussion to Execute to Critique/Move
Drill Instructor
OVERVIEW: Recruits will form a school circle and a Drill Instructor will read Sergeant Baptista’s Citation and lead a guided discussion for about ten minutes. After the guided discussion, the Drill Instructor will brief his Crucible Squad, see below. Next, the fire teams will get in 180-degree security on one side of the obstacle. A designated fire team leader will decide the order in which the teams will go over the obstacle. All recruits and equipment must go over the obstacle. Upon completion of the Weaver, recruits will sound off, “Mission Accomplished!” On order, the Crucible Squad will be released to the next station. 1. SITUATION: After crossing a damaged bridge over a swift river, your platoon runs into and engages an enemy unit of equal size. Your Crucible Squad is cut off from your platoon on the far side of the river. The bridge is in plain sight of the enemy. You have the extra ammunition for your platoon. 2. MISSION: CROSS THE DAMAGED BRIDGE WITH ALL OF YOUR SUPPLIES AND REJOIN YOUR PLATOON. 3. EQUIPMENT: You will wear your helmet and will pass your service rifle (Condition 4) as needed. You have the following equipment: 2 – MK19 Ammo Cans per Crucible Squad 4. COORDINATING INSTRUCTIONS: a. You will go under all of the marked logs and over the unmarked logs. b. Do not stand on the logs; maintain a low profile due to enemy presence. c. Pass the ammo cans over all the logs, do not throw or drop any of the equipment. d. If gear touches the ground or red area, then that gear is eliminated from the problem. If a team member touches the ground or red area, then that team member is a casualty. If you do become a casualty, you will conduct a Casualty Evacuation Exercise, which will consist of evacuating the injured recruit to an Aid Station in the time remaining for C-5-B-6 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 your Crucible Squad to execute the mission using the Two-Man Assisted Chair Carry. e. Do not touch the upright poles. f. The Drill Instructor will appoint one fire team leader to take over-all charge of the Crucible Squad while maintaining fire team integrity. All Crucible Squad members must cross the obstacle. g. Establish near and far side security before moving the equipment. Do you have any questions? 6. AFTER ACTION REVIEW: a. Why was the mission important? What was more important, getting the ammunition across or getting all of the team across? Why? b. What was the most challenging part of the obstacle? How did you work to overcome this? Could you have done better? c. Did the team leaders take charge of their teams? they show courage/initiative? d. Did teamwork affect the outcome of the mission? each member show courage/initiative? e. What was your commitment to the team? important?
How did How did
Why is that
f. Did communication within the team affect the outcome of the mission? g. Why is it important to know the abilities of the team members? h. Did your physical conditioning have an effect on the outcome of the mission? How does it relate to combat? i. Why is it important to establish security before moving?
C-5-B-7 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
C-5-B-8 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 APPENDIX 6 (HANSEN’S COUNTERS) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U)
HANSEN’S COUNTER
PURPOSE: Provides buddy teams an opportunity to develop teamwork through proper reinforcement/repetition of their MCMAP striking skills (lead-hand punch, rear-hand punch, hook, uppercut, and vertical strike). This station also ensures serviceability of the service rifle and reinforces weapons maintenance skills & discipline.
C-6-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
PRIVATE DALE MERLIN HANSEN UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS * * * * * MEDAL OF HONOR CITATION Private, U.S. Marine Corps. Born: 13 December 1922, Wisner, Nebr. Accredited to: Nebraska. Citation: For conspicuous gallantry and intrepidity at the risk of his life above and beyond the call of duty while serving with Company E, 2d Battalion, 1st Marines, 1st Marine Division, in action against enemy Japanese forces on Okinawa Shima in the Ryukyu Chain, 7 May 1945. Cool and courageous in combat, Pvt. Hansen unhesitatingly took the initiative during a critical stage of the action and, armed with a rocket launcher, crawled to an exposed position where he attacked and destroyed a strategically located hostile pillbox. With his weapon subsequently destroyed by enemy fire, he seized a rifle and continued his 1-man assault. Reaching the crest of a ridge, he leaped across, opened fire on 6 Japanese and killed 4 before his rifle jammed. Attacked by the remaining 2 Japanese, he beat them off with the butt of his rifle and then climbed back to cover. Promptly returning with another weapon and supply of grenades, he fearlessly advanced, destroyed a strong mortar position and annihilated 8 more of the enemy. In the forefront of battle throughout this bitterly waged engagement, Pvt. Hansen, by his indomitable determination, bold tactics and complete disregard of all personal danger, contributed essentially to the success of his company's mission and to the ultimate capture of this fiercely defended outpost of the Japanese Empire. His great personal valor in the face of extreme peril reflects the highest credit upon himself and the U.S. Naval Service.
C-6-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 HANSEN’S COUNTERS: 5 Min to Brief 30 Min to Execute MCMAP 5 Min to Critique 2 Drill Instructors 1 Field Instructor (Min Green Belt Instructor) OVERVIEW: All recruits will stage their packs in the designated area and retain their gloves and mouthpieces. Next, they will form a school circle and a Drill Instructor will read the Medal of Honor citation. After the citation, a Field Instructor will read the following brief to the recruits and then have one member of each buddy team in the first Crucible Squad get the MCMAP pads while his buddy moves into the pit; the second Crucible Squad shall perform weapons maintenance. The two Crucible Squads will rotate the MCMAP pit and weapons maintenance station after each recruit in the pit completes his third set of strikes (15 minutes). Upon completion of both Crucible Squads completing their third set of strikes, recruits will be debriefed and then released to the next station. 1. SITUATION: You are a member of Company A, First Battalion, Seventh Marines, First Marine Division, in action against enemy forces in the Oscar-1 Area, dug in on Hill 501. You have assaulted through the enemy’s fortified position and are now engaged in hand-to-hand combat. 2. MISSION: YOUR MISSION IS TO DESTROY THE ENEMY BY CLOSE COMBAT USING UPPER BODY STRIKES AND KNEE STRIKES. 3. EQUIPMENT: Recruits will stack weapons (Condition 4) and will wear the LBV, helmet, mouthpiece, MCMAP gloves, and will have MCMAP pads to execute the strikes. -Minimum of 14 MCMAP strike pads -One Whistle -One Stop Watch 4. COORDINATING INSTRUCTIONS: One Crucible Squad will perform MCMAP strikes while the second Crucible Squad performs weapons maintenance. Recruits in the MCMAP Pit will be teamed-up by permanent buddy teams. One “buddy” will hold the MCMAP pads while the other executes the proper strike techniques for 2.5 minutes. Recruits will execute the following series of drills for thirty seconds each in the following order: a. Lead hand punch b. Rear hand punch C-6-3 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 c. Hook d. Uppercut e. Vertical strike After the recruits executing the drills first have completed their first series of strikes, they will hold the MCMAP pads for their “buddy” while the second recruit executes the same series of strikes. Each recruit will rotate twice more so that they all execute these strikes three times each. Once each recruit in the pit has completed his third set of strikes, the Crucible Squads will rotate between the MCMAP Pit and Weapons Maintenance.
INSTRUCTOR NOTES: 1) The Recruits will conduct the strikes with their permanent “buddy” from their organic fire teams. 2) Instructors will ensure that the drills will last only for 30 seconds each (2.5 minutes per set)—going longer will cause excessive fatigue resulting in reinforcement of sloppy techniques. Remember, “Perfect practice makes perfect.” 3) Instructors will ensure that both the recruit holding the MCMAP pads and his buddy executing the strikes, do so while maintaining the Basic Warrior Stance. 4) Recruits must have their mouth guards in order to participate at this station. 5) At least one of the Pit instructors must be certified to at least the Green Belt Instructor-level IAW the MCMAP order. 6) One Drill Instructor will supervise weapons maintenance while the field instructor and second Drill Instructor supervise the recruits performing the MCMAP skills in the pit. Recruits will use lay their blouses on the deck while performing weapons maintenance IOT prevent losing parts.
5.
AFTER ACTION REVIEW: a. Why did PVT Hansen take the initiative to execute his attack? b. Was PVT Hansen mentally and physically prepared for his mission? c. Was your buddy mentally and physically prepared for this station and how can you improve your own training for a more realistic situation? C-6-4 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 d. Why is it important to know your team members’ and their capabilities? Why is it important to train together with your organic teams (e.g. understand the strengths and weaknesses of your teammates, build unit cohesion and teamwork)?
C-6-5 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
C-6-6 UNCLASSIFIED
APPENDIX 7 (DAY COMPASS/PACE COURSE) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) COMPASS/PACE COURSE
LAVILLE’S
N
DUTY
D-1
E-1
D-2 D-3
E-2
D-4
D-5
D-8
E-5
E-6
E-7
D-10
EC
HO
D-9
NE
D-7
E-4
LA
D-6
DELTA LANE
BERM
DELTA RANGE
E-3
E-8
D-11 E-9
D-12 E-10 E-11 E-12
PURPOSE: To provide recruits with an opportunity to apply and reinforce their newly gained knowledge of Land Navigation. Specifically, recruits will receive instant feedback on their ability to follow a magnetic azimuth over a short distance using a lensetic compass and their established pace counts.
C-7-1 UNCLASSIFIED
COMPASS/PACE COURSE 10 Min to Brief/Stage 28 Min to Exercise 7 Min Flex Time 2 Drill Instructors 1 Field Instructor OVERVIEW: Upon arrival at this station and staging of the packs, recruits will form a school circle adjacent to the Laville’s Duty read-board but not too close to that station. Next, the Field Instructor will brief the Compass Course to the recruits and issue each buddy team a compass. After the brief, the Drill Instructors will stage along the course boundaries and the Crucible Squads will proceed to their respective start boxes along “D” and “E” lanes by buddy team. The buddy teams will begin when they arrive at their boxes and each recruit of the buddy team will rotate being the pace count-man and compass-man twice (total of finding four boxes per buddy team). The Field Instructor will blow a whistle to end this station according to the timeline above at which time the recruits will form back up by Crucible Squad near the Laville’s read-board and proceed to the next station with their Drill Instructors. INSTRUCTOR NOTES: 1) Each box has the distance and direction information posted on it as well as the current box number and destination box number so that recruits are provided with instant feedback on their performance. For instance, “At D-1, Go 315 degrees for 150 meters to E-5.” Recruits are correct if they find the intended box or +/- one box number. 2) The first Crucible Squad will proceed to their “D” Lane boxes by buddy teams near the Delta Range berm; the second Crucible Squad will start on “E” Lane (on the dirt road north of the R505 gully) in the a same fashion. 3) Since the maximum number of recruits in a Crucible Squad is 24, there are twelve boxes on each lane (one per buddy team). 4) Ensure that you get the compasses back from the recruits before they leave to the next Crucible event. 5) Ensure that the two DIs are posted on the boundaries to keep recruits from wondering of the course. 6) The Field Instructor will rove to assist recruits needing help. 1. ORIENTATION: You are near Laville’s Duty. The Delta Range berm is there (POINT) and the dirt road along side it is called “Delta Lane.” There are 12 boxes on Delta Lane, one for each buddy team. Echo Lane is this dirt road here (POINT) along the north edge of the Range 505 gully. There are 12 boxes along Echo Lane as well, one for each buddy team. One Crucible Squad will start on Delta Lane, the other on Echo Lane—both by buddy teams and only one buddy team per start box.
C-7-2 UNCLASSIFIED
2. RULES: While negotiating this Compass and Pace Count Course, the following rules apply: a. This course will be done by permanent buddy teams from their assigned fire teams as assigned by T-17. Stay with your buddy at all times. b. Assign one buddy as the compass-man and the other as the pace count-man. The compass-man will use either the centerhold technique or the compass-to-cheek method. c. There will only be one buddy team per start box. Each box has the distance and direction information posted on it as well as the current box number and destination box number so that recruits are provided with instant feedback on their performance. For instance, “At D-1, Go 315 degrees for 150 meters to E-5.” Recruits are correct if they find the intended box or +/- one box number. d. When you arrive at your start box, follow the directions contained on it to your first point. When you get to your second point rotate duties between you and your partner and proceed to your second point. Do this two more times so that each recruit has been the pace count-man and compass-man twice. It should take you no more than 7 minutes per leg to find your box. e. When you both have completed the pace-man and compass-man duties twice, you may continue finding boxes until the Field Instructor blows the whistle at which time you will proceed back to this spot (Laville’s Duty) where your DIs will get accountability and then have you proceed to your next event. f. Remember, the information on the boxes tell you you are on, which box you are going to, and how to This will provide you with instant feedback on how have mastered the Pace Count and Navigation with a
what box get there. well you Compass.
g. If you go to a box number that is plus or minus one number from you intended target (e.g. you were supposed to end up at D3 but went to D4), you are still correct. If you are further off than +/- one box number, that’s okay, you are learning. In any case, before starting on the next leg, make sure your buddy team goes to the original box number that it was supposed to find. Otherwise, recruits will get bunched up on the course.
C-7-3 UNCLASSIFIED
3. EQUIPMENT: a. The recruits will stage all of their gear except for their rifles and LBVs. The rifles will be carried cross-body, muzzle down to reinforce keeping the rifle away from the compass. b. Twenty-four (24) serviceable compasses. team.
One for each buddy
c. One (1) Whistle for the Field Instructor d. Twenty-four (24) green boxes and stakes. 5. SAFETY. a. In the unlikely event of an injury all training will stop. Stay with your buddy and yell, “Drill Instructor!” three times. All other recruits will then proceed to back to Laville’s Duty with one Drill Instructor while the other Drill Instructor and Field Instructor proceed to the injured recruit. b. ORM: See next page.
C-7-4 UNCLASSIFIED
C-7-5 UNCLASSIFIED
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 APPENDIX 8 (HOWARD’S ASSAULT AND FIRE TEAM OBSTACLE COURSE) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIGEO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) 1. (U) Purpose. The purpose of this document is to provide specific guidance on the conduct of Crucible Event 8: Howard’s Assault and the Fire Team Obstacle Course. 2. (U) General. Crucible Event 8 is comprised of two substations, Howard’s Assault and the Fire Team Obstacle Course. When two Crucible Squads are traveling together, they both will conduct Howard’s Assault first and then do the Fire Team Obstacle Course in order to provide an extra Drill Instructor to help supervise the conduct of both stations. See Tabs A and B to this appendix for specific instructions on each station. Tabs: a. Howard’s Assault b. Fire Team Obstacle Course
R. B. RICHARDSON Major, U. S. Marine Corps Commanding
C-8-1 UNCLASSIFIED
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 TAB A (HOWARD’S ASSAULT) TO APPENDIX 8 (HOWARD’S ASSAULT AND FIRE TEAM OBSTACLE COURSE) TO ANNEX C (OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) GYSGT HOWARD’S ASSAULT
PURPOSE: Provides a lane training exercise that fosters teamwork in a stressful environment. This lane training exercise provides reinforcement/repetition of Day Individual Movement Skills in a fire team context as recruits practice alternate bounds and fire team rushes by moving from one covered position, through an obstacle, to the next covered position while their teammates provide cover fire.
C-8-A-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
GUNNERY SERGEANT JIMMIE E. HOWARD UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS * * * * * MEDAL OF HONOR CITATION For conspicuous gallantry and intrepidity at the risk of his life above and beyond the call of duty as a Platoon Leader, Company "C", First Reconnaissance Battalion, First Marine Division (Reinforced), Fleet Marine Force, Pacific, in action against communist insurgent forces in Quang Tin Province, Republic of Vietnam, on 16 June 1966. During the night Gunnery Sergeant (then Staff Sergeant) Howard's platoon of eighteen men was assaulted by a numerically superior force consisting of a well-trained North Vietnamese Battalion employing heavy small arms fire, automatic weapons and accurate mortar fire. Without hesitation he immediately organized his platoon to personally supervise the precarious defense of Hill 488. Utterly oblivious to the unrelenting fury of hostile enemy weapons fire and hand grenades he readily exposed himself to enemy fire while directing the operation of his small force. As the enemy attack progressed and the enemy fire increased in volume and accuracy and despite his mounting casualties, Gunnery Sergeant Howard continued to set an example of calmness and courage. Moving from position to position, he inspired his men with dynamic leadership and courageous fighting spirit until he was struck and painfully wounded by fragments from an enemy hand grenade. Unable to move his legs and realizing that the position was becoming untenable, he distributed his ammunition to the remaining members of his platoon and skillfully directed, friendly aircraft and artillery strikes with uncanny accuracy upon the enemy. Dawn found the beleaguered force diminished by five killed and all but one C-8-A-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 wounded. When rescue helicopters proceeded to Gunnery Sergeant Howard's position, he directed them away from his badly mauled force and called additional air strikes and directed devastating small-arms fire on the enemy thus making the landing zone secure as possible. His valiant leadership and courageous fighting spirit served to inspire the men of his platoon to heroic endeavor in the face of overwhelming odds, and reflected the highest credit upon Gunnery Sergeant Howard, the Marine Corps and the United States Naval Service.
C-8-A-3 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 GYSGT HOWARD’S ASSAULT 5 5 20 5
Min Min Min Min
to to to to
Brief Rehearse Execute Critique
2 Drill Instructors 1 Field Instructor OVERVIEW: Upon arrival at this station, recruits will form a school circle around the Drill Instructor who will read GySgt Howard’s citation to all of the recruits. Next, a Field Instructor will brief the station to the recruits. After the brief (below), recruits will have five minutes to plan/rehearse with the help of the Field Instructor. After five minutes of planning/rehearsal, one Drill Instructor will take recruits over to the beginning of the course and start the fire teams on the station, one at a time. The Field Instructor and second Drill Instructor will position themselves throughout the course making sure that the fire teams are negotiating the obstacles using the proper fire and movement techniques and making proper use of cover and concealment. Five minutes before recruits are scheduled to rotate to the next Crucible station—or upon successful completion of this station, whichever occurs first—the Field Instructor will conduct a critique of the teams’ performance with the entire Crucible Squad. After the critique, the Crucible Squad will be released to the Fire Team Obstacle Course. 1. SITUATION: Your fire team is at the Assault Position preparing to cross the Final Coordination Line (FCL) to assault the last 200-meters of the objective. The enemy has pinned-down the other teams of your squad at various locations. The enemy has also constructed several obstacles to slow your advance across the objective. 2. MISSION: ON ORDER, YOUR FIRE TEAM WILL CROSS ITS FCL AND CONDUCT ITS FINAL ASSAULT THROUGH THE ENEMY’S DEFENSES IN ORDER TO ASSIST THE OTHER TEAMS OF YOUR SQUAD THAT ARE PINNED-DOWN BY ENEMY FIRE. 3. EXECUTION (CONCEPT OF OPERATIONS): a. You will conduct this course in your permanent fire team assignments. b. Each fire team will start separately and assault through the obstacles using fire and movement and fire team assaults. You will verbally simulate providing cover fire with your weapons. c. When your team is negotiating an obstacle, remember that at C-8-A-4 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 least one member of your team, preferably the SAW, must be suppressing the enemy down range. Negotiate the obstacles as quickly as you can and then move to the next covered position from which you can continue your rapid assault across the objective. TEMPO IS SECURITY! d. Other fire teams on the course are notional—they don’t exist. Disregard anyone else on the course except for members of your own team. e. Upon completion of the assault, your fire team will consolidate, re-organized, conduct ACE reports, and prepare for a possible enemy counter-attack. You are carrying ammo cans in order to supply the friendly machineguns that will reinforce your position in case of an enemy counter-attack once you have secured the objective. Wait to be told to move off the course by an instructor. INSTRUCTOR NOTES: 1) Usually, as FWTCO manning levels allow, more than one field instructor mans this course. 2) The emphasis is on the individual fire teams. The Drill Instructor in-charge of starting the teams on the course will ensure that the teams are started at different intervals so that they are spread out with appropriate dispersion on the course. 3) If the recruits are not moving aggressively throughout the course, the instructors may assess a casualty in which case the team must move ahead without the casualty and then come back for the casualty once they secure the objective and conduct their ACE report. At that point, the recruits will use the proper litter carry to bring the recruit up to the LOA and apply first aid while maintain security against a counter-attack. 4. EQUIPTMENT: You will wear your helmet, flak jacket, LBV, black gloves, and carry your service rifle in Condition 3 with a magazine and no rounds. -
Each fire team shall carry two (2) 7.62mm Ammo Cans filled with sand throughout the course.
5. SAFETY RULES: a. Each obstacle will be negotiated the same way in which it was negotiated during Field Week. b. Recruits will maintain control of their own weapons and 782 gear.
C-8-A-5 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 c. Fire team integrity must be maintained throughout the entire assault. 6. PLAN AND EXECUTION: Give the recruits five minutes to come up with their plan and rehearse prior to the Drill Instructor starting recruits on the course. The plan should address fire and movement (i.e. team members only move while another teammate(s) are providing cover fire and that they move smartly from one covered position to the next before stopping or that they move as far as they can while the cover fire is effectively suppressing the enemy). Do you have any questions? 7. AFTER ACTION REVIEW: a. ESTABLISH WHAT HAPPENED (1) Did recruits provide cover fire for each other while they were moving? (2) Did they move quickly and aggressively through the objective? (3) If a casualty was assessed, did the recruits stop in the middle of their assault or did they secure the objective before rending aid to their comrade? When they came back for the comrade, did the SAW gunner maintain security at the LOA in order to prevent a counter-attack? (4) Was the mission accomplished? Why or why not? (5) What did the fire teams learn about mission accomplishment and planning? b. DETERMINE HOW THE TASK SHOULD BE DONE DIFFERENTLY NEXT TIME (1) What would you do differently, if you were to do this assault again? (2) What did you learn from this assault that you could apply in other situations, either in your future as a Marine or in other aspects of your life?
C-8-A-6 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
C-8-A-7 UNCLASSIFIED
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 TAB B (FIRE TEAM OBSTACLE COURSE) TO APPENDIX 8 (HOWARD’S ASSAULT AND FIRE TEAM OBSTACLE COURSE) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) FIRE TEAM OBSTACLE COURSE
PURPOSE: Reinforces the proper use of cover to aid movement and emphasizes the value of teamwork as recruits work together to get equipment across physically demanding obstacles. Allows recruits to gain confidence and trust in themselves and their fellow recruits.
C-8-B-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 FIRE TEAM OBSTACLE COURSE 10 Min Brief/Rehearse 20 Min Exercise 5 Min Debrief 2 Drill Instructors 1 Field Instructor OVERVIEW: Upon arrival at this station, recruits will stage their gear and receive a brief from the Field Instructor. After the brief (below), a Drill Instructor will give the recruits a few minutes to develop their team’s plan while the Field Instructor and second Drill Instructor positions themselves on the course to ensure that all recruits complete each obstacle properly and safely. Five minutes before recruits are scheduled to rotate to the next Crucible event–or upon successful completion of this station, whichever occurs first—the Field Instructor will conduct a critique of the teams’ performance with the entire Crucible Squad. After the critique, the Crucible Squad will be released to the next event. 1. SITUATION: You are facing a number of obstacles protecting a bridge on an enemy re-supply route. Some of the obstacles are mined, and there are ropes attached to the bridge at the far end of the obstacles. 2. MISSION: ON ORDER YOUR TEAM WILL MOVE THROUGH THE OBSTACLES IN ORDER TO BLOW THE ENEMY BRIDGE FROM THE OTHER SIDE. 3. EXECUTION: (CONCEPT OF OPERATIONS) a. Recruits will provide security from covered and/or concealed positions (e.g. use the wooden posts or the brush on the side of the course) while the other members of the fire team negotiate the obstacles. b. At the end of the course all the teams will form a 180degree security until all members of the Crucible Squad have completed the obstacle course. The teams will provide security in their 180s with either the SAW performing weapons maintenance or the three team members with the service rifles performing maintenance—not all weapon systems of the team will be doing weapons maintenance at the same time.
C-8-B-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
INSTRUCTOR NOTES: 1) EXPLAIN 180 DEGREES SECURITY IF RECRUITS DON’T UNDERSTAND 2) EXPLAIN WHY ALL WEAPONS OF THE TEAM SHOULDN’T BE CLEANED IN A TACTICAL ENVIRONMENT AT THE SAME TIME. c. You are to negotiate this course by fire teams independent of the other fire teams in your Crucible Squad. 4. EQUIPMENT: You will wear your helmet, LBV, and pass your service rifle (Condition 3) as necessary. You have the following equipment: -One (1) to two (2) 5.56mm ammo cans of explosives (sand) per fire team. 5. SAFETY RULES: rules apply:
While negotiating this obstacle, the following
a. Do not drop or throw the ammo cans over obstacles. b. If a team member should fall off an obstacle without negotiating the obstacle, or touch any red area, he will go around and execute that individual obstacle again, and catch up to his team. c. The ammo cans will be staged away from the base of the ropes before the recruits climb. d. Recruits will sling their rifles cross-body, muzzle down before climbing the rope. e. All recruits must climb the rope. f. If a team member finishes a particular obstacle before his buddy, he can go back and assist his buddy. For a team member to help another team member, he must go through the obstacles to reach him. Remember that each fire team must provide internal security by appropriately using cover and/or concealment while the other members of that fire team negotiate the obstacle. g. Weapons will be passed over the obstacles (butt-stock first) and will not be thrown. h. Recruits will not use each other as stepping-stones but can assist each other over the obstacles.
C-8-B-3 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 At this time, are there any questions? 6. PLAN AND EXECUTION: Recruits, take three minutes to decide how to accomplish this mission. Following the brief, execute the plan. INSTRUCTOR NOTES: OBSERVE FOR SEAFTY COMPLIANCE
7. AFTER ACTION REVIEW: a. DETERMINE WHAT HAPPENED (1) Did the recruits provide security for each other? If so, what weapon system provided security and why (e.g. the SAW provided security while the other three members of the team carried the gear or they moved through in buddy teams in successive bounds to post security)? (2) Was the mission accomplished? Why or Why not? (3) What did the team learn about mission accomplishment and planning? (4) Did the recruits move only after at least one teammate was posted for security from a covered (e.g. behind a post or log) and/or concealed (e.g. the brush on the side of the obstacle course) position? Why is perfect practice with the use of cover and concealment practice? (Answer: Marines fight the way they train and we do not want to sleep sloppy habits.) b. DETERMINE HOW THE TASK SHOULD BE DONE DIFFERENTLY NEXT TIME (1) What would you do differently, if you were to do this obstacle again? (2) What did you learn from this obstacle that you could apply in other situations, either in your future as a Marine or in other aspects of your life? 8. VALUES TO BE REINFORCED AFTER THE EVENT IS COMPLETED: a. If the recruits complete this event successfully reinforce the following values:
C-8-B-4 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 (a) That it took teamwork, self-sacrifice, endurance, stamina, commitment, and courage. This obstacle requires endurance to transport the ammo cans and prevent them from getting damaged by dropping them off an obstacle. This is obstacle also demonstrates that the battlefield can be a treacherous place. Marines always get the job done. b. If the recruits do not complete this event successfully the values that you should emphasize are the following: (a) That every effort was made to get the ammo cans on the other side in order to complete the mission. All recruits were emphasizing teamwork to get over the obstacles.
C-8-B-5 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
C-8-B-6 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 APPENDIX 9 (BORDELON’S ASSAULT AND PE STATION 1) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIGEO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) (U) REFERENCES (a) (b)
U.S. Army Training Circular 25-10: A Leader’s Guide to Lane Training MCWP 3-11.2: Marine Rifle Squad
1. (U) Purpose. The purpose of this document is to provide specific guidance on the conduct of Crucible Event 9: Bordelon’s Assault and Performance Examination (PE) Station 1. 2. (U) General. Crucible Event 9 is comprised of two stations, Bordelon’s Assault and PE Station 1. Upon arrival at this event, if two Crucible Squads are traveling together, both Crucible Squads will conduct Bordelon’s Assault and then move to the PE Station and conduct Hand-and-Arm Signals, Fire Team Formations, and Day & Night Individual Movement evaluations together. The two squads will then move to the next event per the timeline in Appendix 23 of Annex C. See Tabs A and B to this appendix for specific instructions on each station. Tabs: a. Bordelon’s Assault b. PE Station 1: Hand-and-Arm Signals, Fire Team Formations, and Day & Night Individual Movement
R. B. RICHARDSON Major, U. S. Marine Corps Commanding
C-9-1 UNCLASSIFIED
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 TAB A (BORDELON’S ASSAULT) TO APPENDIX 9 (BORDELON’S ASSAULT AND PE STATION 1) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U)
BORDELON’S ASSAULT
PURPOSE: This Lane Training Exercise provides repetition and reinforcement of the basic offensive tactical control measures with a smaller student to instructor ratio. Recruits practice fire team formations and alternate bounds as they move from one covered position, through an obstacle, to the next covered position using buddy team rushes in order to destroy an enemy observation post.
C-9-A-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
STAFF SERGEANT WILLIAM J. BORDELON UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS * * * * * MOH CITATION: For valorous and gallant conduct above and beyond the call of duty as a member of an Assault Engineer Platoon of the First Battalion, Eighteenth Marines tactically attached to the Second Marines, Second Marine Division, in action against the Japaneseheld Atoll of Tarawa in the Gilbert Islands on November 20, 1943. Landing in the assault waves under withering enemy fire which killed all but four of the men in his tractor, Staff Sergeant Bordelon hurriedly made demolition charges and personally put two pill boxes out of action. Hit by enemy machine-gun fire just as a charge exploded in his hand while assaulting a third position, he courageously remained in action and, although out of demolition, provided himself with a rifle and furnished fire coverage for a group of men scaling the seawall. Disregarding his own serious condition, he unhesitatingly went to the aid of one of his demolition men, wounded and calling for help in the water, rescuing this man and another who had been hit by enemy fire while attempting to make the rescue. Still refusing first aid for himself, he again made up demolition charges and single-handedly assaulted a fourth Japanese machine-gun position but was instantly killed when caught in a final burst of fire from the enemy. Staff Sergeant Bordelon's great personal valor during a critical phase of securing the limited beachhead was a contributing factor in the ultimate occupation of the island and his heroic determination reflects the highest credit upon the United States Naval Service. He gallantly gave his life for his country.
C-9-A-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 BORDELON'S ASSAULT: 10 Min to Brief 30 Min to Exercise 5 Min to Debrief 2 Drill Instructors 1 Field Instructor OVERVIEW: Upon arrival at this station, recruits will form a school circle at the Assembly Area signpost and a Drill Instructor will read Bordelon’s citation to the recruits while a Field Instructor briefs the station to recruit Fire Team Leaders. After the brief (below), the Drill Instructor will launch the fire teams from the Assembly Area, one at a time, to the LOD sign in a Fire Team Column. Once past the LOD sign, the team leaders will transition their units into a Fire Team Wedge and move to the Assault Position. Once at the Assault Position, recruits will negotiate the Buddy Team Assault Course using alternate bounds and Buddy Team Rushes under the supervision of the two Field Instructors. Five minutes before recruits are scheduled to rotate stations, or upon successful completion of this station, whichever occurs first, the Field Instructor will conduct a critique of the recruits’ performance with the Crucible Squad. After the critique, the Crucible Squad will be released to the next station (PE Station 1). 1. SITUATION: Your team just got orders that there is a two-man enemy observation post in the vicinity of the Buddy Team Assault Course. 2. MISSION: DESTROY THE ENEMY OBSERVATION POST 3. EXECUTION: (CONCEPT OF OPERATIONS) a. Recruits will execute this station using their permanent fire team billets. b. On order from the Drill Instructor at the Assembly Area, move your fire teams out of the Assembly Area in a Fire Team Column to the Line of Departure. c. Once past the LOD sign, the team leaders will transition their units into a Fire Team Wedge and move to the Assault Position. d. Once at the Assault Position, you will direct your fire team to move forward of the Final Coordination Line (FCL) (symbolized by the first set of railroad ties) and negotiate the Buddy Team Assault Course using alternate bounds and Buddy Team Rushes. You will be supervised by supervision a Field Instructor(s). C-9-A-3 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 e. Tell your buddy teams to remember and use the proper terminology: “Moving, Move, Set” f. Once the recruits reach the Limit of Advance at the end of the course they will wait for the remainder of their fire team. g. Once the fire team is caught up, the recruits will form a 180 degree perimeter (in order to repel the enemy’s counterattack, re-distribute ammunition, and assess/treat casualties) and practice giving their A.C.E reports. Each fire team leader will inform the field instructor when they are done. 4. EQUIPMENT: For this course, the recruits will wear 782 gear, helmet, and carry their rifle. The Field Instructors will ensure that the proper tactical control measures are posted and in good repair. 5. SAFETY/RULES: rules apply:
While negotiating this course, the following
a. Before execution, the recruits will show clear to their fire team leaders. The fire team leaders will initiate any hand-and-arm signals needed. He will also give all commands to his fire team. Remember the “Four Golden Rules of Formations:” -Proper Dispersion between members of the Fire Team -Everyone Repeats H&A Signals -Look back every 3-5 paces and ensure the next member of the team is still with you -Everyone moves around the Team Leader/Base Unit. At this time, are there any questions? 6. PLANNING: Recruits team leaders will be given five minutes to brief their fire teams. INSTRUCTOR NOTE: IF THERE ARE MORE THAN TWO FIELD INSTRUCTOR ASSISTING IN THE CONDUCT OF THIS COURSE, THE THIRD INSTRUCTOR SHALL BE POSTED TO ENSURE THAT THE RECRUITS ARE USING THE PROPER HAND-AND-ARM SIGNALS AND ARE USING THE PROPER FORMATIONS WHEN MOVING FROM THE AA TO THE FCL.
C-9-A-4 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 7. AFTER ACTION REVIEW: (Choose from the questions below) a. Commitment (1) What kind of brief discomfort did you experience in completing the obstacle? How did SSgt Bordelon overcome his pain and continue the assault? (2) Why is it important to overcome personal suffering in circumstances like these? b. Courage (1) What did you or SSgt Bordelon show by completing the obstacle or carrying out the assault? c. Miscellaneous (1) Did team work affect the outcome of the mission? did each team member show courage/initiative?
How
(2) What was your commitment to the Fire Team/Buddy Team? Why is that important? (3) Did communication within the team affect the outcome of the mission? (4) Why is it important to know the abilities of the team members? Did your physical conditioning have an effect on the outcome of the mission? How does it relate to combat?
C-9-A-5 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
C-9-A-6 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 TAB B (PE STATION 1) TO APPENDIX 9 (BORDELON’S ASSAULT AND PE STATION 1) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) H&A SIGNALS/FORMATIONS/DAY & NIGHT INDIVIDUAL MOVEMENT
PERFORMANCE EVALUATION STATION 1
FI DI
DI
A
A (RECRUITS WILL FACE BACK-TO-BACK DURING HAND-AND-ARM SIGNALS TESTING)
(RECRUITS WILL FACE BACK-TO-BACK DURING HAND-AND-ARM SIGNALS TESTING)
STAGING AREA
A
A FACE ABOUT
FACE ABOUT
DIs WILL TEST RECRUITS ON H/A SIGNALS & FORMATIONS AND THEN THE RECRUTS WILL MOVE TO THE FI AND REPORT GO/NO GO
C-9-B-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 PURPOSE: The purpose of this Crucible Event is to evaluate recruits on their ability to 1) correctly communicate using hand-and-arm signals, 2) assume individual positions in fire team formations 3) perform individual day and night movement techniques. The specific Marine Corps Common Skills that will be tested at this event are: 1. MCCS 14.01: Given 17 hand-and-arm signals from the list of 17 most commonly used fire team signals, communicate with them by correctly demonstrating 14 of the 17 signals. 2. MCCS 14.02: Given 782 gear, a weapon, and assignment as a member of a fire team, execute individual actions in fire team formations to assume assigned positions in each of the four formations. 3. MCCS 17.06a: Without the aid of reference, perform the high crawl technique of day individual movement. 4. MCCS 17.06b: Without the aid of reference, perform the low crawl technique of day individual movement. 5. MCCS 17.06c: Without the aid of reference, perform the back crawl technique of day individual movement. 6. MCCS 17.06f: Without the aid of reference, perform the Creeping technique of night individual movement. 7. MCCS 17.06g: Without the aid of reference, react to aerial flares. 8. MCCS 17.06h: Without the aid of reference, react to ground flares.
C-9-B-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 H&A SIGNALS/FORMATIONS/DAY & NIGHT INDIVIDUAL MOVEMENT 5 Min to Brief/Demo 40 Min PE 2 Drill Instructors 1 Field Instructor OVERVIEW: This station is divided into three performance evaluations (PEs): Hand-and-Arm Signals, Fire Team Formations, and Individual Day & Night Movement Techniques. Upon arrival at this station, the two Crucible Squads will be checked to ensure that they do not have any ammunition and then they will be given a quick orientation to the skills evaluated at this event. Once this is done, the recruits will cover down in fire team order on the Drill Instructor leading the opposite Crucible Squad to begin the evaluation, see graphic above. Fire Teams will cycle through each of the three PEs at this station and report their GO/NO GO to the Field Instructor after each PE. The Field Instructor will record the results of the performance evaluations and safeguard the integrity and uniformity of testing at this station. Fire teams waiting to be evaluated will face about until called forward by the Drill Instructors. After all the drills at this station are completed and recorded, the Crucible Squads will be released to the next event. 1. OPERATIONAL GRAPHIC. See title page. 2. COORDINATING INSTRUCTIONS. A. Drill Instructors will test recruits from the opposite Crucible Squad. B. The order of testing shall be Hand-and-Arm Signals, Fire Team Formations, and then Individual Day Movement Techniques. C. Members of the permanent Fire Team will test together. D. Recruits not testing will face about and wait to be tested. 3. EQUIPMENT. A.
The Field Instructor at each PE station shall maintain a grading sheet (see below) for each squad and turn the sheets in to the Chief Instructor at the conclusion of the Crucible.
B.
Four cones will be placed, two on either side of the road, to facilitate the Individual Movement PE described below. (See operational graphic on title page above.)
C-9-B-3 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 C.
A laminated copy of this station’s PE for each Drill Instructor.
4. PE: HAND-AND-ARM SIGNALS. A.
When called forward by the Drill Instructor, the Fire Team will present itself and each recruit will be placed back-to-back so they cannot see each other as they give the hand-and-arm signal. See operational graphic on title page above.
B.
The Field or Drill Instructor(s) will read off the handand-arm signals from the list below until each recruit of the fire team has successfully demonstrated 14 of the 17 signals. If after reading all 17 hand-and-arm signals, a recruit(s) from the fire team still has not demonstrated at least 14 of them correctly, the team will be given a NO GO at this station and sent to remediate the signals while the other teams/individuals are tested. 1. Demonstrate hand-and-arm signal decrease speed.
2. Demonstrate hand-and-arm signal change direction.
3. Demonstrate hand-and-arm signal enemy in sight.
4. Demonstrate hand-and-arm signal assemble.
5. Demonstrate hand-and-arm signal form column.
C-9-B-4 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
6. Demonstrate hand-and-arm signal shift (left, right, forward, back)
7. Demonstrate hand-and-arm signal echelon (left and right).
8. Demonstrate hand-and-arm signal skirmishers (left right).
and
9. Demonstrate hand-and-arm signal wedge.
10. Demonstrate hand-and-arm signal hasty ambush (left and right).
11. Demonstrate hand-and-arm signal fire team.
C-9-B-5 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 12. Demonstrate hand-and-arm signal close up.
13. Demonstrate hand-and-arm signal open up.
14. Demonstrate hand-and-arm signal forward advance.
15. Demonstrate hand-and-arm signal halt.
16. Demonstrate hand-and-arm signal freeze.
17. Demonstrate hand-and-arm signal increase speed/double time.
5. PE: FIRE TEAM FORMATIONS. A. After the team/individuals have been tested on Hand-and-Arm Signals, they will be tested on their ability to perform individual actions when assigned as a member of a fire C-9-B-6 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 team, before moving on to report their scores to the Field Instructor. This PE will be done by permanent fire teams acting collectively. B. The Drill Instructor will have the fire team face him and then tell them to demonstrate each of the following fire team formations. To receive a GO at this PE, the teams must 1) execute transitioning from each of the fire team formations to the next using the Four Golden Rules and 2) demonstrate 3 of the 4 formations correctly. If the fire team fails to demonstrate at least 3 of the formations correctly they will be remediated at the end of this PE but they will still receive a NO GO on the grading sheet. C. The “Four Golden Rules of Transitioning Formations.” (1) Everybody moves around the Base Unit, the Fire Team Leader (2) Everybody Repeats the Hand-and-Arm Signal (3) Look Back every 3-5 paces to ensure that personnel accountability and all-around security. (NA at this PE) (4) Keep your dispersion D. Fire Team Formations. (1) Demonstrate the fire team formation for the Fire Team Wedge.
(2) Demonstrate the fire team formation for the Fire Team Echelon Right or Left.
(3) Demonstrate the fire team formation for the Fire Team Skirmishers Right or Left. C-9-B-7 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
(4) Demonstrate the fire team formation for the Fire Team Column.
6. PE: DAY/NIGHT INDIVIDUAL MOVEMENT TECHNIQUES. A. After all teams/individuals have been tested on Fire Team Formations and have reported their scores to the Field Instructor, they will be tested on Individual Movement Techniques as a whole Crucible Squad on line, by fire teams. The fire teams of the Crucible Squad will cover down on a cone and then move across the road, from one set of cones to the next and back again, as they demonstrate each movement technique per leg. The second Crucible Squad waiting to be tested will face about on line and wait until the first squad is finished. See the Operational Graphic below:
C-9-B-8 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
DAY / NIGHT INDIVIDUAL MOVEMENT
DI
FI
DI
ROAD
C R U C IB L E S Q D . 1
A FIRE TEAM 1
A FIRE TEAM 2
A FIRE TEAM 3
A FIRE TEAM 4
A FIRE TEAM 5
A FIRE TEAM 6
MOVEMENT TECHNIQUES F A CE A BO UT
1. 2. 3. 4.
CRUCIBLE SQD. 2
A
A
A C AR G O N ET
HIGH CRAWL LOW CRAWL BACK CRAWL REACT TO AERIAL / GROUND FLARE 5. CREEPING TECHNIQUES
B. Both Drill Instructors and the Field Instructor will act as evaluators for this PE. Each Recruit must demonstrate the three types of individual day movement techniques: High Crawl, Low Crawl, and Back Crawl. They must also demonstrate the Night Individual Movement Techniques: Actions upon Exposure to Ground Flares/Aerial Illumination and the Creeping technique. The performance steps for each of these techniques are provided below:
C-9-B-9 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 (1) High Crawl: To perform the high crawl, keep body off the ground. Rest weight on forearms and lower legs. Cradle rifle in arms, keeping the muzzle off the ground. The ejection port cover will be facing up towards the sky. Keep knees well behind the buttocks to stay low. Move forward, alternately advancing right forearm and left knee, then left forearm and right knee. (2) Low Crawl: To perform the low crawl, keep the body as flat as possible against the ground. Grasp the rifle sling at the upper sling swivel. Let the balance of the rifle rest on the forearm and let the butt of the rifle drag on the ground. Keep the muzzle off the ground. The ejection port cover will be facing up towards the sky. To start forward, push arms forward and pull right leg forward. To move forward, pull with arms and push with right leg. Change the pushing leg frequently to avoid fatigue. (3) Back Crawl: To perform the back crawl, keep the back as low to the ground as possible. Grasp the rifle with your left hand at the hand guard, and the weapon will lie across the center of your chest. Your right hand will be extended outward in front of you to search for bobby-traps and other objects that could impede your movement. (4) React to Aerial/Ground Flare: When the flare is popped, the recruit should slowly melt to the ground as to not alert the enemy by fast motions. Once on the ground, the recruit should close his shooting eye to ensure his night vision is kept. The recruit should also have his weapon in the pocket of his shoulder and be aimed down range. (5) Creeping Technique. To creep at night on the hands and knees, use your hands to feel for twigs, leaves or other substances that might make a noise. Clear a spot to place your knee. Keeping your hand at that spot, bring your knee forward until it meets your hand. Then place your knee on the ground and repeat the action with the other hand and knee. Lay the rifle on the ground at your side and clear an area for it. Lift the rifle up and move it forward. Movement is slow and tedious, since it must be done silently. C. Each recruit of the fire team must successfully demonstrate all of the techniques in order to receive a GO at this
C-9-B-10 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 station. Teams/individuals who fail to demonstrate the proper technique will be remediated at this station but will still receive a NO GO on the grading sheet. D. Operational Risk Management. Not applicable.
(Note that technically these Day and Night Individual Movement PEs are post-evaluation retention quizzes since these skills were tested during the course of Field Week through separate PEs.)
C-9-B-11 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 PERFORMANCE EVALUATION STATION 1 GRADING SHEET
C-9-B-12 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 APPENDIX 10 (WEAPONS MAINTENANCE) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U)
WEAPONS MAINTENANCE
PUROPSE: This station ensures serviceability of the service rifle and reinforces weapons maintenance skills & discipline while allowing larger Crucible Squads a “flex” station in their training schedule so that they have more time to complete the preceding stations in Appendix 9.
C-10-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 WEAPONS MAINTENANCE TBD Min Weapons Maint 2 Drill Instructors OVERVIEW: Upon completion of the preceding stations and arrival at this weapons maintenance station, recruits will commence weapons maintenance until told to move out to the next event by the Drill Instructors.
INSTRUCTOR NOTES: 1) This is a “flex” station partially meant to give larger Crucible Squads some extra time to complete the preceding event, as described in Appendix 9, to standard. Therefore, the exact time for weapons maintenance will be determined by the Drill Instructors based on the start time of their Crucible Squads’ next event. 2) The focus for weapons maintenance is functionality of the weapon. 3) Recruits will ensure that the rifle bores are clear from obstructions/dirt and the bolts are well lubricated for all Blank and Live-fire events.
C-10-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 APPENDIX 11 (THREE-MILE HIKE) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) THREE-MILE HIKE
PURPOSE: This event provides the recruits with a short conditioning hike while practicing moving in a fire team wedge. It prepares recruits physically and mentally for the ardors of combat.
C-11-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
"The infamous Death March from Bataan in 1942, showing thinning file of prisoners carrying comrades who dropped along the way." Photo by: Wide World Photos
* * * * * BATAAN DEATH MARCH * * * * * Historical Vignette
On April 9th, 1942, the garrison of Filipino and American servicemen on the Bataan peninsula on the island of Luzon surrendered to the Imperial Japanese Army. The loss of Bataan saw more than 75,000 Filipino and American fall into enemy hands. 43 of those 75,000 were Marines from the 4th Marine Regiment. The Japanese captors were war-hardened soldiers who brutalized their captives, giving them rotten food and stagnant water. The survivors were herded from Mariveles airfield towards San Fernando some 80 miles away on long, winding mountainous roads. For those who could move under their own power, it would be a long and arduous six-day “March of Death”. With the hot tropical sun beating relentlessly down on them and no fresh water they continued to walk until they collapsed. The Japanese shot or bayoneted those who fell, as well as civilians who were caught providing food or water. The survivors were moved during the hot daylight and kept going until well after dark. On short halts, the Japanese would make them strip and sit in the hot sun. They slept in fields or were crammed into pens with no comfort. In the end, almost 30,000 Filipino-Americans died during the “Bataan Death March.” Out of that number, all 43 Marines survived. They attributed their survival to their discipline, identity, esprit de corps, training and Marine Corps traditions.
C-11-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 Three Mile Hike (and Foot Check) 5 Min Brief 60 Min Hike 10 Min Foot Check 2 Drill Instructors 1. OVERVIEW: Upon completion of Weapons maintenance, a Drill Instructor will brief recruits on the upcoming movement and read the historical vignette (vĭn-yĕt'). Upon completion of vignette, the Crucible Squad will conduct a tactical movement over to Range 501. Upon arrival at Range 501, recruits will stage their packs and a corpsman will conduct a foot check. 2. SITUATION: The enemy has broken through your platoon's position to the north at Range 501. You need to move with combat load to reinforce your platoon at Range 501 and repel the enemy's assault by fire and, if need be, close combat. Radio reports indicate that that your platoon can only hold out for another hour, at most. 3. MISSION:
CONDUCT A TACTICAL MOVEMENT TO RANGE 501 IN ORDER TO
REINFORCE YOUR BELEAGUERED PLATOON. 4. EQUIPMENT:
You will wear your Helmet, LBV, Day Pack, and
carry your Service Rifle (Condition 3). (If recruits do not have the Three-point Tactical Sling, they will carry their weapons at the ALERT on their dominant side.) 5. COORDINATING INSTRUCTIONS: a. A recruit Squad Leader will be selected to lead the Crucible Squad in the correct tactical formation (Crucible Squad Column, Fire Team Wedge or Column).
The recruit Squad
Leader is responsible for setting the pace and reinforcing the platoon within the time constraints allotted for this event. b. Recruits will execute their fire team wedge in their organic teams. c. No pack exchange will be conducted. Every recruit must carry his own gear. C-11-3 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 d. Remember to hydrate while on the hike. e. Running recruits with packs on is strictly prohibited as this has been shown to cause excessive injuries to the lowerextremities. f. Route: Recruits will move from the Range 505 Complex to Range 501 by using the “Apron” to the west of the KD firing ranges and up Range 501 Road. (The route is marked with appropriate Crucible signs along the way.) g. Safety is paramount. Recruits will use reflective belts on their packs to increase their visibility. Drill Instructors will ensure that every recruit has full canteens before starting this movement. h. You have 60 minutes to make it to Range 501.
Are there any questions?
C-11-4 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
C-11-5 UNCLASSIFIED
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 APPENDIX 12 (COPELAND’S ASSAULT/FIRE TEAM ASSAULT COURSE) to ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) to MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) RANGE 505 FIRE TEAM ASSAULT COURSE
PURPOSE: Reinforce the importance of well-rehearsed battle drills by reflecting on a recent example of a Marine’s heroism in combat. This lane training exercise simulates a combat environment with pneumatic machine guns, artillery simulators, smoke generators, and a variety of obstacles, including several wire obstacles and berms. On the course, the recruits reinforce their proficiency in individual movement skills (crawls and rushing), weapons employment, and fire & movement as they repetitively move from one covered position, through an obstacle, to the next covered position, in a collective fire team setting.
C-12-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
SERGENT WILLIE L. COPELAND III UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS * * * * * NAVY CROSS CITATION For extraordinary heroism as Team Leader, 2nd Platoon, Bravo Company, 1st Reconnaissance Battalion, 1st Marine Division, I Marine Expeditionary Force, U.S. Marine Corp Forces, Central Command in support of Operation IRAQI FREEDOM on 7 April 2004. Tasked as the Main Effort to lead a convoy to a Forward Operating Base, Sergeant Copeland’s platoon was ambushed by 40-60 insurgents in well-fortified and concealed positions near the province of Al Anbar. After observing a rocket-propelled grenade instantly crippling the lead vehicle and having mortar and machinegun fire disable his own, Sergeant Copeland led five Marines out of the heaviest zone under attack and made an assault across an open field. They continued the assault across a deep and muddy canal, working their way up to firing positions on the far side within hand grenade range of the enemy. The vigor of this first assault eliminated ten insurgents at close range while forcing other enemy positions to flee. During this valiant effort, his platoon commander fell wounded at his side. Unwilling to subject any more Marines to danger, he signaled others to remain in covered positions. While placing himself in a position to shield his wounded officer, he applied first aid. Without regard for his personal safety, Sergeant Copeland stabilized, and then evacuated his Captain to a safe area. He then conducted the withdrawal of his team from their covered positions through the use of hand grenades. By his bold leadership, wise judgment, and complete dedication to duty, Sergeant Copeland reflected great credit upon himself and upheld the highest traditions of the Marine Corps and the United States Naval Service.
C-12-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 COPELAND’S ASSAULT FIRE TEAM ASSAULT COURSE 10 10 15 10
Min Core Value (Copeland) Min Brief/Rehearse Min Execute Debrief/Police Call 2 Drill Instructors 2 Field Instructors
OVERVIEW: Upon arrival at this station, recruits will stage their gear and form a school circle. A Drill Instructor will read Copeland’s citation from Operation Iraqi Freedom II. After the citation and a brief discussion on how the citation relates to Field Skills Training and Core Values (see below), recruits will quickly draw inert hand grenades, and receive a brief from a Field Instructor. After the brief (below), a Drill Instructor will load the fire teams into the AAV’s. The Field Instructor and second Drill Instructor will position themselves on the course to ensure that all recruits complete each obstacle properly and safely. Ten minutes before recruits are scheduled to rotate to the next Crucible station–or upon successful completion of this station, whichever occurs first—the Field Instructors will conduct a critique of the teams’ performance with the entire Crucible Squad and then have the recruits police call for the grenade bodies. After the police call, the Crucible Squad will be released to the next station. I. COPELAND’S ASSAULT—GUIDED CORE VALUES DISCUSSION. 1. BACKGROUND TO THIS EVENT. Discuss the Navy Cross citation. Make sure the recruits understand that this event occurred recently, in April 2004. It is important to understand that Copeland’s small assault team was at their culminating point (i.e. unable to cross the open field to their front and assault further without reinforcements and/or a support by fire position) and therefore, they were forced to halt their assault, take a defensive position, and care for their wounded until reinforcements arrived. Said another way, Marines do not stop in the middle of an assault to care for wounded; corpsman assist them or Marines will help them after the objective is secured in order to prevent more friendly casualties. 2. QUESTIONS AND CORE VALUES TO BE DISCUSSED. a.
Do the recruits think that they could face a similar situation in the near future?
C-12-3 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 b. How does this event relate to the Immediate Action Drills that recruits were taught during Field Week? Which battle drills do Sgt Copeland’s Navy Cross citation illustrate (e.g. React to a Near Ambush, Fire Team Assaults, Table 2 Shooting Skills, First Aid Drills, Limit of Advance/ACE reports)? c. Do you think that Sgt Copeland’s unit constantly practiced their battle drills? What might have happened if Sgt Copeland’s force didn’t have well-rehearsed battle drills in reacting to a near ambush? d. How does the citation relate to Core Values of Honor, Courage, and Commitment? II. FIRE TEAM ASSAULT COURSE. 1. SITUATION: Your fire team has just dismounted its disabled AAV and sees an enemy pill box 150 meters to its direct front. The enemy has established various obstacles including a trench line all along the beach and has emplaced other wire and earthen obstacles. From what you can tell, there seems to be three to five personnel defending in the vicinity of the pill box. 2. MISSION: DESTROY THE ENEMY PILL BOX SO THAT FRIENDLY FORCES CAN GET OFF THE BEACH. 3. EXECUTION: a. You will conduct this course in your permanent fire team assignments. b. Depart the AAV’s and bring the fire team online with the white ammo cans and then execute fire team rushes to the first wire obstacle. (The fire team leader accounts for his entire team and gives the command, “SAW Gunner cover us, Rifleman and A-Gunner--FOLLOW ME!” The fire team leader then leads his team to breach the wire using the “Three-and-One” rush technique.) c. Ensure that a team member is always providing cover fire at each obstacle while other teammates negotiate the obstacle (e.g. the SAW provides cover fire with the Team Leader while the two riflemen prepare to breach the first wire obstacle). d. Check for booby traps at the wall using the bump and feel method. Go over the bulkhead keeping a low profile and high crawl under wire. e. Use proper movement (high crawl, low crawl, high step, and back crawl, etc.) while assaulting through the enemy’s obstacles to the objective—pay attention to the signs. C-12-4 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 f. Only move while you are provided with cover fire by your teammate(s). Verbally simulate firing on the enemy. g. Use blue-body smoke to screen your movement while negotiating time-intensive obstacles in the open (i.e. the first wire obstacle). Use inert (“blue-body”), high explosive hand grenades against the enemy when within hand grenade range in order to create a tactical advantage. INSTRUCTOR NOTES: 1) Recruits will be reminded to only throw grenades and smokes away from other recruits and instructors. 2) Teams will be started on the course at significant intervals on opposite ends of the course in order to prevent other recruits from being hit with a dummy grenade. 3) If the recruits are not moving aggressively throughout the course, the instructors may assess a casualty in which case the team must move ahead without the casualty and then come back for the casualty once they secure the objective and conduct their ACE report. At that point, the recruits will use the proper litter carry to bring the recruit up to the LOA and apply first aid while maintain security against a counter-attack.
h. Team leaders consolidate at the LOA past the objective, and then conduct ACE reports and prepare for the enemy’s possible counter-attack. 4. EQUIPMENT: You will wear your helmet, flack jacket, LBV, black gloves, hearing protection and maintain control of your service rifle (Condition 3). -56 Blue, Inert Hand Grenades.
Each recruit will be given
one. -14 Blue, Inert Smoke Grenades. Each fire team will be given two. -One Smoke Generator with mineral oil. 5. SAFETY/RULES: rules apply:
While negotiating this course, the following
a. Blue HE Grenades will be thrown only at the red threat silhouettes. b. Recruits will execute the course using the ‘Three-and-One’ rush method and Alternate Bounds in order to create tempo. C-12-5 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 c. Do not split up; stay together as a fire team. d. Do not attempt to go around the obstacles. e. All equipment must be maintained with nothing left behind— ensure that your canteens are dummy-corded using the Scaffold Knot secured by an Overhand Knot as you were taught during Field Week. f. Watch for enemy soldiers while negotiating obstacles. g. After destroying the enemy headquarters, ensure the fire team provides security in case of a counterattack. h. Remember, safety is paramount. At this time, are there any questions? 6. PLANNING: Recruits take five (5) minutes to rehearse individual movement techniques and fire team assaults using the Alternate Bounding method. 7. AFTER ACTION REVIEW: a. ESTABLISH WHAT HAPPENED (1) Did the recruits use the proper individual movement techniques to negotiate the obstacles (e.g. crawls, rushes to covered positions, etc)? If not, how did this affect mission accomplishment? (2) Did the recruits maintain proper dispersion and only move when other teammates were providing cover fire? (3) Did the recruits make effective use of cover and keep low silhouettes when firing from covered positions? (4) Did recruits properly execute alternate bounds? Why does this technique generate tempo during a final assault on the objective as compared to successive bounds? (5) Was the 3:1 technique used? Were the recruits able to use non-verbal communication (i.e. visual cues of the team leader rushing to generate movement with the other two riflemen) or did the team leader constantly have to tell teammates what to do? Which method is preferred on a noisy battlefield? (6) Did recruits effectively make use of the hand grenades to break up the enemy’s defense and/or throw smoke to C-12-6 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 screen their movement at the most time-consuming obstacles? How did this impact mission accomplishment? (7) If a casualty was assessed, did the recruits stop in the middle of the kill zone or did they secure the objective before rending aid to their comrade? When they came back for the comrade, did the SAW gunner maintain security at the LOA in order to prevent a counter-attack? b. DETERMINE HOW THE TASK SHOULD BE DONE DIFFERENTLY NEXT TIME (1) What would you do differently, if you were to do this obstacle again? (2) What did you learn from this obstacle that you could apply in other situations, either in your future as a Marine or in other aspects of your life? c. VALUES TO REINFORCE AFTER THE OBSTACLE IS COMPLETED (1) If the recruits complete this event successfully reinforce the following values: (a) That it took teamwork to cover each other as they moved from obstacle to obstacle. (b) That the proper use of day movement techniques, hand-and-arm signals, and the Fighter-Leader concept is important in overcoming enemy resistance. (2) If the recruits do not complete the event successfully the values that you should emphasize are the following: (a) The recruits demonstrated great teamwork, and camaraderie by going back to get the casualties and drag them to safety AFTER THE OBJECTIVE WAS SECURED. (b) The recruits must train hard and understand that the harder they train now, the less they will bleed in combat.
C-12-7 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
C-12-8 UNCLASSIFIED
APPENDIX 13 (FIELD SKILLS PERFORMANCE EVALUATION STATION 2 AND CORE VALUES) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) (U) REFERENCES (a) (b)
U.S. Army Training Circular 25-10: A Leader’s Guide to Lane Training MCWP 3-11.2: Marine Rifle Squad
1. (U) Purpose. The purpose of this document is to provide specific guidance on the conduct of Crucible Event 13: Performance Examination (PE) Station 2 and Core Values (“Ism’s”). 2. (U) General. Crucible Event 13 is comprised of two stations, PE Station 1 (IA Drills) and Core Values (“Ism’s”). Upon arrival at this event, if two Crucible Squads are traveling together, both Crucible Squads will conduct the PE Station and then move to the Core Values Station where each DI will lead his squad in a guided discussion using the read-boards provided. The two squads will then move to the next event per the timeline in Appendix 23 of Annex C. See Tabs A and B to this appendix for specific instructions on each station. Tabs: a. PE Station 1 (IA Drills) b. Core Values (“Ism’s”)
R. B. RICHARDSON Major, U. S. Marine Corps Commanding
C-13-1 UNCLASSIFIED
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 TAB A (PE STATION 2) TO APPENDIX 13 (FIELD SKILLS PERFORMANCE EVALUATION STATION 2 AND CORE VALUES) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) IMMEDIATE ACTION DRILLS
PERFORMANCE EVALUATION STATION 2
DI
DI
TARGETS
TARGETS
X LOA
X X
A
15 METERS
50
X X
LOA
STARTING POINTS
X
X X
A
METERS
50
METERS
15 METERS
FI STAGING/LOADING AREA
A
A FACE ABOUT
FACE ABOUT
IA DRILL ORDER 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
C-13-A-1 UNCLASSIFIED
NEAR AMBUSH BREAK CONTACT SHORT HALT/5METER CHECK HASTY AMBUSH REACT TO INDIRECT FIRE
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
PURPOSE: The purpose of this Crucible Event is to evaluate recruits on their ability to correctly apply individual actions while assigned as a member of a Fire Team in order to ensure that student learning has, in fact, taken place. The specific skills that will be tested at this event are: 1. MCCS 13.07: Perform 3 of 4 immediate actions upon contact with the enemy correctly while assigned as a member of a Fire Team. a. MCCS 13.07a: Given individual field equipment, a weapon, and assignment as a member of a fire team, execute immediate action to a near ambush correctly in accordance with MCWP 3-11.3 b. MCCS 13.07b: Given individual field equipment, a weapon, and assignment as a member of a fire team, execute immediate action to break contact correctly in accordance with MCWP 3-11.3 c. MCCS 13.07c: Given individual field equipment, a weapon, and assignment as a member of a fire team, execute immediate action to a short halt/5-meter check correctly d. MCCS 13.07d: Given individual field equipment, a weapon, and assignment as a member of a fire team, execute immediate action to a hasty ambush correctly in accordance with MCWP 3-11.3 2. MCCS 17.09: Given simulated incoming indirect fire, react to indirect fire per MCRP 4-11.1D
C-13-A-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 IMMEDIATE ACTION DRILL PE 10 Min to Prep/Brief 35 Min PE IA Drills 2 Drill Instructors 1 Field Instructor OVERVIEW: Upon arrival at this station, the two Crucible Squads will be checked to ensure that they do not have any live rounds in their magazines and rifles and then will be given a quick orientation to skills evaluated at this event while being issued BFAs and 15 rounds of blank ammunition. Once this is done, the recruits will cover down in fire team order on the Drill Instructor leading the opposite Crucible Squad to begin the evaluation, see graphic above. Fire Teams will cycle through each of the five immediate actions drills reporting their GO/NO GO to the Field Instructor after each drill. The Field Instructor will record the results of the performance evaluations and safeguard the integrity and uniformity of testing at this station. Fire teams waiting to be evaluated will face about until called forward by the Drill Instructors. After all the drills at this station are completed and recorded, the Crucible Squads will be lined-out again and released to the next event. 1. OPERATIONAL GRAPHIC. See title page. 2. COORDINATING INSTRUCTIONS. A. Upon arrival at this station, the Drill Instructors will check each magazine and the chambers of each weapon to ensure that there are no live rounds present before conducting this performance evaluation. B. All recruits will have appropriate gear (i.e. weapon, three magazines, LBV, Flak, and Kevlar). Additionally, all recruits will have their fire team billets indicated on their Kevlar using 3X5 cards with the appropriate symbol. C. The Field Instructor will ensure that all recruits are issued 15 rounds of blank ammunition and that recruits load these rounds in three magazines of five rounds each (in order to force repetition of speed reloads). The Field Instructor will also ensure that recruits fasten BFAs to their weapons. The Field Instructor will have a squirt bottle of CLP to lubricate bolts at this station as necessary to ensure proper functioning of the weapons. The recruits will not fire their weapon with the ammunition if they do not have a BFA on their weapon.
C-13-A-3 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 D. Before beginning the first evaluation, the recruits will collectively test fire one blank round in the air to further demonstrate that no live ammunition is present and that their weapons are lubricated and that they function correctly. E. The Field Instructor at each PE station shall maintain a grading sheet (see page C-7-8 below) for each squad and turn the sheets in to the Chief Instructor at the conclusion of the Crucible. 3. EQUIPMENT. A. Each recruit will wear their LBV, Flak, Kevlar, and will have their weapon with a minimum of three magazines. B. Each recruit will be given 15 rounds of blank ammunition. Additionally, eight L594 Artillery Simulators are provided each day of the Crucible to help simulated realism with the React to Indirect Fire Drills; these simulators will be used throughout the day at the discretion of the Field Instructor. C. The Field Instructor will have the Performance Evaluation Sheet attached below, a squirt bottle of CLP, 48 BFAs, 48 blue-body fragmentation hand grenades, and 24 blue bodyinert smoke grenades. D. The Field Instructor shall ensure that there are two sets of four target silhouettes placed 50 meters from the start line and two cones 15 meters beyond the silhouettes to represent the LOA. See the Operational Graphic above. E. One fire extinguisher and spade shovel will be staged at the starting point in case of minor fires. F. A laminated copy of this station’s PE for each Drill Instructor. 4. PERFORMANCE STEPS. A. NEAR AMBUSH. Did the recruits demonstrate the proper steps for executing this drill by applying the ditty “CNA?” => GO/NO GO Step 1: With one inert hand grenade per recruit and a Condition One weapon using the magazine of four blank rounds and second magazine of five blank rounds in a magazine pouch, recruits are put into any fire team formation parallel (facing the DI) to the direction of the four target silhouettes.
C-13-A-4 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 Step 2: The Drill Instructor will designate the location of the enemy and then give the command using the acronym “CNA.” For example, the preparatory command given by the DI is “Contact (Right), 50 meters!” Step 3: The DI or Fire Team Leader will then give the command of execution, “Near Ambush!” Step 4: The recruits will all respond with, “Assault Through!” In this example, the recruits would face to the right and individually assault 50 meters to the right and establish a hasty limit of advance at the cones 15 meters beyond the line of four silhouettes. While assaulting through, the recruits will use the “combat glide” and the blue body grenades to break up the enemy’s attack; they will not get in each other’s line of fire. Step 5: Did recruits properly demonstrate Speed Reloads? B. Break Contact. Did the recruits demonstrate the proper steps for executing Break Contact? => GO/NO GO Step 1: Brief all recruits that the fire team leaders are to give the command to break contact 50 meters to the rear when his team comes within 10 meters of the silhouettes. Tell the fire teams that they are to demonstrate two alternate bounds per buddy team while covering each other’s movement in order to receive a GO at this station. Step 2: With two inert smoke grenades per fire team and individual Condition One weapons using a magazine of five blank rounds, recruits are put into any fire team formation heading towards the direction of the four target silhouettes. (This drill can be done with two fire teams abreast but working independently in order to speed up the evaluation time when testing 24man Crucible Squads.) Step 3: When the Fire Team comes within 10 meters of the silhouettes, the Fire Team Leader will give the command, “Get Down, Take Cover! Break Contact, ___ O’clock, 50 meters! Saw-Gunner, A-Gunner—Cover Us!” Step 4: Fire Teams will demonstrate two alternate bounds to move away from the silhouettes using buddy team fire and movement to cover each other’s withdrawal.
C-13-A-5 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 Step 5: Did recruits maintain proper dispersion and not run in front of each other’s line of fire? Step 6: Did recruits make proper use of the smoke grenades to break contact? C. Short Halt/5-Meter Check. This Drill tests the recruits’ ability to check their immediate surroundings for an IED or suspicious material before taking a short halt. Did the recruits demonstrate the proper steps for executing a 5Meter Check? => GO/NO GO Step 1: Recruits are put into any fire team formation heading towards the direction of the four target silhouettes. (This drill can be done with two fire teams abreast but working independently in order to speed up the evaluation time when testing 24-man Crucible Squads.) Instructors will ensure that fire teams are using proper dispersion (minimum of 10 -15 meters between recruits). Step 2: On order from the Drill Instructor, the fire team leader will simply give the hand-and-arm signal to halt and before taking a knee, the entire team will do a quick circular inspection of their immediate individual surroundings. D. Establish a Hasty Ambush. This drill tests the recruits’ ability to establish a hasty ambush at the fire team level. Did the recruits demonstrate the proper steps for executing a Hasty Ambush? => GO/NO GO Step 1: With a Condition One weapon using a magazine of any saved rounds, recruits are put into any fire team formation heading parallel (facing the DI) to the four target silhouettes. Step 2: On team leader for “Halt,” towards the Right:
order from the Drill Instructor, the fire will simply given the hand-and-arm signal “Enemy in Sight,” and “Hasty Ambush” silhouettes. For example, Hasty Ambush
Step 3: Upon receipt of the Hasty Ambush signal from the fire team leader, all recruits must repeat that same signal.
C-13-A-6 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 Step 4: After all recruits have passed on the Hasty Ambush Signal, they will face in the intended direction while maintaining proper dispersion and lay down in the prone behind available cover and/or concealment. Step 5: On order from the DI, or the team leaders, acting independently, the fire team will either initiate the ambush and assault through the designated kill zone to the limit of advance beyond the silhouettes or simply end the drill (at the discretion of the DI/FI based on time available to complete the station). E. React to Indirect Fire. This Drill evaluates the recruits’ ability to properly react to enemy indirect fire. Did the recruits demonstrate the proper steps for Reacting to Indirect Fire? => GO/NO GO Step 1: Recruits are put into a fire team formation heading towards the four target silhouettes. Step 2: On order from the Drill Instructor, the fire team will receive the alert, “Incoming!” Step 3: The team repeats the alert, “Incoming!” and will then get down in the prone until after the detonation simulated by the Drill Instructor. Step 4: After the simulated detonation, the team leader will give a direction and distance for their fire teams to break contact to as a whole fire team. Recruits will move rapidly across impact area keeping their bodies as low to the ground as possible.
C-13-A-7 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 PERFORMANCE EVALUATION STATION 2 GRADING SHEET
C-13-A-8 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
C-13-A-9 UNCLASSIFIED
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
TAB B (CORE VALUES) TO APPENDIX 13 (FIELD SKILLS PERFORMANCE EVALUATION STATION 2 AND CORE VALUES) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) CORE VALUES (“Isms”)
WASHINGTON - Commandant of the Marine Corps Gen. Michael Hagee briefs the press in the Pentagon June 7, 2006, on Core Values Training during his recent trip to Iraq.
PURPOSE: At this station, the Drill Instructor leads a discussion on teamwork and the “Isms” that detract from teamwork (i.e. racism, sexism, individualism, etc.) and the “Isms” that promote teamwork (i.e., professionalism, patriotism, etc).
C-13-B-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 CORE VALUES: “ISMs” 45 Min Discussion 1 Drill Instructor ORIENTATION: Upon arrival at this station, the entire Crucible Squad will be seated around their Drill Instructor. The Drill Instructor will lead his recruits in a Core Values Discussion aided by the read-board below. The recruits will rotate events as directed by their Drill Instructor after the completion of this station. 1. COORDINATING INSTRUCTIONS: The following topics are provided as a tool in conducting this Core Values discussion. A. Detrimental “Isms.” (1) Sexism. (a)
(b)
(c)
(2) Racism. (a) (b) (c)
Definition. Discrimination against people on the basis of sex (gender); typically, discrimination against and prejudicial stereotyping of women. Marine Corps Policy. Within the provisions of the law, Marines will be assigned duties regardless of gender and be judged solely on their performance. Examples. Sexist bumper stickers on POVs and tee-shirts, personal comments, posters, dirty magazines in the workplace, etc.
Definition. A doctrine that asserts the superiority of one race over another. Marine Corps Policy. Racism will not be tolerated. Examples. Racist bumper stickers on POVs and tee-shirts, personal comments, etc.
(3) Individualism. (a) Definition. The doctrine that asserts selfinterest is supreme and teamwork is secondary to the individual. (b) Marine Corps Policy. Individualism is contrary to the good order and discipline of the Armed Forces. (c) Examples. Marine’s going UA, disobeying orders, etc.
C-13-B-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 (4) Alcoholism. (a) Definition. Excessive consumption and physiological dependence on alcohol. (b) Marine Corps Policy. Alcoholism is a disease and must be identified and treated. However, alcoholism and/or alcohol abuse can have several adverse affects on performance and lead to violations of the UCMJ that will be dealt with accordingly. (c) Examples. Marine’s being UA, fights, DUIs, sexual assault, domestic violence, drugs, Marine’s being unfit for duty. B. Ask recruits to give their own examples or share personal experiences that describe why Sexism, Racism, Individualism, and/or Alcoholism is counterproductive to teamwork? How can it affect unit success? C. What are some other counterproductive influences that might affect teamwork and mission accomplishment? Probe the recruits for things such as substance abuse, child abuse, hazing, and harassment. D. Beneficial “Isms.” (1) Professionalism. (a) Definition. Professional status, methods, character, or standards. (b) Marine Corps Policy. The Marine Corps is an elite organization and prides itself as being the most professional of all the world’s Armed Forces. (c) Examples. Military Courtesy, Knowledge of MOS Battle Drills, Dress, physical fitness, courage, marksmanship, etc. (2) Patriotism. (a) Definition. Love of and devotion to one’s own country. (b) Marine Corps Policy. The Marine Corps exists to serve the Constitution defined by the citizens of the United States; it prides itself on its patriotism. (c) Examples. Military Courtesy, Knowledge of MOS Battle Drills, Dress, physical fitness, physical and moral courage, marksmanship, etc. E. How does professionalism and patriotism affect the ability of a team to accomplish the task at hand? Can you think of any other beneficial “isms”?
C-13-B-3 UNCLASSIFIED
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
APPENDIX 14 (FIELD SKILLS PERFORMANCE EVALUATION STATION 3) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) LAND NAVIGATION/CAMOUFLAGE, COVER, AND CONCEALMENT (C3)
3(5)250$1&((9$/8$7,2167$7,21
&++XON
52$' & 5 8 & ,% / ( 6 4 '
), ),5(7($0
),5(7($0
$
$
$
$
),5(7($0
),5(7($0
),5(7($0
& 5 8 & ,% / ( 6 4 '
),5(7($0
),5(7($0
',
', ),5(7($0
$
$
$
$
$
$
),5(7($0
),5(7($0
2OG0DFNLH¶V3DVVDJH
C-14-1 UNCLASSIFIED
$ ),5(7($0
$ ),5(7($0
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
PURPOSE: The purpose of this Crucible Event is to evaluate recruits on their ability to 1) apply basic map reading skills and 2) properly camouflage themselves. The specific Marine Corps Common Skills that will be tested at this event are: 1. MCCS 18.03b: Given a military topographic map, lensatic compass, protractor, map pen, and paper, plot a six digit grid coordinate. 2. MCCS 18.03g: Given a list of choices, a military topographic map, lensatic compass, protractor, map pen, and paper, determine a grid azimuth between two points. 3. MCCS 18.03h: Given a list of choices, a military topographic map, lensatic compass, protractor, map pen, and paper, convert a grid azimuth to magnetic azimuth. 4. MCCS 18.03e: Given a list of choices, a military topographic map, lensatic compass, protractor, map pen, and paper, determine straight line distance between two points. 5. MCCS 17.03: Without the aid of the reference, given prescribed equipment, individual weapon, camouflage face paint, burlap or cloth strips, and/or natural vegetation, camouflage self and equipment.
C-14-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
LAND NAVIGATION/CAMOUFLAGE, COVER, AND CONCEALMENT (C3) 5 Min to Brief/Demo 30 Min LandNav PE 10 Min C3 PE 2 Drill Instructors 1 Field Instructor
OVERVIEW: This station is divided into two performance evaluations (PEs): 1) Land Navigation and 2) Camouflage, Cover, and Concealment. Upon arrival at this station, the two Crucible Squads will be given a quick orientation to skills evaluated at this event. Once this is done, fire teams will cycle through each of the two PEs at this station and report their GO/NO GO to the Field Instructor after each PE. The Field Instructor will record the results of the performance evaluations and ensure the integrity and uniformity of the testing at this station. After completion of this station is recorded, the Crucible Squads will be released to the next event. 1. OPERATIONAL GRAPHIC. See title page. 2.
EQUIPMENT. A. The Field Instructor at each PE station shall maintain a grading sheet (see below) for each squad and turn the sheets in to the Chief Instructor at the conclusion of the Crucible. B. The Field Instructor at this PE station shall maintain 12 map boards, 12 laminated blank mock card/PE Sheets, one laminated answer sheet to the mock card, 12 protractors, 1 evaluation sheet per squad, 12 serviceable map pens, one laminated copy of this appendix, and an alcohol bottle with rags to sanitize the mock cards. C. Recruits must arrive at this station with their camouflage face paint. D. Burlap or cloth strips for camouflaging helmets and equipment will be provided by the Field Instructor and collected back up before recruits leave this PE Station.
3. PE: LAND NAVIGATION. A.
After the orientation, the Fire Team Leaders from both Crucible Squads shall be give a map board, map pen, protractor, and blank laminated “mock” card. The team leaders will then return to their teams and work with their teammates to fill out the cards correctly. The
C-14-3 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
Team Leader will put his name on the card as well as his Fire Team Number and Crucible Squad Number. B.
After 30 minutes, the Field Instructor shall collect all of the cards and have the recruits apply their camouflage to their faces by buddy team. The Drill Instructors will have the fire teams apply each of the three camouflage techniques (i.e. striping, blotching, or combination). While the recruits are applying their face paint, the Field Instructor shall grade the mock cards.
C.
The fire team must correctly answer 13 of 17 Land Navigation Problems to receive a “GO” on the fire team score card (5 of 5 for plotting, 2 of 4 for grid azimuth, 2 of 4 for converting a grid azimuth to a magnetic azimuth, and 4 of 4 for determining straight line distance between two points). If after answering all 17 questions, a fire team still has not answered at least 13 of them correctly, the team will be given a NOGO at this station. As a penalty, fire teams that receive a NO GO will have to conduct a 200-meter casualty evacuation drill as designated by the Drill Instructor (i.e. fireman carries by buddy teams) as time permits.
5. PE: CAMOUFLAGE, COVER, AND CONCEALMENT. A. After 30 minutes for the Land Navigation PE, the DIs will have the fire teams demonstrate the three types of camouflage. Each Team must successfully demonstrate at least two of the three camouflage techniques correctly to receive a GO at this station (i.e. striping, blotching, or combination). B. Performance steps. The following pictures/description illustrate the standard for each of the three techniques: 1. Striping
C-14-4 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
2. Blotching
3. Combination of both striping and blotching. Shadow areas of the face should be light colors, i.e. eyes, lips. Prominent areas of the face should be dark colors. Make sure that lips, eyes, ears, hands, back of head and neck are properly camouflaged.
C-14-5 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
PERFORMANCE EVALUATION STATION 3 GRADING SHEET
3(5)250$1&((9$/8$7,2167$7,21 648$'BBBBBBBBBBBBB 70/'5
/$1'1$9,*$7,21
),5(70 3/27 3/27 3/27 3/27 3/27 675,3,1*
%/27&+,1*
*5,' *5,' *5,' *5,' 0$*$= 0$*$= 0$* 0$* ',67 $= $= $= $= $= $=
&$028)/$*(&29(5$1'&21&($/0(17 2) &20%,1$7,21 *2 12*2
67$7,21727$/6*212*2 3$66,1* 2)3266,%/(*2V 70/'5
),5( 70
*212*2
C-14-6 UNCLASSIFIED
',67
',67
',67
2) *212*2
FOURTH POINT (6 DIGIT GRID) FOURTH TERRAIN FEATURE GRID AZIMUTH TO NEXT POINT MAG AZIMUTH ("LARS" RULE) DISTANCE TO NEXT POINT PACE COUNT (DIST/100*PACE) CATCHING FEATURE
START POINT (6 DIGIT GRID) FIRST TERRAIN FEATURE GRID AZIMUTH TO NEXT POINT MAG AZIMUTH ("LARS" RULE) DISTANCE TO NEXT POINT PACE COUNT (DIST/100*PACE) CATCHING FEATURE
PE 3/MOCK ROUTE CARD
625800
NA
631805
Team Leader
LAST POINT (6 DIGIT GRID) FOURTH TERRAIN FEATURE GRID AZIMUTH TO NEXT POINT MAG AZIMUTH ("LARS" RULE) DISTANCE TO NEXT POINT PACE COUNT (DIST/100*PACE) CATCHING FEATURE
SECOND POINT (6 DIGIT GRID) SECOND TERRAIN FEATURE GRID AZIMUTH TO NEXT POINT MAG AZIMUTH ("LARS" RULE) DISTANCE TO NEXT POINT PACE COUNT (DIST/100*PACE) CATCHING FEATURE
________ SQD # ________
NA NA NA NA
633795
624805
Team_______ THIRD POINT (6 DIGIT GRID) THIRD TERRAIN FEATURE GRID AZIMUTH TO NEXT POINT MAG AZIMUTH ("LARS" RULE) DISTANCE TO NEXT POINT PACE COUNT (DIST/100*PACE) CATCHING FEATURE
C-14-7
623802
CATCHING FEATURE
PACE COUNT (DIST/100*PACE)
Ravine
NA CATCHING FEATURE
PACE COUNT (DIST/100*PACE)
DISTANCE TO NEXT POINT
MAG AZIMUTH ("LARS" RULE)
109
MAG AZIMUTH ("LARS" RULE)
944m
GRID AZIMUTH TO NEXT POINT
123
GRID AZIMUTH TO NEXT POINT
DISTANCE TO NEXT POINT
FOURTH TERRAIN FEATURE
LAST POINT (6 DIGIT GRID)
625800 East Side of Hill Top
CATCHING FEATURE
PACE COUNT (DIST/100*PACE)
FOURTH TERRAIN FEATURE
NA
FOURTH POINT (6 DIGIT GRID)
CATCHING FEATURE
PACE COUNT (DIST/100*PACE)
NA
MAG AZIMUTH ("LARS" RULE)
256
MAG AZIMUTH ("LARS" RULE) DISTANCE TO NEXT POINT
GRID AZIMUTH TO NEXT POINT
270
GRID AZIMUTH TO NEXT POINT
700m
SECOND TERRAIN FEATURE
DISTANCE TO NEXT POINT
SECOND POINT (6 DIGIT GRID)
631805
Team #
Gentle Top of Finger
________
FIRST TERRAIN FEATURE
Team Leader __________________SQD #
START POINT (6 DIGIT GRID)
PE 3/MOCK ROUTE ANSWER SHEET
Two Small Hill Tops
NA
NA
NA
NA
South Side of Hill Top
633795
Trail/100m North
NA
317m
185
199
Side of Small Hill Top
624805
_________
CATCHING FEATURE
PACE COUNT (DIST/100*PACE)
DISTANCE TO NEXT POINT
MAG AZIMUTH ("LARS" RULE)
GRID AZIMUTH TO NEXT POINT
THIRD TERRAIN FEATURE
THIRD POINT (6 DIGIT GRID)
Steep Hill
NA
283m
122
136
South Side of Interment Stream
623802
C-14-8
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 APPENDIX 15 (NOONAN’S CASUALTY EVACUATION & JENKINS’S PINNACLE) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIGEO CRUCIBLE SOP (U)
1. (U) Purpose. The purpose of this document is to provide specific guidance on the conduct of Noonan’s Casualty Evacuation and Jenkins’s Pinnacle. 2. (U) General. Crucible Event 15 is comprised of two substations, Noonan’s Casualty Evacuation and Jenkins’s Pinnacle. Upon arrival at this event, if two Crucible Squads are traveling together, the first Crucible Squad will conduct Noonan’s Casualty Evacuation while the second Crucible Squad detaches and conducts Jenkins’s Pinnacle. The two squads will then rotate these stations after the allotted time for each station has expired. See Tabs A and B to this appendix for specific instructions on each station. Tabs: a. Noonan’s Casualty Evacuation b. Jenkins’s Pinnacle
R. B. RICHARDSON Major, U. S. Marine Corps Commanding
C-15-1 UNCALSSIFIED
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 TAB A (NOONAN’S CASUALTY EVACUATION) TO APPENDIX 15 (NOONAN’S CASUALTY EVACUATION & JENKINS’S PINNACLE) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U)
NOONAN’S CASUALTY EVACUATION
PURPOSE: This station reinforces teamwork, first aid skills, litters, and fire team formations as recruits work together to save a simulated casualty and evacuate him to safety. Further, this station instills the concept that a Marine never leaves a fellow Marine on the battlefield and that he cares for the wounded, friend or foe, once the objective is secured.
C-15-A-1 UNCALSSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
LANCE CORPORAL THOMAS P. NOONAN JR. UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS * * * * * MEDAL OF HONOR CITATION For conspicuous gallantry and intrepidity at the risk of his life above and beyond the call of duty while serving as a Fire Team Leader with Company G, Second Battalion, Ninth Marines, Third Marine Division, in operations against the enemy in Quang Tri Province in the Republic of Vietnam. On 5 February 1969, Company G was directed to move from a position, which they had been holding southeast of the Vandergrift Combat Base in A Shau Valley to an alternate location. As the Marines commenced a slow and difficult descent down the side of the hill made extremely slippery by the heavy rains, the leading element came under a heavy fire from a North Vietnamese Army unit occupying wellconcealed positions in the rocky terrain. Four men were wounded, and repeated attempts to recover them failed because of the intense hostile fire. Lance Corporal Noonan moved from his position of relative security and, maneuvering down the treacherous slope to a location near the injured men, took cover behind some rocks. Shouting words of encouragement to the wounded men to restore their confidence, he dashed across the hazardous terrain and commenced dragging the most seriously wounded man away from the fire-swept area. Although wounded and knocked to the ground by an enemy round, Lance Corporal Noonan recovered rapidly and resumed dragging the man toward the marginal security of a rock. He was, however, mortally wounded before he could reach his destination. His heroic actions inspired his fellow Marines to such aggressiveness that they initiated a spirited assault, which forced the enemy soldiers to withdraw. Lance Corporal Noonan's indomitable courage, inspiring initiative and selfless devotion to duty upheld the highest C-15-A-2 UNCALSSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 traditions of the Marine Corps and the United States Service. He gallantly gave his life for his country.
Naval
LCpl Thomas T. Noonan Medal of Honor (Posthumously Awarded) UNIT: G CO, 2nd BN, 9th Mar, 3rd MARDIV PLACE: Quang Tri Province, Vietnam DATE: 5 Feb. 1969 - Noonan's unit was directed to move to an alternate location down the side of a steep and slippery hillside. - The lead unit of Noonan's company came under heavy fire from an NVA unit well concealed in the rocky terrain. - Four men were wounded and the Marines couldn't recover them due to hostile enemy fire. - Noonan shouted words of encouragement to the wounded men and dashed across the hazardous terrain and began dragging the most seriously wounded to safety. - Noonan took an enemy round and was knocked to the ground. He continued to try to drag his fellow Marine's to safety. - He didn't make his destination, he died. His actions inspired his fellow Marines to initiate a spirited assault that forced the enemy to withdraw. QUESTIONS: 1. What inspired LCpl Noonan's courageousness and fearlessness? 2. Why would a Marine go to the aid of his comrades when he himself is injured? 3. Where does an injured Marine on the battlefield find the inner-strength to continue to fight?
C-15-A-3 UNCALSSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 NOONAN'S CASUALTY EVACUATION: 5 5 20 5
Min Min Min Min
Guided Discussion Brief Exercise to Critique
1 Drill Instructor OVERVIEW: Upon arrival at this station, recruits will form a school circle and a Drill Instructor will read the Medal of Honor citation for this station. Next, the Drill Instructor will brief the station to the recruits. After the brief (below), the Drill Instructor will assign one casualty for every other fire team and start the recruits on the loop trail. Five minutes before recruits are scheduled to rotate stations—or upon successful completion of this station, whichever occurs first—the Drill Instructor will conduct a critique of the recruits’ performance with the entire Crucible Squad. After the critique, the Crucible Squad will be released to the next station. 1. SITUATION: Your Crucible Squad has just defeated the enemy in a vicious firefight; you need to move friendly and enemy casualties to the landing zone for a medical evacuation by helicopter. The helicopter will be at the landing zone in 35 minutes. 2. MISSION:
EVACUATE THE CASUALTIES TO THE LANDING ZONE.
3. EQUIPMENT: You will wear your helmet, LBV, and carry your service rifle cross body muzzle down AWAY from the casualty. If you are providing security, you will carry your weapon properly with the three-point patrol sling or at the ALERT (Condition 3) if you do not have a three-point sling. You have the following equipment: 1 - Field Litter every other fire team (minimum of three litters) 1 - Flak Jacket per casualty (minimum of three jackets) 1 – Bag of medical supplies per casualty (minimum of three serviceable medical kits) 4. COORDINATING INSTRUCTIONS: a. This station will be conducted using your permanent fire teams (as required to be assigned by SDIs NLT T-17 IAW Chapter 12 of the recruit training SOP). b. One casualty will be assessed for every other fire team. The Drill Instructor will specify the type of wound sustained by the casualty and supervise the recruits as they apply the C-15-A-4 UNCALSSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 proper first aid procedures, as outline in their recruit knowledge, before evacuating the patient. c. All of your gear, including your rifle, must stay with you at all times. When assisting a casualty, weapons will be cross-body muzzle down facing away from the casualty’s head. d. The casualty will wear a helmet and flak jacket but his weapon can be carried by any recruit in his own fire team. e. The casualty’s feet will be pointing in the direction of travel. f. Team members will not run. g. Team members will lift with their legs, not with their backs when lifting the litter or setting it down. h. The casualty will not be carried on the shoulders, but at arms length. i. For safety purposes, your Drill Instructor will walk with you during this evolution. j. Since there is only one casualty per every other fire team (1 per 8 recruits) the recruits not carrying the litter will provide security. The litter team and the security fire team will maintain tactical integrity. The fire team providing security should use maximum dispersion and apply the most suitable tactical formation appropriate for the terrain. k. Safety is paramount. Are there any questions?
5. AFTER ACTION REVIEW: a. ESTABLISH WHAT HAPPENED (1) Did the recruits correctly apply the four life saving steps and first aid procedures for the given injury? (2) Did the fire team leaders work together to accomplish the mission? Or did everyman do his own thing? Why is leadership important when carrying out difficult tasks? (3)
Did the plan change?
Why or Why not?
(4)
Was the mission accomplished? Why or Why not?
C-15-A-5 UNCALSSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 (5) What did the team learn about casualty evacuations? Do you think that casualty evacuation exercises should be rehearsed in the operating forces? Is this realistic training? b. DETERMINE WHAT WAS RIGHT AND WRONG WITH WHAT HAPPENED (1) Did recruits use dispersion and appropriate fire team formations given the terrain while providing security? (2)
What went right with the plan?
(3)
What was wrong with the plan?
(4)
How did the team adjust the plan?
(5) What did the team learn from the right and wrong aspects of the plan? c. DETERMINE HOW THE TASK SHOULD BE DONE DIFFERENTLY NEXT TIME (1) What would you do differently, if you were to do this obstacle again? d. VALUES TO BE REINFORCED AFTER THE EVENT IS COMPLETED: (1) Why is it important to care for the wounded, friend and foe? (2) If the recruits complete this event successfully, reinforce the following values: That it took trust, teamwork, unselfish (3) Toughness, endurance, camaraderie, commitment, discipline, coordination, cooperation, and planning to transport casualties to safety. When transporting the wounded, whether injured in battle or in field training, the evacuation must be accomplished in the safest and most expedient manner so that medical attention to the victim can be rendered quickly. (4) If the recruits do not complete this event successfully the values that you should emphasize that every effort should be made to quickly transport the injured to safety and receive medical attention once the objective is secured. If this is not possible, then the injured should be transported out of harm's way, when possible. First aid should be rendered to the victim by fellow Marines only after securing the objective; otherwise more casualties are likely to result.
C-15-A-6 UNCALSSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
C-15-A-7 UNCALSSIFIED
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 TAB B (JENKINS’S PINNACLE)) TO APPENDIX 15 (NOONAN’S CASUALTY EVACUATION & JENKINS’S PINNACLE) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) JENKINS’S PINNACLE
PURPOSE: This station is made up of two parallel beams suspended by cables; the beams are similar to the two bottom rungs of a ladder. The mission is for the fire teams to move all personnel and equipment from one side of the obstacle, over the top beam, to the other side in a time limit of 45 minutes. This obstacle instills teamwork and provides an opportunity for recruits to show individual initiative to assist the unit in completing its assigned mission.
C-15-B-1 UNCALSSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
PRIVATE FIRST CLASS ROBERT H. JENKINS, JR. UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS * * * * * MOH CITATION For conspicuous gallantry and intrepidity at the risk of his life above and beyond the call of duty while serving as a Machine Gunner with Company C, Third Reconnaissance Battalion, Third Marine Division in connection with operations against enemy forces in the Republic of Vietnam. Early on the morning of 5 March 1969, Private First Class Jenkins' twelve-man reconnaissance team was occupying a defensive position at Fire Support Base Argonne south of the Demilitarized Zone. Suddenly, the Marines were assaulted by a North Vietnamese Army platoon employing mortars, automatic weapons, and hand grenades. Reacting instantly, Private First Class Jenkins and another Marine quickly moved into a two-man fighting emplacement, and as they boldly delivered accurate machine gun fire against the enemy, a North Vietnamese soldier threw a hand grenade into the friendly emplacement. Fully realizing the inevitable results of his actions, Private First Class Jenkins quickly seized his comrade, and pushing the man to the ground, he leaped on top of the Marine to shield him from the explosion. Absorbing the full impact of the detonation, Private First Class Jenkins was seriously injured and subsequently succumbed to his wounds. His courage, inspiring valor and selfless devotion to duty saved a fellow Marine from serious injury or possible death and upheld the highest traditions of the Marine Corps and the United States Naval Service. He gallantly gave his life for his country.
C-15-B-2 UNCALSSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 PFC ROBERT H. JENKINS, JR. Medal of Honor (Posthumously Awarded) DATE: 5 March, 1969 PLACE: Fire Support Base Argonne, Vietnam UNIT: Co. "C", 3rd Recon. Bn., 3rd MarDiv. - PFC Jenkins was a machine gunner with a 12-man recon team occupying a defensive position. - They were suddenly assaulted by an NVA platoon employing mortars, automatic weapons, and grenades. - Jenkins and another Marine quickly moved into a 2-man fighting hole. - As they boldly delivered accurate machine gun fire, an NVA soldier threw a hand grenade into their emplacement. - Jenkins leaped on top of his fellow Marine, thus shielding him from the explosion. - Jenkins had absorbed the full impact of the blast and later died of his wounds. - PFC Jenkins had served in the Marine Corps only 13 months before he was awarded the Congressional Medal of Honor. PRIVATE FIRST CLASS JENKINS' PINNACLE QUESTIONS: 1. He had been in the Marine Corps for just over one year. Why did PFC Jenkins' perform such a selfless act? 2. Do you think there was a special bond between PFC Jenkins' and the Marine he saved, or would Jenkins have done this for any Marine? 3. What were PFC Jenkins' other options he could have taken?
C-15-B-3 UNCALSSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 JENKINS PINNACLE 5 5 20 5
Min Min Min Min
to Brief Guided Discussion to Execute to Critique
1 Drill Instructor OVERVIEW: Upon arrival at this station, recruits will form a school circle and a Drill Instructor will brief the station to the recruit Fire Team Leaders. After the brief (below), the Drill Instructor will assign two recruits to be spotters; the DI will also demonstrate the proper chairman carrier. If the recruits have no questions they may start the course. Five minutes before recruits are scheduled to rotate stations—or upon successful completion of this station, whichever occurs first—the Drill Instructor will conduct a critique of the recruits’ performance with the entire Crucible Squad. After the critique, the Crucible Squad will be released to the next station. 1. SITUATION: During an amphibious assault, your boat ran aground on a sand bar just short of the beach. The water is too deep to exit over the sides of the boat, but to the front, the water is waist deep. A Marine has constructed a makeshift ladder using barbed wire, wood, and the knots he learned in boot camp to scale the front of the boat. You have the extra ammunition for your platoon's assault on the beach. 2. MISSION: CLIMB OVER THE FRONT OF THE BOAT USING THE HASTILY CONSTRUCTED LADDER AND SUPPLY YOUR PLATOON WITH AMMUNITION FOR THE ASSAULT.
3. EQUIPMENT: You will wear your helmet, LBV and pass your service rifle (Condition 3) over the obstacle. You have the following equipment: C-15-B-4 UNCALSSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
4 - Ammunition Cans per Crucible Squad 4. COORDINATING INSTRUCTIONS: a. Recruits on the ground may not steady the beam or other recruits on the beams.
b. Two spotters will be placed on each side of the obstacle and will be prepared to catch any falling recruit. These spotters will stack their weapons (Condition 4). c. Do not use the cables (the barbed wire) or you will become a casualty. d. Do not jump off the obstacle. e. All recruits and equipment must go over the top beam. f. Do not use the up-right poles. g. No more than two recruits on the obstacle at any time. h. Do not throw or drop the ammo cans; pass them over the obstacle. i. If you do become a casualty, you will conduct a Casualty Evacuation Exercise, consisting of a Two-man Chair Carry to an “Aid Station” determined by your Drill Instructor in the time remaining for your Crucible Squad to complete the obstacle. j. Safety is paramount. k. You are in the water, this is a non-tactical problem.
Are there any questions? 5. AFTER ACTION REVIEW: Choose from the questions below. a. Courage C-15-B-5 UNCALSSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
(1) How did you feel when you crossed over the top plank? (2) How do you imagine PFC Jenkins felt when he leaped upon his fellow Marine to protect him from the enemy grenade? (3) What attribute did both you and PFC Jenkins demonstrate by your actions? b. Miscellaneous (1) Did somebody take charge of the Crucible Squad? did he show courage/initiative?
How
(2) Did teamwork affect the outcome of the mission? did each recruit show courage/initiative?
How
(3) What was your commitment to the Crucible Squad? that important?
Why is
(4) Did communication within the Crucible Squad affect the outcome of the mission? (5) Why is it important to know the abilities of teammates? (6) Did your physical conditioning have an effect on the outcome of the mission? How does it relate to combat?
C-15-B-6 UNCALSSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
C-15-B-7 UNCALSSIFIED
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNCLASSIFIED
P1513.8 APPENDIX 16 (TWELVE STALL & CORE VALUES) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIGEO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) 1. (U) Purpose. The purpose of this document is to provide specific guidance on the conduct of the Twelve Stall, Core Values and Medical Check events. 2. (U) General. Crucible Event 16 a three-hour exercise and is comprised of two sub-stations: the Twelve Stall Leadership Reaction Course and a Core Values discussion. There are eleven leadership reaction problems and one foot/medical check that are each allotted 20 minutes for completion. The Core Values discussion is allotted 25 minutes for completion. (This threehour event allots five minutes of administrative time.) Thus, each recruit will be expected to complete a minimum of seven leadership reaction problems to include the Foot/Medical Check in Stall 1 as well as the Core Values discussion before moving on to the next event. It is understood that some teams will be faster at solving the leadership reaction problems than others. As time and space allow, Drill Instructors may have their Crucible Squads perform more than this minimum requirement. See Tabs A and B to this appendix for specific instructions on each station. 3. (U) Concept of Operations. Crucible Squads will arrive at the Twelve Stall Leadership Reaction Course in pairs. Each Crucible Squad will be broken down into two groups while maintaining fire team integrity. During the leadership reaction problems, any recruit from the fire team may be designated to lead a specific problem at the recruit trainer’s discretion. These groups will then rotate between each stall and the Core Values discussion in accordance with the timeline provide to Drill Instructors in Appendix 23 (Crucible Squad Route Cards) to Annex C of the Crucible SOP. 4. (U) Equipment. All the problems can be solved with the equipment provided and within the time allowed. Individual 782 gear shall not be used in solving problems. All of the individual equipment, especially weapons, must be accounted for before recruits move to the next problem. 5. (U) Safety. There is no reason to take unnecessary risks. Safety should be the first and foremost concern in everyone’s minds. a. Equipment, especially rifles, will not be thrown, nor will recruits be allowed to jump to or from any obstacles with their rifles. Teams must maintain control of their weapons at all times while on the reaction course—they are not allowed to stack their rifles in order to work. If recruits have any
C-16-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
P1513.8 doubts as to what they may do, they will be encouraged to ask an instructor. b. Helmets must be worn and buckled at all times. c. When applicable, flack jackets will be worn and fastened at all times. 6. (U) Recruit Supervision. Per Annex A, there will be at least one Field Instructor to assist the Drill Instructor Leadership with the proper and safe execution of leadership reaction problems. This Field Instructor will ensure that all “read boards” and a copy of this SOP in on hand and that all obstacles are in good repair. He will report any equipment discrepancies via his chain of command. The Field Instructor and Drill Instructors will supervise the conduct of the reaction course from the catwalk, being constantly alert for hazards and any dangerous courses of action that the recruits may take. The Drill Instructors will designate leaders for each stall and ensure that the designated recruit leaders read the scenarios to their teammates. Additionally, at least one corpsman will conduct the foot/medical checks in the first stall. Tabs: a. Twelve Stall Leadership Reaction Course b. Core Values c. Operational Risk Management Assessment for the 12 Stall
R. B. RICHARDSON Major, U. S. Marine Corps Commanding
C-16-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
P1513.8 TAB A (TWELVE STALL) APPENDIX 16 (TWELVE STALL & CORE VALUES) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIGEO CRUCIBLE SOP (U)
PURPOSE.
The Leadership Reaction Course provides recruits the opportunity to develop leadership and communications skills as they work together with their teammates to solve challenging problems. This station also provides a Core Values discussion and ensures that recruits are healthy and medically prepared to continue Crucible training. This tab will provide specific instructions for the conduct of each of these stalls.
C-16-A-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
P1513.8 STALL 1 FOOT/MEDICAL CHECK 20 Min Exercise 1 Corpsman OVERVIEW: Upon arrival at this station, recruits will sit down in a circle and take their boots and socks off. The corpsman will then check for foot injuries or any other medical problem. Five minutes before recruits are scheduled to rotate, they will put their socks and boots back on. 1. COORDINATING INSTRUCTIONS: The corpsman will brief the recruits to be alert for the following foot injuries. Next, he will personally check their feet and while quickly evaluating each recruit for medical problems (e.g. heat or cold injuries). a. INGROWN TOENAIL: Prevention of ingrown toenails. Ensure that you cut your toenail correctly i.e. 1/8th of an inch past nail bed and straight not curved like fingernails. In case you notice the beginning of an ingrown toenail, GENTLY pry nail loose from nail bed without breaking the skin. If condition persists or when in doubt, see the Corpsman. b. CELLULITIS: The easiest prevention is cleanliness. You are looking for what seems to be a pimple below the skin and an inflamed (red and warm) area around the spot. c. BLISTERS/FOOT INJURIES: Blisters quarter size or larger will be treated by the corpsman, mole skin will be applied if needed. Foot injuries will be evaluated by the corpsman. d. Recruits will keep feet dry and clean as much as possible, ensure socks are changed and use foot powder. Drill Instructors will ensure recruits see the corpsman immediately if a situation demands immediate attention. Ref:
Annex H (Medical) to the Crucible SOP
C-16-A-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
P1513.8 REACTION COURSE PROBLEM #1 (STALL 2) 5 Min Brief 15 Min Exercise 2 Drill Instructors 1 Field Instructor ORIENTATION: Upon arrival at this station, Crucible Squads are broken into two groups by their organic fire teams (the two groups do not need to be even). The Drill Instructor will then designate the recruit leaders for each reaction problem and send the teams to their respective stalls. At each stall, the recruit leader will get a “read-board” from the designated box, brief his teammates, and then execute the mission. The recruits will rotate stalls as directed by their Drill Instructors. 1. SITUATION: Your squad was on its way to get a 55-gallon drum to transport much needed fuel. Along the way, you came under enemy fire and one of your teammates became a casualty. While carrying the casualty back to the BAS, you discovered the enemy has partially destroyed the bridge between you and your destination. 2.
MISSION:
CARRY THE CASUALTY ACROSS AND RETURN WITH THE DRUM.
3.
COORDINATING INSTRUCTIONS:
a. There will be one spotter on each side of the bridge during the time the casualty is being carried across. b. The casualty and the team members carrying him will pass their rifles off to be carried by fellow teammates. c. At NO time will recruits tie the casualty to another teammate or any other piece of gear. d. If gear touches the ground or red area, then that gear is eliminated from the problem. If a teammate touches the ground or red area, then that recruit is a casualty. If you do become a casualty, you will conduct a Casualty Evacuation Exercise, which will consist of evacuating a dummy to an “Aid Station” designated by your Drill Instructor in the time remaining for your group to execute the mission. Rejoin your group upon completion of the evacuation. 4. EQUIPMENT: You will wear your helmet, LBV, and sling your service rifle cross-body, muzzle down (Condition 3) or pass as needed. You have the following equipment: 1 – 55-gallon drum 1 – 8-foot rope
C-16-A-3 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
P1513.8 REACTION COURSE PROBLEM #2 (STALL 3) 5 Min Brief 15 Min Exercise 2 Drill Instructors 1 Field Instructor ORIENTATION: Upon arrival at this station, Crucible Squads are broken into two groups by their organic fire teams (the two groups do not need to be even). The Drill Instructor will then designate the recruit leaders for each reaction problem and send the teams to their respective stalls. At each stall, the recruit leader will get a “read-board” from the designated box, brief his teammates, and then execute the mission. The recruits will rotate stalls as directed by their Drill Instructors. 1. SITUATION: Your platoon has a flat tire and your group of recruits is tasked with brining the new tire to the platoon. You have the spare tire but discover that in between you and your platoon is a minefield. The enemy has booby-trapped the entire obstacle except for the top crossbar. Enemy units have been spotted in the area all day. 2.
MISSION:
DELIVER THE SPARE TIRE TO YOUR PLATOON.
3.
COORDINATING INSTRUCTIONS: a. If gear touches the red area, then that piece of gear is eliminated from the problem. b. All squad members and gear must pass over the bottom rope; service rifles will be passed butt-stock first. c. The area between the designated points on the ground represents the minefield and must be avoided. d. Do not drop or throw any of the equipment. e. If a teammate touches any red area, then that recruit becomes a casualty. That recruit will conduct a Casualty Evacuation Exercise, which will consist of dragging a dummy to an “Aid Station” as designated by a Drill Instructor located 150 meters away. Rejoin your group upon completion of the evacuation.
C-16-A-4 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
P1513.8 4. EQUIPMENT: You will wear your helmet, LBV, and carry or pass your service rifle (Condition 3) as needed. You have the following equipment: 1 - Tire 1 - 6-Foot Rope 1 – 12-Foot Rope
C-16-A-5 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
P1513.8 REACTION COURSE PROBLEM #3 (STALL 4) 5 Min Brief 15 Min Exercise 2 Drill Instructors 1 Field Instructor ORIENTATION: Upon arrival at this station, Crucible Squads are broken into two groups by their organic fire teams (the two groups do not need to be even). The Drill Instructor will then designate the recruit leaders for each reaction problem and send the teams to their respective stalls. At each stall, the recruit leader will get a “readboard” from the designated box, brief his teammates, and then execute the mission. The recruits will rotate stalls as directed by their Drill Instructors. 1. SITUATION: Your Company is presently conducting a refueling operation. Your platoon was tasked with several equipment retrieval missions, and this group of teams was tasked with locating and retrieving a container for fuel. During the patrol back to the company area with the fuel container, your group is forced to cross over a river. There are remnants of an old bridge and two steel poles in the area, which may be used to help in crossing the river. 2.
MISSION: CROSS THE RIVER WITH ALL PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT.
3.
COORDINATING INSTRUCTIONS:
d. The pipe will be placed against the inside of the start point boundary; however, it must remain in contact with the board or it will be eliminated from the problem.
e. Do not jump from the bridge. f. All recruits must go through the obstacle. g. If gear touches the ground or red area, then that gear is eliminated from the problem. If a teammate touches the ground or any red area, then that recruit becomes a casualty. That recruit will conduct a Casualty Evacuation Exercise, which will consist of dragging a dummy to an “Aid Station” designated by a Drill Instructor located 150 meters away. Rejoin your group upon completion of the evacuation.
4. EQUIPMENT: You will wear your helmet, LBV, and maintain control of your service rifle (Condition 3). You have the following equipment: 1 - Rope 8' Long 1 - 55-gallon drum 1 - Pipe on each side of the river
C-16-A-6 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
P1513.8 REACTION COURSE PROBLEM #4 (STALL 5) 5 Min Brief 15 Min Exercise 2 Drill Instructors 1 Field Instructor ORIENTATION: Upon arrival at this station, Crucible Squads are broken into two groups by their organic fire teams (the two groups do not need to be even). The Drill Instructor will then designate the recruit leaders for each reaction problem and send the teams to their respective stalls. At each stall, the recruit leader will get a “readboard” from the designated box, brief his teammates, and then execute the mission. The recruits will rotate stalls as directed by their Drill Instructors. 1. SITUATION: Your have been tasked to deliver explosives to an engineer platoon. While in route, you have run into a large mine field that you cannot go around. There is a wall in the center of the minefield, which allows safe passage through. Enemy patrols check the minefield about every 20 minutes. 2.
MISSION: DELIVER THE EXPLOSIVES TO THE ENGINEER PLATOON.
3.
COORDINATING INSTRUCTIONS: a. For security reasons, take everything with you, including the ladder. b. All squad members must cross over the obstacle. c. A Ladder will be placed on the inside of the railroad tie at the start point. d. No gear or personnel will be in EITHER SIDE of the minefield. not jump off the wall.
Do
e. If gear touches the ground or red area, then that gear is eliminated from the problem. If a teammate touches the ground or any red area, then that recruit becomes a casualty. That recruit will conduct a Casualty Evacuation Exercise, which will consist of dragging a dummy to an “Aid Station” designated by a Drill Instructor located 150 meters away. Rejoin your group upon completion of the evacuation. 4.
EQUIPMENT:
You will wear your helmet, LBV, and maintain control of your service rifle (Condition 3). You have the following equipment: 1 - 12-Foot Ladder 1 - Explosives box 1 – 12-Foot Rope
C-16-A-7 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
P1513.8 REACTION COURSE PROBLEM #5 (STALL 6) 5 Min Brief 15 Min Exercise 2 Drill Instructors 1 Field Instructor ORIENTATION: Upon arrival at this station, Crucible Squads are broken into two groups by their organic fire teams (the two groups do not need to be even). The Drill Instructor will then designate the recruit leaders for each reaction problem and send the teams to their respective stalls. At each stall, the recruit leader will get a “read-board” from the designated box, brief his teammates, and then execute the mission. The recruits will rotate stalls as directed by their Drill Instructors. 1. SITUATION: You are tasked to deliver vital medical supplies to the injured members of your platoon. On the way, you run into a dangerously swift river. This morning, the enemy blew up the bridge. Some of the explosives used failed to detonate, leaving part of the bridge intact. The enemy is still operating in this area. 2.
MISSION: DELIVER THE MEDICAL SUPPLIES.
3.
COORDINATING INSTRUCTIONS: a. Do not walk, stand or kneel in the center of another squad member’s back. b. The medical supplies you are carrying must be handled carefully, and will not be rested on another squad member. c. For security reasons, all recruits and gear must cross the river. d. If gear touches the ground or red area, then that gear is eliminated from the problem. If a teammate touches the ground or any red area, then that recruit becomes a casualty. That recruit will conduct a Casualty Evacuation Exercise, which will consist of dragging a dummy to an “Aid Station” designated by a Drill Instructor located 150 meters away. Rejoin your group upon completion of the evacuation.
4.
EQUIPMENT:
You will wear your helmet, LBV, and maintain control of your service rifle (Condition 3). You have the following equipment: 1 - Plank 2"x8"x8' 1 - Box of Medical Supplies
C-16-A-8 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
P1513.8 REACTION COURSE PROBLEM #6 (STALL 7) 5 Min Brief 15 Min Exercise 2 Drill Instructors 1 Field Instructor ORIENTATION: Upon arrival at this station, Crucible Squads are broken into two groups by their organic fire teams (the two groups do not need to be even). The Drill Instructor will then designate the recruit leaders for each reaction problem and send the teams to their respective stalls. At each stall, the recruit leader will get a “read-board” from the designated box, brief his teammates, and then execute the mission. The recruits will rotate stalls as directed by their Drill Instructors. 1. SITUATION: Immediately ahead is an enemy communications station. A double fence surrounds the station. The next enemy patrol is expected to pass through this area in about 20 minutes. You have one explosive charge. Your unit is ready to attack the enemy’s main force. 2. MISSION: POINT. 3.
DESTROY THE STATION AND RETURN TO THE STARTING
COORDINATING INSTRUCTIONS: a. The explosives must be handled with care. b. Recruits will not be thrown or jump over the obstacle. c. Only two recruits will enter the compound, which is the red, wooden structure itself. d. The long sides of the wooden structure represents the double fence. You may not walk around the sides. e. The communications station is on the inside of the compound as you look into the stall. f. The red area represents an electrified fence. If gear touches the red area, then that gear is eliminated from the problem. If a teammate touches the ground or any red area, then that recruit becomes a casualty. That recruit will conduct a Casualty Evacuation Exercise, which will consist of dragging a dummy to an “Aid Station” designated by a Drill Instructor located 150 meters away. Rejoin your group upon completion of the evacuation.
C-16-A-9 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
P1513.8 4.
EQUIPMENT:
You will wear your, helmet, LBV, and maintain control of your service rifle (Condition 3). You have the following equipment: 2 1 2 1
– – – -
12-Foot Wooden Logs 10-Foot Metal Pipe 10-Foot Ropes Explosive Charge
C-16-A-10 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
P1513.8 REACTION COURSE PROBLEM #7 (STALL 8) 5 Min Brief 15 Min Exercise 2 Drill Instructors 1 Field Instructor ORIENTATION: Upon arrival at this station, Crucible Squads are broken into two groups by their organic fire teams (the two groups do not need to be even). The Drill Instructor will then designate the recruit leaders for each reaction problem and send the teams to their respective stalls. At each stall, the recruit leader will get a “read-board” from the designated box, brief his teammates, and then execute the mission. The recruits will rotate stalls as directed by their Drill Instructors. 1. SITUATION: Your group of fire teams, located near a storm drain, was attacked by a small enemy force. Your point man of was injured passing through the storm drain. 2. MISSION: RETRIEVE THE INJURED TEAMMATE AND BRING HIM TO THE EVALUATION STATION FOR TREATMENT. 3.
COORDINATING INSTRUCTION: a. Only use the stretcher to transport the wounded teammate. b. The casualty must be picked straight up. Once he is picked up, he may not be placed back in the red area. c. If gear touches the ground or red area, then that gear is eliminated from the problem. If a teammate touches the ground or any red area, then that recruit becomes a casualty. That recruit will conduct a Casualty Evacuation Exercise, which will consist of dragging a dummy to an “Aid Station” designated by a Drill Instructor located 150 meters away. Rejoin your group upon completion of the evacuation.
4.
EQUIPMENT:
You will wear your helmet, LBV, and maintain control of your M16A2 service rifle (condition 3). You have the following equipment: 1 - Dummy 1 - Stretcher 1 - Plank 2"x8"x6'
C-16-A-11 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
P1513.8 REACTION COURSE PROBLEM #8 (STALL 9) 5 Min Brief 15 Min Exercise 2 Drill Instructors 1 Field Instructor ORIENTATION: Upon arrival at this station, Crucible Squads are broken into two groups by their organic fire teams (the two groups do not need to be even). The Drill Instructor will then designate the recruit leaders for each reaction problem and send the teams to their respective stalls. At each stall, the recruit leader will get a “read-board” from the designated box, brief his teammates, and then execute the mission. The recruits will rotate stalls as directed by their Drill Instructors. 1. SITUATION: Your group of fire teams is tasked with supplying demolition gear to your platoon, located across a river. You have just discovered that that the bridge has been destroyed. Portions of the bridge still remain; however, some of the remaining parts are booby-trapped. Be alert for enemy in the area. 2. MISSION: LINK UP WITH YOUR PLATOON AND SUPPLY THEM WITH THE DEMOLITION GEAR. 3.
COORDINATING INSTRUCTIONS: a. Watch for cracks or excessive bending of the boards. b. Do not dive across. c. For security reasons all gear must be taken with you. d. You must maintain positive control of each plank at all times. If any plank touches the water you must have one hand on it. e. If gear touches the ground or red area, then that gear is eliminated from the problem. If a teammate touches the ground or any red area, then that recruit becomes a casualty. That recruit will conduct a Casualty Evacuation Exercise, which will consist of dragging a dummy to an “Aid Station” designated by a Drill Instructor located 150 meters away. Rejoin your group upon completion of the evacuation.
C-16-A-12 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
P1513.8 4. EQUIPMENT: You will wear your helmet, LBV, and maintain control your service rifle (Condition 3.) You have the following equipment: 1-Plank 2"x8"x8' 1-Plank 2"x8"x10' 1-Plank 2"x8"x13' 1-demolitions gear box
C-16-A-13 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
P1513.8 REACTION COURSE PROBLEM #9 (STALL 10) 5 Min Brief 15 Min Exercise 2 Drill Instructors 1 Field Instructor ORIENTATION: Upon arrival at this station, Crucible Squads are broken into two groups by their organic fire teams (the two groups do not need to be even). The Drill Instructor will then designate the recruit leaders for each reaction problem and send the teams to their respective stalls. At each stall, the recruit leader will get a “read-board” from the designated box, brief his teammates, and then execute the mission. The recruits will rotate stalls as directed by their Drill Instructors. 1. SITUATION: You are in route to link up with your platoon and re-supply them with radio batteries. Ahead is a small footbridge that crosses a swift river; enemy artillery has destroyed a portion of the bridge. The next enemy patrol is expected in 15 minutes. 2. MISSION: DELIVER THE BATTERIES FOR THE COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT TO YOUR PLATOON 3.
COORDINATING INSTRUCTIONS: a. All recruits and gear must cross the obstacle. b. You must maintain positive control of the planks at if one touches the water a teammate must have at least on it. If a plank touches the water, without positive your group of fire teams will start over from the ramp remaining time on the clock.
all times, one hand control, with the
c. Only one buddy team and one can are allowed on the board at a time. d. If gear touches the ground or red area, then that gear is eliminated from the problem. If a teammate touches the ground or any red area, then that recruit becomes a casualty. That recruit will conduct a Casualty Evacuation Exercise, which will consist of dragging a dummy to an “Aid Station” designated by a Drill Instructor located 150 meters away. Rejoin your group upon completion of the evacuation. 4. EQUIPMENT: You will wear your Helmet, LBV, and sling your service rifle cross body muzzle down (Condition 3). You have the following equipment: 1 Plank 2"x8"x9' 2 Planks 2"x8"x11’ 3 Large Ammo Cans (Representing the batteries)
C-16-A-14 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
P1513.8 REACTION COURSE PROBLEM #10 (STALL 11) 5 Min Brief 15 Min Exercise 2 Drill Instructors 1 Field Instructor ORIENTATION: Upon arrival at this station, Crucible Squads are broken into two groups by their organic fire teams (the two groups do not need to be even). The Drill Instructor will then designate the recruit leaders for each reaction problem and send the teams to their respective stalls. At each stall, the recruit leader will get a “read-board” from the designated box, brief his teammates, and then execute the mission. The recruits will rotate stalls as directed by their Drill Instructors. 1. SITUATION: You have encountered a minefield on your way to deliver a drum of you fuel. Limits of the minefield are unknown and you do not have the gear to breach it. 2. MISSION: DELIVER THE 55-GALLON DRUM 3. COORDINATING INSTRUCTIONS: a. Do not slide down the reverse side of the wall. b. Do not drop or throw any of the equipment. c. Do not tie knots in the rope. e. If gear (EXCEPT THE ROPE) touches the ground or red area, then that gear is eliminated from the problem. If a teammate touches the ground or any red area, then that recruit becomes a casualty. That recruit will conduct a Casualty Evacuation Exercise, which will consist of dragging a dummy to an “Aid Station” designated by a Drill Instructor located 150 meters away. Rejoin your group upon completion of the evacuation. 4.
EQUIPMENT:
You will wear your helmet, LBV, and maintain control of your service rifle (Condition 3). You have the following equipment: 1 – 55-gallon drum of fuel
C-16-A-15 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
P1513.8 REACTION COURSE PROBLEM #11 (STALL 12) 5 Min Brief 15 Min Exercise 2 Drill Instructors 1 Field Instructor ORIENTATION: Upon arrival at this station, Crucible Squads are broken into two groups by their organic fire teams (the two groups do not need to be even). The Drill Instructor will then designate the recruit leaders for each reaction problem and send the teams to their respective stalls. At each stall, the recruit leader will get a “read-board” from the designated box, brief his teammates, and then execute the mission. The recruits will rotate stalls as directed by their Drill Instructors. 1. SITUATION: Your group of fire teams is delivering ammunition to your platoon in a city. You decide to use the city's sewer system to avoid enemy detection. You discover that an artillery barrage destroyed part of the sewer. Your platoon is in desperate need of ammunition. 2. MISSION: DELIVER THE AMMUNITION TO YOUR PLATOON THROUGH THE SEWER SYSTEM 3. COORDINATING INSTRUCTIONS: a. Watch for cracks or excessive bending of the boards. b. Do not dive across. c. For security reasons all gear must be taken with you. d. You must maintain positive control of the planks at all times; if one touches the water you must have one hand on it. 4. EQUIPMENT: You will wear your helmet, LBV, and maintain control of your service rifle (condition 3). You have the following equipment: 1 1 1 1
-
Plank 2"X8"X12' Plank 2"x8"x6' Rope 8' long Ammunition box
C-16-A-16 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
P1513.8 TAB B (CORE VALUES) TO APPENDIX 16 (TWELVE STALL & CORE VALUES) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIGEO CRUCIBLE SOP (U)
PURPOSE: To allow recruits an opportunity to express their thoughts and to reinforce the fact that their teammates are all they have and are the keys to success.
C-16-B-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
P1513.8 CORE VALUES 5 Min Brief 20 Min Discussion 1 Drill Instructor ORIENTATION: Upon arrival at this station, the entire Crucible Squad will be seated around their Drill Instructor. The Drill For the next 25 minutes, the Drill Instructor will lead his recruits in a Core Values Discussion aided by the read-board below. The recruits will rotate as directed by their Drill Instructor. 1. COORDINATING INSTRUCTIONS: The following questions are provided as a tool for the Drill Instructor in conducting Core Values Discussions as part of this Crucible Station. “Who Am I?” a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
Where are you from? What hobbies do you have or participate in? How many brothers/sisters do you have? Where and when were you born? Why do you want to be a Marine? Has the seven weeks of Recruit Training changed you? Has anyone in your family ever been a Marine? What single event has had the greatest impact on you and why? i. What do you expect from the Marine Corps? j. What do you expect to contribute to the Marine Corps?
C-16-B-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED
P1513.8 TAB C (OPERATIONAL RISK MANAGEMENT ASSESSMENT) TO APPENDIX 16 (TWELVE STALL & CORE VALUES) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIGEO CRUCIBLE SOP (U)
C-16-C-1 UNCLASSIFIED
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 APPENDIX 17 (GARCIA’S ENGAGEMENT AND BASILONE’S CHALLENGE) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIGEO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) 1. (U) Purpose. The purpose of this document is to provide specific guidance on the conduct of Garcia’s Engagement and Basilone’s Challenge. 2. (U) General. Crucible Event 17 is comprised of two sub-stations, Garcia’s Engagement and Basilone’s Challenge. Upon arrival at this event, if two Crucible Squads are traveling together, the first Crucible Squad will conduct the Garcia’s Engagement while the second Crucible Squad detaches and conducts Basilone’s Challenge. The two squads will then rotate these stations after the allotted time for each station has expired. See Tabs A and B to this appendix for specific instructions on each station. Tabs: a. Garcia’s Engagement b. Basilone’s Challenge
R. B. RICHARDSON Major, U. S. Marine Corps Commanding
C-17-1 UNCLASSIFIED
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 TAB A (GARCIA’S ENGAGEMENT) TO APPENDIX 17 (GARCIA’S ENGAGEMENT AND BASILONE’S CHALLENGE) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U)
PFC GARCIA’s ENGAGEMENT
PURPOSE: Instills the warrior ethos through teamwork and physical conditioning while reinforcing designated MCMAP Skills and casualty evacuation carries.
C-17-A-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
PRIVATE FIRST CLASS FERNANDO L. GARCIA UNITE STATES MARINE CORPS * * * * * MOH CITATION For service as set forth in the following citation: For conspicuous gallantry and intrepidity at the risk of his life above and beyond the call of duty while serving as a member of Company I, Third Battalion, Fifth Marines, First Marine Division (Reinforced), in action against enemy aggressor forces in Korea on 5 September 1952. While participating in the defense of a combat outpost located more than one mile forward of the main line of resistance during a savage night attack by a fanatical enemy force employing grenades, mortars and artillery, Private First Class Garcia, although suffering painful wounds, moved through the intense hail of hostile fire to a supply point to secure more hand grenades. Quick to act when a hostile grenade landed nearby, endangering the life of another Marine, as well as his own, he unhesitatingly chose to sacrifice himself and immediately threw his body upon the deadly missile, receiving the full impact of the explosion. His great personal valor and cool decision in the face of almost certain death sustain and enhance the finest traditions of the United States Naval Service. He gallantly gave his life for his country.
C-17-A-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 EVENT BACKGROUND PFC FERNANDO L. GARCIA Medal of Honor (Posthumously Awarded) DATE: 5 Sept. 1952 PLACE: Combat Outpost, Korea UNIT: Co. "I", 3rd Bn., 5th Marines, 1st MarDiv. (Reinforced) - Pfc. Garcia was involved in defending a position located more than one mile forward of the main line of resistance from a fanatical enemy attack. - Already suffering from painful wounds, Garcia braved an intense hail of enemy fire trying to reach a supply point to get more grenades. - When a hostile grenade landed nearby, Garcia immediately recognized the danger to a nearby fellow Marine and threw his body on the grenade, receiving the full impact of the blast. - Garcia performed his heroic deed less than 6 months after graduation from boot camp. QUESTIONS 1. PFC Garcia had graduated from Boot Camp less than six months before he was awarded The Medal of Honor. What do you think was PFC Garcia's motivation to give up his own life? 2. Do you think Garcia feared death? How/why did he overcome his fears? 3. During the Korean War, there was much social unrest. What challenges would Garcia have faced as a foreign national in the USMC? 4. With these challenges in mind, why would PFC Garcia risk his life for others?
C-17-A-3 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 PFC GARCIA'S ENGAGEMENT: 5 5 20 5
Min Min Min Min
to Brief Guided Instruction to Exercise to Critique
1 Drill Instructor (Green Belt Instructor) OVERVIEW: All recruits will stage their packs in the designated area. After that, recruits will form a school circle and the Drill Instructor will read the Medal of Honor citation and lead the recruits in a short guided discussion. Next, the Drill Instructor will brief the station to his Crucible Squad, using the information below. Upon completion of all required exercises, the Crucible Squad will be released to the next station. 1. SITUATION: Your Crucible Squad is patrolling in the Oscar-1 training area, C Finger. An enemy squad engages you at close range. The fighting is exhausting and changes to hand-to-hand combat. 2. MISSION: CASUALTIES.
REPEL THE ENEMY’S ASSAULT BY CLOSE COMBAT AND EVACUATE YOUR
3. EQUIPMENT: All members of your squad will wear helmet, flak and mouthpiece. All weapons will be stacked and in Condition 4. 4. COORDINATING INSTRUCTIONS: a. Split the Crucible Squad into two groups by permanent buddy teams. Start the first group at Station 1 (Note: Buddy Bear Crawl will consist of crawling around the perimeter of the pit until they reach Station 2). Start the second group of buddy teams at Station 3 (Dead Man Crawl). The first group will execute the stations in order, 1 through 7. The second group will start the stations at Station 3 and then finish on Station 2. Each station should take no longer than three minutes to complete. b. Station sequence and repetitions are as follows: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
Buddy Bear Crawl Counter to a Rear Bear Hug Dead Man Crawl Arm Bar Takedown Fireman’s Carry Leg Sweep Squad Push-ups
X X X X X X X
1 5 1 5 1 5 5
c. The recruits who were dragged at Station 1 are the “rescuers” at Station 3. At Station 5, the buddy teams will rotate conducting the Fireman’s Carry at the halfway point. C-17-A-4 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 d. Drill Instructors will closely monitor Stations 2, 4, 6 and ensure that proper MCMAP techniques are being used in order to keep injuries to a minimum. Recruits will use their mouthpieces at these stations and the Drill Instructor must be at least Tan-Belt certified to supervise these events. e. If the recruits are improperly executing the MCMAP techniques the Drill Instructor will direct them to re-do all five repetitions of that station. f. Squad push-ups will be executed as follows: One recruit lies on the deck while a second recruit lays forward of the first and places his toes on the shoulders of the first recruit. All other recruits follow this sequence until they are all in one line. All recruits must execute the movement simultaneously. g. Safety is paramount. 5. AFTER ACTION REVIEW: a. Discuss the following topics: (1) Warrior Ethos. (2) Decisiveness. (3) Initiative. (4) Courage and Commitment
C-17-A-5 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
C-17-A-6 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 TAB B (BASILONE’S CHALLENGE) TO APPENDIX 17 (GARCIA’S ENGAGEMENT AND BASILONE’S CHALLENGE) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U)
BASILONE’S CHALLENGE
PURPOSE: To develop teamwork while reinforcing the fire team skirmishes formation and proper execution of fire team assaults when recruits are physically fatigued.
C-17-B-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
SERGEANT JOHN BASILONE UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS * * * * * CITATION For extraordinary heroism and conspicuous gallantry in action against enemy Japanese forces, above and beyond the call of duty, while serving with the First Battalion, Seventh Marines, First Marine Division, in the Lunga Area, Guadalcanal, Solomon Islands, on October 24 and 25, 1942. While the enemy was hammering at the Marines' defensive positions, Sergeant Basilone, in charge of two sections of heavy machine guns, fought valiantly to check the savage and determined assault. In a fierce frontal attack with the Japanese blasting his guns with grenades and mortar fire, one of Sergeant Basilone's sections, with its gun crews, was put out of action, leaving only two men able to carry on. Moving an extra gun into position, he places it in action, then, under continual fire, repaired another and personally manned it. Gallantly holding his line and with the supply lines cut off, Sergeant Basilone, at great risk of his life and in the face of continued enemy attack, battled his way through hostile lines with urgently needed shells for his gunners, thereby contributing in a large measure to the virtual annihilation of a Japanese regiment. His great personal valor and courageous initiative were in keeping with the highest traditions of the United States Naval Service.
C-17-B-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 DI BACKGROUND MATERIAL SGT JOHN BASILONE Medal of Honor DATE: 24/25 Oct 1942 PLACE: Guadalcanal UNIT: 1st BN, 7th MAR, 1st MARDIV - Basilone's two heavy machine gun sections were under extremely heavy enemy fire. - One of Basilone's machine gun teams was put out of action during a fierce frontal attack. - Basilone single handily moved an extra gun into position and repaired another and personally manned it. - Basilone gallantly held his line and moved through hostile lines to secure badly needed shells for his gunners. - His efforts contributed to the virtual annihilation of a Japanese regiment. QUESTIONS: 1.
How would you describe Sgt. Basilone's Warrior Spirit?
2. Would you like a Marine like Sgt. Basilone to be your squad leader? Why? 3. Sgt. Basilone's actions had a great impact on both battles, what are some of these impacts and how did his actions initiate them? 4. What do you think made Sgt. Basilone continue to fight when everything seemed so hopeless?
C-17-B-3 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 SGT BASILONE'S CHALLENGE: 5 5 20 5
Min Min Min Min
to Brief Guided Discussion to Execute to Critique
1 Drill Instructor 1 Field Instructor OVERVIEW: Upon arrival at this station, recruits will form a school circle and their Drill Instructor will lead a guided discussion on the Core Values exhibited by Sgt Basilone. Next, the Field Instructor will brief the station to the recruit Fire Team Leaders. After the brief (below), the recruit leadership will come up with a plan and execute the mission. Five minutes before recruits are scheduled to rotate stations—or upon successful completion of this station, whichever occurs first—the Field Instructor will conduct a critique of the recruits’ performance with the entire Crucible Squad. After the critique, the Crucible Squad will be released to the next station. 1. SITUATION: Your platoon is occupying a defensive position on C Finger in the vicinity of Hill 505 when your unit comes under intense enemy fire. A fierce firefight erupts which depletes your platoon’s ammunition. 2. MISSION: SUPPLY YOUR PLATOON’S DEFENSIVE POSITION WITH AMMUNITION. ON ORDER, AFTER RESUPPLYING YOUR PLATOON WITH AMMUNITION ATTACK THE ENEMY POSITION ON TOP OF THE HILL. 3. EQUIPMENT: You will wear your helmet, black gloves, and LBV. Your service rifle will be in Condition 4. You have the following equipment: 3– 5.56mm Ammunition Cans per Fire Team 1- 40mm Ammunition Can per Fire Team 4. COORDINATING INSTRUCTIONS: a. Recruits will maintain positive control of their weapons at all times. You will use the “Rambo Carry” with your three-point sling when moving ammunition cans from position to position. b. You will not sling your weapon behind your back during the resupply. c. You will ensure all ammunition cans are taken to the machine gun positions. d. All recruits will keep a low profile while moving from position to position. e. You will not walk on any road during the assault. cactus plants and sandbags. C-17-B-4 UNCLASSIFIED
Avoid destroying
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 f. Use speed to accomplish your mission. g. Safety is paramount. h. The fire teams must attack the hill in skirmishes, while maintaining original fire team integrity. The Crucible Squad itself will be on line. i. All recruits must maintain speed and intensity throughout the attack. j. The squad will form a 180 degree security perimeter on top of top of the hill Are there any questions? 5. AFTER ACTION REVIEW: a. Establish what happened: (1) What was the mission? (2) What was the plan? (3) Did the plan change? Why or Why not? (4) Was the mission accomplished? Why or Why not? (5) What did the team learn about mission accomplishment and planning? (6) Did the Fire Team properly execute the skirmishes formation? b. Determine what was right and wrong with what happened: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) the
Were all team members' suggestions taken into account? What went right with the plan? What was wrong with the plan? How did the team adjust the plan? What did the team learn from the right and wrong aspects of plan?
C-17-B-5 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
C-17-B-6 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 APPENDIX 18 (CUKELA’S WALL AND GONZALEZ’S CROSSING) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIGEO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) 1. (U) Purpose. The purpose of this document is to provide specific guidance on the conduct of Crucible Event 18: Cukela’s Wall and Gonzalez’s Crossing. 2. (U) General. Crucible Event 18 is comprised of two substations, Cukela’s Wall and Gonzalez’s Crossing. Upon arrival at this event, if two Crucible Squads are traveling together, the first Crucible Squad will conduct Cukela’s Wall while the second Crucible Squad detaches and conducts Gonzalez’s Crossing. The two squads will then rotate these stations after the allotted time for each station has expired. See Tabs A and B to this appendix for specific instructions on each station. Tabs: a. b.
Cukela’s Wall Gonzalez’s Crossing
R. B. RICHARDSON Major, U. S. Marine Corps Commanding
C-18-1 UNCLASSIFIED
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 TAB A (CUKELA’S WALL) TO APPENDIX 18 (CUKELA’S WALL AND GONZALEZ’S CROSSING) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) CUKELA'S WALL
PURPOSE: To emphasize the importance of team work, task organization and having an active security posture while performing tactical evolutions.
C-18-A-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
SERGEANT LOUIS CUKELA UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS * * * * * MOH CITATION For extraordinary heroism while serving with the 66th Company, 5th Regiment, during action in the Forest de Retz, near VillerCottertes, France, 18 Jul 1918. Sgt. Cukela advanced alone against an enemy strong point that was holding up his line. Disregarding the warnings of his comrades, he crawled out from the flank in the face of heavy fire and worked his way to the rear of the enemy position. Rushing a machinegun emplacement, he killed or drove off the crew with his bayonet, bombed out the remaining part of the strong point with German handgrenades and captured 2 machineguns and 4 men.
C-18-A-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 DI BACKGROUND INFORMATION LOUIS CUKELA UNIT: 66th Company, 5th Regiment PLACE: Villers, Cotterets, France DATE: 18 Jul 1918 - Cukela advanced against an enemy strong point, working his way to its rear. - Using enemy (German) hand grenades, he attacked and captured two machine guns and four enemy troops. QUESTIONS 1. What do you think motivated Sgt Cukela to advance single handily against overwhelming odds? 2. Do you think Sgt Cukela was scared? to conquer his fears?
If so, how was he able
3. Do you think Sgt Cukela thought about his actions, or do you believe he acted on impulse? If so, what would cause such an impulse? 4.
How was Sgt Cukela able to adapt to the changing situations?
5. Sergeant Cukela wasn't born in the United States, as a result, he may have been treated differently than other Marines. How do you think his fellow Marines felt about him after his actions?
C-18-A-3 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 CUKELA'S WALL 5 5 20 5
Min Min Min Min
to Brief Discussion to Exercise to Critique
1 Drill Instructor OVERVIEW: Upon arrival at this station, recruits will for a school circle and the Drill Instructor will brief the station to a recruit Squad Leader and the permanent Fire Team Leaders as the other recruits stage their gear. After the brief (below), the recruit leadership will make a plan on how to successfully get over on to the other side of the obstacle. Ten minutes before recruits are scheduled to rotate station or upon successful completion of this station, whichever occurs first, the Drill Instructor will conduct a critique of the recruits’ performance with the entire Crucible Squad. After the critique, the Crucible Squad will be released to the next station. 1. SITUATION: Your platoon is pinned down by enemy fire from a bunker. Your Crucible Squad was moving around the bunker to attack it from the rear; however, a large wall blocks the path leading to the enemy bunker. 2. MISSION: CLIMB OVER THE WALL IN ORDER TO ATTACK THE ENEMY BUNKER ON THE OTHER SIDE OF THE WALL. 3.
EXECUTION: (CONCEPT OF OPERATIONS). a. Get all fire team members to the other side. b. Ensure that recruits have security on both sides using proper dispersion and available cover and or concealment at all times.
4. EQIPMENT: You will wear your 782 gear, kevlar, flak jacket and service rifle (Condition 3) which you will pass off before going over the wall. 5.
SAFETY AND RULES: a. Do NOT lift other recruits by their LBV. b. Two spotters will be in front of and in back of the wall to catch teammates. Spotters are for safety only and will not assist in any way. c. All spotters will be traded out and complete the obstacle. C-18-A-4 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 d. Do not use the rope connected on the rear of the wall, to scale the front of the wall. e. Do not jump off the wall. f. Recruits that are on the top of the wall must keep both feet flat on the catwalk. g. No more than three recruits on top of the wall at any time. h. Remember to set up security using dispersion and cover and/or concealment; all recruits will be in the prone. DO NOT BUNCH UP AROUND THE WALL LIKE SHOWN IN THE PICTURE! i. Safety is paramount. 6. PLAN/EXECUTION: Recruits, take 5 minutes to decide how to accomplish the mission and brief your plan. 7. AFTER ACTION REVIEW: a. ESTABLISH WHAT HAPPENED (1) What was the mission? (2) What was the plan? (3) Did the plan change?
Why or Why not?
(4) Did Fire Team Leaders and the recruit Squad Leader work together as a team? Did they task organize? (5) Was proper security maintained? mission.
If not, they failed the
b. DETERMINE HOW THE TASK SHOULD BE DONE DIFFERENTLY NEXT TIME (1) What would you do differently, if you were to do this obstacle again? (2) What did you learn from this obstacle that you could apply in other situations, either in your future as a Marine or in other aspects of your life? c. VALUES TO REINFORCE AFTER THE OBSTACLE IS COMPLETED (1) If the recruits complete this obstacle successfully reinforce the following values: (2) It took a good plan, creativity, dependability, coordination, commitment (to the plan), determination, trust (in your fellow recruits to catch you), and courage to accomplish this obstacle.
C-18-A-5 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
C-18-A-6 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 TAB B (GONZALEZ’S CROSSING) TO APPENDIX 18 (CUKELA’S WALL AND GONZALEZ’S CROSSING) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U)
GONZALEZ’S CROSSING
PURPOSE: To foster teamwork, physical agility, and reinforce proper donning procedures for the field protective mask.
C-18-B-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
SERGEANT ALFREDO GONZALEZS UNITED STAES MARINE CORPS MEDAL OF HONOR CITATION For conspicuous gallantry and intrepidity at the risk of his life above and beyond the call of duty while serving as Platoon Commander, Third Platoon, Company A, First Battalion, First Marines, First Marine Division, in the Republic of Vietnam. On 31 January 1968, during the initial phase of Operation HUE CITY Sergeant Gonzalez' unit was formed as a reaction force and deployed to Hue to relieve the pressure on the beleaguered city. While moving by truck convoy along Route #1, near the village of Lang Van Lrong, the Marines received a heavy volume of enemy fire. Sergeant Gonzalez aggressively maneuvered the Marines in his platoon, and directed their fire until the area was cleared of snipers. Immediately after crossing a river south of Hue, the column was again hit by intense enemy fire. One of the Marines on top of a tank was wounded and fell to the ground in an exposed position. With complete disregard for his own safety, Sergeant Gonzalez ran through the fire-swept area to the assistance of his injured comrade. He lifted him up and though receiving fragmentation wounds during the rescue, he carried the wounded Marine to a covered position for treatment. Due to the increased volume and accuracy of enemy fire from a fortified machine gun bunker on the side of the road, the company was temporarily halted. Realizing the gravity of the situation, Sergeant Gonzalez exposed himself to the enemy fire and moved his platoon along the east side of a bordering rice paddy to a dike directly across from the bunker. Though fully aware of the danger involved, he moved to the fire-swept road and destroyed the hostile position with hand grenades. Although seriously wounded again on 3 February, he steadfastly refused medical treatment and continued to supervise his men and lead the attack. On 4 February, the enemy had again pinned the company down, inflicting heavy casualties with automatic weapons and rocket fire. Sergeant Gonzalez, utilizing a number of light antitank assault weapons, fearlessly moved from position to position firing numerous rounds at the heavily fortified enemy emplacements. He successfully knocked out a rocket position and suppressed much of the C-18-B-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 enemy fire before falling mortally wounded. The heroism, courage, and dynamic leadership displayed by Sergeant Gonzalez reflected great credit upon himself and the Marine Corps and were in keeping with the highest traditions of the United States Naval Service. He gallantly gave his life for his country. DI BACKGROUND INFORMATION UNIT: A CO, 1st BN, 1st Mar, 1st MARDIV PLACE: Republic of Vietnam DATE: 31 Jan 1968 - Supporting Operation HUE CITY, Gonzalez' unit was in a convoy receiving heavy enemy fire. - Gonzalez directed and maneuvered his Marines in clearing the area of enemy snipers. - Resuming convoy operations, the column was once again hit by intense enemy fire. - A Marine on top of a tank was wounded and fell to the ground; Gonzalez' rescued him and received fragmentation wounds. - With increasing accuracy and volume of enemy fire, Gonzalez' again exposed himself to enemy fire while his platoon moved to a bunker directly across from a fortified machine gun bunker. - On 4 Feb., the enemy continued its assault on the Marines' position. - Though badly wounded, Gonzalez fearlessly moved from position to position directing the efforts of his Marines and successfully knocked out an enemy rocket position and much of the enemy force before falling, mortally wounded. QUESTIONS: 1. What do you think made SGT Gonzalez continue fighting after he had been wounded? 2. Could you have done the same as SGT Gonzalez if you were in his place? 3. Would you have done anything different? 4. If so, what and why?
C-18-B-3 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 SGT GONZALEZ’S CROSSING 5 5 25 5
Min Min Min Min
to Brief Discussion to Exercise to Critique
1 Drill Instructor 0-1 Field Instructor OVERVIEW: Upon arrival at this station, recruits will for a school circle and the Drill Instructor will brief the station to a recruit Squad Leader and the permanent Fire Team Leaders as the other recruits stage their gear. After the brief (below), the recruit leadership will make a plan on how to successfully get over on to the other side of the obstacle. Ten minutes before recruits are scheduled to rotate station or upon successful completion of this station, whichever occurs first, the Drill Instructor will conduct a critique of the recruits’ performance with the entire Crucible Squad. After the critique, the Crucible Squad will be released to the next station. Instructor Note: When the Field Training Platoon is manned below its T/O strength, this station may not be manned with a Field Instructor. If such is the case, a Series Chief Drill Instructor will sign for 24 Field Protective Masks each day of the Crucible to be used at this station as coordinated with FWTCO staff prior to the Crucible.
1. SITUATION: Your Crucible Squad must reinforce the remainder of your platoon, which is currently pinned down by enemy forces, and help them break contact to a safe area. In order to reach the platoon, your squad must travel through an area believed to be contaminated with nerve gas. (This is a nontactical evolution.) 2. MISSION: Travel through the contaminated area, help your platoon (notional) break contact, and move to safety. 3. EXECUTION: (CONCEPT OF OPERATIONS) a. A recruit or Drill Instructor will hand the rope to the first recruit on Platform 1 (Present location). There will be no more than three recruits on each platform. b. The first recruit will then swing to Platform 2 (Platoon’s Position) and assist the beleaguered platoon in breaking contact. Recruits may swing to Platform 3 (Safe Area) or wait C-18-B-4 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 for other recruits; however, no more than three recruits are allowed on a single platform. c. When the recruits reach Platform 3 (Safe Area), they will remove their field protective masks. And wait for the remainder of their Crucible Squad to negotiate the obstacle. d. All recruits will complete the obstacle. 4. EQUIPMENT: You will wear your helmet, flak jacket, LBV, M40 Field Protective Mask with carrier, and sling your service rifle (Condition 3) cross-body, muzzle down. 5. SAFETY/RULES: rules apply:
While negotiating this obstacle, the following
a. 782 gear cannot be thrown from platform to platform. b. You cannot tie 782 gear onto the rope. c. If you touch the "contaminated" ground, you must conduct a casualty evacuation as prescribed by the Drill Instructor. d. Each recruit must land on each platform. 3 recruits per platform at a time.
You may only have
e. Once the rope is handed to the first recruit on Platform 1, it must remain in constant motion—that is, recruits are not allowed to get off their platforms to retrieve the rope. At this time, are there any questions? 6. PLAN/EXECUTION: Recruits, take three minutes to decide how to accomplish the mission and brief your plan. 7. AFTER ACTION REVIEW: a. Establish what happened (1)
What was the mission?
(2)
What was the plan?
(3)
Did the plan change?
(4)
Was the mission accomplished? Why or Why not?
Why or Why not?
(5) What did the team learn about mission accomplishment and planning? b. Determine what was right and wrong with what happened C-18-B-5 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 (1)
Were all team members' suggestions taken into account?
(2)
What went right with the plan?
(3)
What was wrong with the plan?
(4)
How did the team adjust the plan?
(5) What did the team learn from the right and wrong aspects of the plan? c. Determine how the task should be done differently next time. (1) What would you do differently, if you were to do this obstacle again? (2) What did you learn from this obstacle that you could apply in other situations, either in your future as a Marine or in other aspects of your life?
C-18-B-6 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
C-18-B-7 UNCLASSIFIED
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 APPENDIX 19 (JANSEN’S THRUST) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) to MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) JANSEN’S TRUST
PURPOSE: Reinforces individual movement skills, individual and fire team rushes, use of cover, and close combat bayonet skills in a physically demanding scenario as well as providing an opportunity for the Drill Instructors to mentor their recruits in leadership.
C-19-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
SERGEANT ERNEST A. JANSEN UNITED STATES MARINE CORPS * * * * * MOH CITATION For conspicuous gallantry and intrepidity above and beyond the call of duty in action with the enemy near CHATEAU-THIERRY, France, June 6, 1918. Immediately after the company to which he belonged had reached its objective in Hill 142 several hostile counterattacks were launched against the line before the new position had been consolidated. Sergeant Janson was attempting to organize a position on the north slope of the hill when he saw 12 of the enemy, armed with five light machine guns, crawling toward his group. Giving the alarm, he rushed the hostile detachment, bayoneted the two leaders, and forced the others to flee, abandoning their guns. His quick action, initiative, and courage drove the enemy from a position from which they could have swept the hill with machine-gun fire and forced the withdrawal of our troops.
C-19-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 JANSEN'S THRUST 10 Min to Brief/Plan 5 Min MOH Discussion 40 Min to Exercise 5 Min for Critique 15 Min “How am I?” 15 Movement to Next Station 2 Drill Instructors 1 Field Instructor OVERVIEW: Upon arrival at this station, recruits will form a school circle and a Field Instructor will brief the station to the recruit Squad Leader and Fire Team Leaders. After the brief (below), recruits will start executing the course in their T-17 assigned fire teams. Both Drill Instructors will be on the course to supervise safe execution of the station. The first Drill Instructor will position himself next to the log wall and second DI will post next to the rope bridge. After recruits complete the course, a Field Instructor will critique their performance for not more than five minutes and then the Drill Instructors will conduct the “How am I?” leadership discussion before moving onto the next station. 1. SITUATION: Your Crucible Squad, the lead element of your platoon's movement, ran into an enemy defensive position. Although there are many obstacles, the position seems to be lightly guarded. You do not want to alert the enemy which may cause him to reinforce his position. Because you unit is low on ammunition, you must make every round count in a frontal assault on the main objective. The element of surprise is on your side. 2. MISSION: PENETRATE THE ENEMY’S DEFENSE IN ORDER TO DESTROY THE ENEMY HEADQUARTERS. 3. EQUIPMENT: You will wear your helmet, flak jacket, LBV, black gloves, and service rifle (condition 3) with an M-7 Bayonet. 4. COORDINATING INSTRUCTIONS: a. Recruits will execute the course in the fire teams as required to be assigned on T-17 by Chapter 12 of the recruit training SOP. b. Members of the Crucible Squad will remain in their lane. c. Upon entering the trench prior to the wall, you will take the bayonet off your weapon, place it in the ammunition box and continue with the assault. There will be one Drill Instructor at the wall for your safety. d. When going over the rope bridge there will be one recruit crossing over at a time; when the first recruit is over, he will
C-19-3 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 set security while waiting for the other recruits to cross over. (Remember to make proper use of cover and concealment.) When your whole team is over, continue with the assault. e. You will strike the Fighting Dummies in accordance with the signs posted. f. Once each team has rushed past the last obstacle, consolidate in a 180-degree perimeter before leaving the course. 5. SAFETY RULES: apply:
While negotiating this course, the following rules
a. Recruits will execute the course using principles of fire and movement and Martial Arts. b. Recruits will not enter the demolition pits. c. Recruits will high crawl, low crawl and back crawl while in the minefield. The minefield extends to the culverts. At this time, are there any questions? 6. AFTER ACTION REVIEW: CORE VALUES - HOW AM I? a. How am I feeling physically, mentally, emotionally? b. How have my physical abilities and limitations affected the performance of our team? c. Have my physical capabilities affected how I am feeling mentally and emotionally? Why or why not? d. Have I moved beyond my own physical pain to assist other members of my team? Why or why not? e. Am I contributing 100% of my efforts to the team? Does it make a difference to the team if I don't contribute 100%? Why or why not? f. Physical abilities and limitations obviously affect how we are feeling emotionally and mentally, and in turn affect our performance. Based on what you are experiencing right now, might this be greater or lesser than what you might experience on the battlefield? How might these factors contribute to confusion on the battlefield? g. What have I learned as an individual member of a team? h. What have I learned, at the Crucible, as a member of a team?
C-19-4 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
C-19-5 UNCLASSIFIED
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 APPENDIX 20 (NIGHT FIRE TEAM PATROL) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) 1. (U) Purpose. The purpose of this document is to provide specific guidance on the conduct of Night Fire Team Patrol. 2. (U) General. Crucible Events 20 and 21 are the two major night events for the Crucible. Each of these night events is designed to support up to 350 Recruits in either a “Series-” or “Company-Track.” The tabs of this document provide detailed instructions for the conduct of the Night Fire Team Patrol. Tabs: a. Course Diagram and Instructor Guidance b. Team Leader’s Patrol Order
R. B. RICHARDSON Major, U. S. Marine Corps Commanding
C-20-1 UNCLASSIFIED
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 TAB A (COURSE DIAGRAM & INSTRUCTOR GUIDANCE) TO APPENDIX 20 (NIGHT FIRE TEAM PATROL) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) COURSE DIAGRAM AND INSTRUCTOR GUIDANCE
501 Road
FI
DI DI
ASSEMBLY AREA
Testing Area
Bleachers
RECRUIT COLLECTION / RALLY POINT
FI DI
LOA
Night Fire Team Patrol
DI
Gravel Road
DI
FI
DI DI
LOA Bunker
Bunker
FI
FI
Launching Point
501 Box
DI
DI DI
DRAW
FI
FI DI DI FI
FI
e ut Ro
KILL ZONE
n ee Gr
FI
Checkpoint 8
Lane 1 (Route Red)
Lane 2 (Route Red)
Lane 3 (Route Red)
PURPOSE: To provide instruction for recruit trainers regarding the conduct of the Night Fire Team Patrol. C-20-A-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 INSTRUCTOR GUIDANCE: NIGHT FIRE TEAM PATROL 10 Min to 20 Min to 2.5 Hrs to 10 Min to
Brief Rehearse Execute Debrief
9 Drill Instructors 10 Field Instructors 1 FWTCo SNCO (RSO) 1 RTC Officer (OIC) 1. Document Purpose: To provide uniform guidance on the conduct of the subject training event. A copy of this guidance shall be posted in the R501 instructor box and handed to all the Field Instructors and Drill Instructors supervising the event along with the OIC and RSO. The Field Company SNCOIC responsible for supervising this training shall ensure that a copy of the patrol five-paragraph patrol order (Tab B to Appendix 20) is on hand and rehearsed by the Field Instructor giving it. He shall ensure that all equipment is in place to support training to include: a.
Propane tanks and properly functioning pneumatic weapons
b.
Red and green chemlights emplaced to mark the patrol route
c.
Ammunition: L312 WSP or M203 WSP variants with an M203
d.
Base Range Regulations
e.
Range Flag
f.
Minimum of five (5) Radios on Channel 1
g.
Complete copy of the Crucible SOP
h. Terrain Model (complete with Range 501 Road and Routes Red and Green with Checkpoint 8) i.
Fire Team Leader Fragmentary order
j.
Copy of the operation risk management form (ORM)
k.
Red “E” silhouettes at the kill boxes along “Route Red”
2. Event Training Goals: a. Introduce recruits to terrain models and being presented with information from a professionally conducted fiveparagraph order. C-20-A-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 b. Reinforce Fire Team Formations and Individual Movement under the cover of darkness. c.
Reinforce IA Drills but under the cover darkness.
d. Instill a sense of confidence in the recruits by successfully patrolling at night as a fire teams. 3. Concept of Operations: a. Briefing and Night Rehearsals. The Series/Company will be seated no earlier than sunset by assigned fire teams at the R501 bleachers for a fire team satellite patrol order using a terrain model. Recruits will then be given a safety brief from the RSO (using Appendix 1 to Annex B to this SOP) and then reformed into their platoons so the fire teams can practice formations and IA Drills in the darkness prior to stepping off on the course (two Field Instructors will be with each platoon to coach the DI’s on how to run the reviews). When the instructors consider that the fire teams are ready, they will start send the first teams to the Line of Departure (LOD). The remaining teams shall continue practicing their formations under the supervision of at least one Drill Instructor and two Field Instructors until they are called to step-off on the course. b. Patrol Execution. Fire teams will step off on the course at one-minute intervals. (Fire Teams should not be able to see the team in front of them. They will proceed down the course with minimal chemlights marking the route in order to keep the recruits’ minds engaged and concentrating on their training instead of just following the trails, other recruits, or chemlights.) A roving Field Instructor paired with one Drill Instructor will rove the patrol lane designated as “Route Green” (see graphic) from the LOD to Checkpoint 8; they will ensure that recruits are using the Four Golden Rules of Formations (Dispersion, Looking Back Every 3-5 Paces, Passing on Correct H&A Signals, and Moving around the Base Unit/Team Leader when changing formations) and are otherwise being tactical. Once the recruits reach Checkpoint 8, a Field Instructor, acting as the notional Squad leader from the patrol order, will alternate the teams through one of the three IA lanes. c. Kill Boxes. When the fire teams reach the “Kill Box,” Field Instructors will have them initiate the two IA Drills, Establish a Hasty Ambush and React to Indirect Fire with a Break Contact Drill. Once the recruits complete this, they will continue on in their lanes and execute a React to Near Ambush Drill on the enemy bunkers at the end of the lane. C-20-A-3 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 d. LOA. Recruits will assault through to the Limit of Advance (LOA), located on the gravel road where DIs will collect the recruits and debrief them on their Near Ambush Drill. Recruits will then proceed to the bleachers for accountability by the Drill Instructors. 4.
Coordinating Instructions: a. SNCO Supervision. A Field Company SNCOIC will supervise this event and serve as the RSO. The recruit company shall provide the OIC; he will be given a copy of this SOP, the RSO/OIC Policy Letter, and an ORM Matrix. Ten Field Instructors and seven Drill Instructors plus one Drill Instructor at the Review stations must be on hand to support this training event. b. DI Briefing. When the recruits receive their order in the bleachers, the Field Company SNCOIC will give the Drill Instructors a brief on the night’s training evolution and post them at their assigned stations along with the Field Instructors. The following stations shall be manned. (1) Review Circles: Recruits will conduct twenty minutes of rehearsals. Two seasoned Field Instructor and one Drill Instructor will keep reviewing the formations while teams are waiting to cross the LOD. Teams will not stand idle while waiting to start on “Route Green.” After the IA drills review is complete, the Field and Drill Instructors will head to their assigned stations. Once all Instructors are in place the evolution may commence. The first teams may start to cross the LOD, while the remaining teams continue to rehearse their IA Drills and formations. (2) LOD/Lane Start Point: This station shall be manned by a Field instructor to ensure that the fire teams are properly dispersed. He shall be equipped with a radio to Checkpoint 8, the RSO, the Bunkers, and the Route Green Instructors. The Line of Departure supervisor will launch fire teams at a one minute interval. (3) Route Green: One Field Instructor and one Drill Instructor will rove this lane with a radio to ensure that the recruits are moving tactically, safely, and according to the “Four Golden Rules” of formations (Dispersion, Looking Back Every 3-5 Paces, Passing on Correct H&A Signals, and Moving Around the Base Unit/Team Leader When Changing Formations). These instructors shall supervise the fire teams by periodically assessing casualties to see if the remainder of the team notices that a team member is missing. C-20-A-4 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 (4) Checkpoint 8: One Field Instructor with a radio will act as the notional Squad Leader from the patrol order. He will direct the fire teams up alternating lanes (Route Red) towards the “Kill Box/IA Drill Box”. He shall ensure that there is a significant interval between the teams. (5) Kill Box/IA Drill Box: One Field Instructors will be stationed on both Lanes 1 and 3. A Drill Instructor will be placed in Lane 2 in order to assist. There will be at least one radio between these three instructors to communicate with the LOD, Route Green, the RSO, and the Near Ambush Bunkers. The instructors at this station shall initiate two IA drills: Establish a Hasty Ambush and React to Indirect Fire combined with a Break Contact Drill. The instructors shall ensure that recruits perform the drills properly (consistent with the POI and classes given during field week, see below). Once the recruits satisfactorily complete the drills, they will continue on their Route Red lanes towards the near ambush bunkers. i. Hasty Ambush. For example, Hasty Ambush Left—After receiving the command, “Hasty Ambush Left!” from the Field Instructor, the recruit fire team will immediately face to the left, maintaining their proper dispersion, and lay down in the prone behind available cover and/or concealment. On order from the FI, the team leader will either initiate the ambush and assault through the kill zone designated by the red target silhouettes to a FI designated limit of advance or simply resume their movement along route red at the discretion of the Field Instructor. ii. Break Contact. In this drill, the FIs would simply give the command, “Break Contact, ___ meters, ___ O’clock!” The fire team will recover as directed by the field instructor. (6) Near Ambush/Bunkers: This station shall be manned by two Drill Instructors that will position themselves one on each bunker, and two Field Instructors that will be at the top of the draw instructing recruits on their Reaction to Near Ambush Drill. Once the fire team comes within 50 meters of the bunker, the Drill Instructors shall activate the pneumatic mortars and machineguns to symbolize a near ambush. The fire team shall execute a React to Near Ambush Drill and assault through the enemy bunkers at the end of the Lanes 1, 2, or 3, respectively. Recruits will use the “CNA” ditty. The preparatory command is “Contact Front”, the command of execution is “Near Ambush”, the response ditty is “Assault Through!” Recruits will assault all the C-20-A-5 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 way through the bunkers to the Limit of Advance (LOA) represented by the far side of the gravel road. (7) LOA: The Limit of Advance is represented by the far side of the gravel road. One Field Instructor assisted by one Drill Instructor will critique the React to Near Ambush Drill and then send the recruits back to the bleachers along the 501 road for accountability. c.
Radios. (1)
The safety net will be Channel Four (4).
Drill Instructor carry one Sabre radio on Channel 1
(2) RSO will carry one Sabre on Channel 1 and Motorola on Channel 12 (3) OIC will carry 1 Sabre on Channel 1 and Motorola on Channel 12 (4)
Field Instructors will carry one Motorola on Channel 1
d. Chemlights. Route Green will be marked with Green Chemlights to Checkpoint 8 which will have a Red Chemlights. e. Corpsman Support. The Corpsman and safety vehicle will be located at the LOA. (501 Road). f. Aerial Flares. Recruits will be reminded during their brief to take appropriate individual actions upon contact with aerial flares. Fire Danger Rating (FDR) permitting, the RSO shall ensure that aerial flares (L312 WSP or M203 variants) are used intermittently in a safe fashion. The RSO may choose to direct that these flares be shot over the burned-out impact area to further mitigate the risk of fire. g. Minimum event manning requirements.
C2 Responsibility 20 NIGHT FIRE TEAM PATROL 20A Review Circles 20B LOD 20C Route Green 20D Checkpoint 8 20E IA Drill Box 20F Near Ambush 20G Near Ambush Bunker Operator 20H LOA (Gravel Road) 20I Line Out on R501 Road C-20-A-6 UNCLASSIFIED
RTR Company 9 Total 2 0 1 0 1 0 2 2 1
FWTCo 10 Total 1 1 1 1 2 2 0 1 1
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 TAB B (TEAM LEADERS PATROL ORDER) TO APPENDIX 20 (NIGHT FIRE TEAM PATROL) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U)
TEAM LEADER’S NIGHT FIRE TEAM PATROL ORDER
PURPOSE: To provide recruits with an example of a professionally conducted patrol order that facilitates the conduct of their satellite security patrol.
C-20-B-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 NIGHT FIRETEAM PATROL ORDER INSTRUCTOR’S NOTE FRAG ORDER WILL BE READ BY A FIELD INSTRUCTOR AS IF HE WERE THE FIRE TEAM LEADER. THE INSTRUCTOR WILL POINT OUT KEY TERRAIN FEATURES UTILIZING THE TERRAIN MODEL.
OVERVIEW: Recruits will be seated in the bleacher, in their assigned fire team order. A Field Instructor will give the following brief as if he were the recruits’ Fire Team Leader. The Field Instructor will make sure that he uses the terrain model to show the recruits their location, their patrol route and all known check points. After the Field Instructor is done with the brief and answered all the questions, the RSO will give a safety brief and then the Drill Instructors will get the recruits out of the bleachers and get them ready for the review circles. The course will start in accordance with the guidance given in Tab A to the Night Fire Team Patrol.
ORIENTATION: THIS WAY IS NORTH. OUR PLATOON IS CURRENTLY IN A DEFENSIVE POSITION HERE AT THE 501 BLEACHERS/FIRM BASE. THIS IS 501 ROAD, ROUTE GREEN, THIS IS ROUTE RED, AND THIS IS CHECKPOINT 8.
C-20-B-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 1.
SITUATION: a. ENEMY: There have been individual and team-size elements scouting our defense perimeter in the vicinity of 501 Road. The insurgents are believed to be linked to Al Qaeda. They were last seen wearing civilian clothing and are rumored to be concealing AK-47’s and RPG’s under their man-dresses. The enemy is expected to fight when attacked in an attempt to cause maximum casualties on friendly forces. They have been using farm bunkers to stage their attacks. b. FRIENDLY: Our squad has been tasked to conduct a security patrol in order to deny the enemy access to our platoon firm base and prevent them from ambushing friendly units as they were exiting friendly lines. Our squad leader will be traveling with the other two fire teams along Route Red. If we are hit, they will attempt to reinforce us if possible; we will do the same for them. We have a platoon QRF back at the R501 Firm Base on 15 minutes alert.
2. MISSION: OUR FIRE TEAM’S MISSION IS TO CUNDUCT A SATELITE SECURITY PATROL FORWARD OF FRIENDLY LINES IN ORDER TO DECEIVE THE ENEMY AS TO THE NATURE OF OUR SQUADS PATROLLING ROUTES. MISSION HAS PRIORITY. 3. EXECUTION: a. Fire Team Leader’s Intent. To conduct local security patrol to confuse the enemy as to where the other two fire teams of our squad are patrolling in relation to us and thereby achieve a measure of force protection. b. Scheme of maneuver. Our squad (-) (notional) will conduct a local security patrol along Route Red with our fire team protecting their flank as a satellite patrol along Route Green. On order, our fire team will depart from our rehearsal area here in the assembly area/firm base, cross the LOD, and move along Route Green. The fire team leader will choose the fire team formations most appropriate to the terrain and tactical situation. Our fire Team will move along Route Green to CHECK POINT 8 changing formations as necessary. At Checkpoint 8 we will link-up with our squad leader (Field Instructor) and he will re-direct our patrol along Route Red back to the firm base while the remainder of our squad (notional) heads back to the firm base along Route Green. We will debrief upon our return to the bleachers.
C-20-B-3 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 c.
Tasks.
(1) Rifleman: You will be the point man and navigate forward of the Line of Departure to Checkpoint 8 where we will link up with our Squad Leader (Field Instructor). (2) All: Ensure that you are looking to the fire team leader every three to five paces for hand-and-arm signals. Make sure that you pass these signals to each other. b.
Coordinating Instructions. (1) All other fire teams on the course and the other two fire teams in your squad that you are performing a satellite patrol for as briefed in this order are notional— that is, they are imaginary and do not exist for the play of the problem. (2) Recruits will wear helmet, LBV, and have their weapon at all times. (3) Recruits will conduct this exercise in their assigned fire teams. (4) The enemy periodically uses aerial flares to help him conduct night ambushes. If you encounter aerial illumination take appropriate individual actions and remain alert. (5) White engineer tape will represent Left and Right lateral limits on Route Red. (6) If you should come into contact with the enemy, you will use immediate actions in accordance with established SOPs. (7) After receiving this order, each fire team will be allowed to conduct rehearsals for fire team formations and IA drills. Field Instructors will supervise these rehearsals. The priority of rehearsals is: i. Hasty Ambush Drill ii. React to Indirect Fire followed by a Break Contact Drill iii. React to a Near Ambush iv. Fire Team Formations (8) After twenty minutes of rehearsals, the first fire teams will be allowed to move to the LOA while the other fire teams continue rehearsing. C-20-B-4 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 4.
ADMIN AND LOGISTICS: a. Any injuries will be treated with Self-Aid, Buddy Aid and Corpsman Aid. b. If you sustain an injury that cannot be moved, provide security and shout “Drill Instructor!” x3. c. If there is a fire on the range the exercise will cease and your fire team will move in the opposite direction to the nearest instructor or back to the bleachers. d. If you sustain casualties on the patrol the Casualty Collection Point is Range 501.
5.
COMMAND AND SIGNAL: a. The fire team leader will position himself to where he can best control the fire team. b. All recruits will look back three to five paces and will all repeat the hand-and-arm signal. c. If you find yourselves lost remain in place and keep trying to make contact by verbal commands, such as yelling Drill Instructor three times. The time is now_____, you have twenty minutes to conduct rehearsals.
C-20-B-5 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
C-20-B-6 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 APPENDIX 21 (NIGHT INFILTRATION COURSE) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) 1. (U) Purpose. The purpose of this document is to provide specific guidance on the conduct of Night Fire Team Patrol. 2. (U) General. Crucible Events 20 (Night Fire Team Patrol) and 21 (Range 505 Night Infiltration Course) are the two major night events for the Crucible. Each of these night events is designed to support up to 350 Recruits in either a “Series-” or “CompanyTrack.”
R. B. RICHARDSON Major, U. S. Marine Corps Commanding
C-21-1
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 NIGHT INFILTRATION COURSE Follow the Trail DI
Logs
Logs
Logs
Logs
Line Out SDI Jump in and Out of Trench
Jump in and Out of Trench
DI
Low Crawl
Low Crawl
High Step Wire
High Step Wire Skirmisher Trench
505 Box
Skirmisher Trench
FI Culverts
Culverts
Culverts
Culverts
High Step Wire Tower
Culverts
DI High Step Wire
FI FI
Dirt Berm DI
Dirt Berm
Bleachers
High Crawl
FI
DI
Dirt Berm
High Crawl
FI
Wall
Wall
High Step Wire
High Step Wire
Jump over Trench
DI
Jump over Trench
Tree Line
Tree Line
To “A” Draw FI
FI
Back Crawl
DI
Back Crawl
DI
FI
Start Point
PURPOSE: To provide recruits the opportunity to reinforce their proficiency in night individual movement skills (i.e. night walk, creeping, and reaction to aerial and ground illumination), use of cover, and fire team formations as they repetitively move from one covered position, through an obstacle, to the next covered position, in a collective fire team setting at night.
C-21-2
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 NIGHT INFILTRATION COURSE: 10 Min to Brief 5 Min to Rehearse 60 Min to Execute 10 min to Debrief 8 Field Instructors 9 Drill instructors OVERVIEW: Recruits will be seated in the bleachers by their assigned fire teams in accordance with timeline in Annex C of the Crucible SOP. A Field Instructor will give the following brief as if he were the recruits’ Fire Team Leader. After the Field Instructor is done with the brief and has answered all the questions, a safety brief will be given. Next, the Drill Instructors will get the recruits out of the bleachers and have the team leaders rehearse their plans while the primary instructor briefs the Drill Instructors on their roles during the practical application and then posts them according to the operational graphic provided below. The course will start only after the recruits have practiced their movement techniques and the instructors are posted throughout the course. 1.
SITUATION.
ENEMY. Intelligence reports that the enemy has established various obstacles including a trench line, defensive wire, and several earthen obstacles all along two perimeters: a listening post and the main headquarters 500 meters away from the listening post which is on a key piece of terrain. FRIENDLY. Your platoon has been tasked with conducting a raid on enemy positions at night and has moved up to within five miles of the enemy by AAVs. The remainder of your platoon is moving to their assault position. It’s dark out and your fire team just dismounted its own AAV and has been patrolling for some time now towards its separate objective. You believe you are getting close to the enemy positions now. Approximately three personnel are expected to be manning the enemy listening post to your front. 2. MISSION. ON ORDER, YOUR FIRE TEAM WILL INFILTRATE THE ENEMY’S DEFENSES USING HAND-AND-ARM SIGNALS WHILE MOVING IN A WEDGE FORMATION IN ORDER TO SILENCE THE ENEMY’S LISTENING POST AND ALLOW THE REMAINDER OF YOUR PLATOON TO SUCCESSFULLY RAID THE ENEMY HEADQUARTERS BY SUPRISE. 3.
EXECUTION (CONCEPT OF OPERATIONS) a. Depart the AAV’s and bring your fire team online C-21-3
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 with the white ammo cans. b. The fire team leader will account for his entire team and then will give the signal for his team to continue to patrol using hand-and-arm signals in a wedge formation. c. As the fire teams encounter obstacles, they will use the proper night movement techniques to negotiate each obstacle in a stealthy manner while other individuals of the fire team provide cover for them. d. Recruits will check for booby traps at the wall using the bump and feel method. They will go over the bulkhead keeping a low profile and high crawl under wire. e. The enemy has been known to periodically use illumination flares as part of his defensive plan. If this happens, recruits will perform the proper individual immediate actions upon aerial illumination (i.e. Keep the dominant eye closed and quietly get to the prone and remain still before the illumination pops). f. Maintain your proper dispersion between each member of the fire team—don’t bunch up. All other recruit fire teams on the course are notional. g. Fire teams will not assault the objective. After stealthfully infiltrating the course and having passed the last trench line, recruits will “silence the enemy” by simulating a bayonet strike on the red silhouette targets at the end of the course.
INSTRUCTOR NOTES: 1) Start recruit fire teams on opposite and maintain wide dispersion between infiltrate. 2) Allow the recruits an opportunity to 3) Do not rush the recruits through the
ends of the course the teams trying to ask questions. course.
4. EQUIPMENT. You will wear your helmet, flak jacket, LBV, black gloves, hearing protection and maintain control of your service rifle (Condition 3). 5. SAFETY/RULES. rules apply:
While negotiating this course, the following
a. Recruits will execute the course utilizing hand-and-arm C-21-4
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 signals. b. Do not split up; stay together as a fire team. c. Do not attempt to go around the obstacles. d. All equipment must be maintained with nothing left behind f. After silencing the enemy listening post, fire teams will proceed to a point designated by their instructors until the remaining teams have completed the course. g. Remember, safety is paramount. 6. PLANNING. Recruits take 5 minutes to rehearse Night individual movement techniques (i.e. Night Walk, Creeping Method, Reaction to Aerial and Ground Illumination) and rehearse their team movement. 7.
AFTER ACTION REVIEW a. ESTABLISH WHAT HAPPENED: 1. What was the mission? 2. What was the plan? 3. Did teammates provide cover for each other when negotiating obstacles? 4. Did the recruits get down and close their nondominate eye when illumination was used? 5. Did recruits maintain stealth and dispersion? b. HOW SHOULD THE TASK BE DONE DIFFERENTLY NEXT TIME: 1. What would you do differently, if you were to do this obstacle again? 2. What did you learn from this obstacle that you could apply in other situations, either in your future as a Marine or in other aspects of your life?
C-21-5
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
MINIMUM EVENT MANNING REQUIREMENTS RTR Company C2 Responsibility 21 21A 21B 21C 21D 21E 21F 21G 21H 21I 21J 21K 21L
NIGHT INFILTRATION: R505 AAVs Between AAVs and Wire Wire First Trench Line Wall Crawl Under Wire Berm Culverts Trench Between Logs and Obj Line Out/Bleachers Tower NCO
C-21-6
9 Total
FWTCo 8 Total
2 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
C-21-7
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNCLASSIFIED WFTBn O P 1513.8 APPENDIX 22 (REAPER 10-MILE HIKE) TO ANNEX C (OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) (U) REFERENCES (a) MCRP 3-02A 1. (U) Purpose. To establish uniform policy and procedures for the conduct of the Reaper 10-Mile Conditioning Hike at the conclusion of the Crucible. 2. (U) Situation. While aboard Edson Range, recruits will conduct several conditioning hikes of increasing distance and pace in order to improve the recruit’s mental and physical conditioning and overall preparation for the School of Infantry and service with the Operating Forces. Before the Reaper 10-Mile Crucible Hike, recruits will have completed several 3-mile hikes to and from the bivouac areas in addition to two dedicated threemile, one five-, and one eight-mile conditioning hikes at Edson Range. 3. (U) Mission. Conduct the Reaper 10-Mile Hike as the culmination of the Crucible and the last part of a progressive hike program aboard Edson Range. 4.
(U) Execution.
a. (U) Concept of Operations. The Reaper 10-Mile Hike will be conducted in three phases: Preparation and Coordination Phase (between recruit training companies and WFTBN S-3), Conduct Phase, and the Recovery Phase on the 31 Area Parade Deck with a foot check of recruits. b.
Tasks. (1) (U) Recruit Training Companies.
(a) (U) During the conduct of the hike, the recruit companies will coordinate with Range Control and WFTBn per paragraph 6b, Command and Signal, of this appendix. (b) (U) Recruit Companies are responsible for providing the Range Safety Officer (RSO), with a valid Camp Pendleton RSO Card, for the duration of the hike. (c) (U) The Recruit Companies are responsible for following the primary route provided in Tab B to this appendix. Any deviation from this route must be coordinated with the WFTBn S-3 prior to the event. (2) (U) Weapons and Field Training Battalion. a. (U) S-3. The WFTBn S-3 will coordinate with the recruit company on the conduct of 10-mile Reaper Hike. During working hours, the S-3 will monitor the progress of all hikes. During non-working hours, the 31 Area Guard, call sign “Phoenix”, will monitor the progress of all hikes for the Battalion. b.
(U) S-4.
The logistical and communications requirements C-22-1
UNCLASSIFIED WFTBn O P 1513.8 for the 10-mile Reaper Hike are covered under Paragraphs 5 and 6 in this appendix. b. (U) 31 Area Clinic. The 31 Area Clinic will ensure that company corpsmen are present for the conduct of the hike per the training schedule. c. (U) Coordinating Instructions. (1) (U) Edson Raider PME.
See Tab A to this Appendix.
(2) (U) Routes. See Tab B to this Appendix for checkpoints and operational graphics of routes. The WFTBn S-3 maintains a series of approved routes for each scheduled hike. Training companies will restrict their hikes to approved routes only. When approved routes are not available due to the activity of other units or adverse weather conditions, WFTBN will coordinate with Range Control and designate an alternate route. No deviation from the designated route is permitted without approval from the Commanding Officer, Weapons and Field Training Battalion as coordinated with his Operations Officer. (3) (U) Hike Brief.
See Tab C to this Appendix.
(4) (U) Pace. Company commanders will exercise their judgment as to the speed of the hike as conditions dictate. A pace of 2.5 to 3.0 miles per hour is the target pace, per the Recruit SOP. Time, not distance, takes priority. (5) (U) Reducing the “Accordion Effect.” The lead platoon will slowly accelerate after halts and crossing obstacles in order to prevent trailing elements from accelerating beyond the prescribed rate. Since some accordion effect is inevitable, the order of march will be rotated after each halt to prevent rear units from becoming excessively fatigued. (6) (U) Halts. Halts are mandatory and taken at regular intervals to rest personnel and adjust loads. An initial five-minute halt will be taken after the first 10-15 minutes of marching, specifically for gear adjustment. Thereafter, a halt of at least ten minutes will be taken for every fifty minutes of marching regardless of distance covered. Halt time begins after the last element in the column has stopped. (7) (U) Actions at Halts. At the halt signal, recruits will move to the side of the road, staying within the immediate vicinity of their unit. Recruits will remove their packs (if carried), helmets and flaks (if worn), and sit. DIs will inspect recruits and supervise the distribution and consumption of water. Corpsman will administer medical treatment, as required. These measures do not apply to the initial five-minute halt. (8) (U) Sock change. Sock change is mandatory for all hike participants (recruits and Marines) on the five, eight, and ten-mile hikes. The company commander will designate a specific halt for the sock change to take place and the entire company will change socks at C-22-2
UNCLASSIFIED WFTBn O P 1513.8 the same time. Socks will be changed at least once during the five, eight, and ten mile hikes. (9) (U) Stretching. The company commander will ensure that all hike participants conduct stretching exercises prior to stepping off. Specific stretching exercises are designated on the RTR-issued stretching cards. The stretching will not be conducted while the pack or other gear is worn. (10) (U) Uniform for company staff. Every effort will be made for uniformity between the recruits and the training company staff, with the following exceptions: officers will wear soft covers on the three-mile hike and Kevlar helmets for the five, eight, and ten mile hikes. DI’s will wear campaign covers for all hikes. 5. (U) Administration and Logistics. 5.
(U) Logistics.
a. (U) Gear Packing Instructions. See Annex D to this Reaper Hike Gear List and packing instructions. Commanders each recruit’s equipment is inspected by a Drill Instructor each conditioning hike. This inspection will focus on fit, proper assembly and wear, and uniformity.
order for the will ensure (DI) prior to serviceability,
b. (U) Fruit and refreshments. (1) 3-ton with water bull will be staged in the Range 130 (MOUT Town) parking lot for the Reaper Hike to provide water refill and refreshments. See Annex D, Appendix 6, paragraph 4 for further details. 6.
(U) Command and Signal.
a. (U) Command. This order is applicable to all recruit trainers and all personnel that come in contact with recruits. Commanders will abide by this SOP during the execution of recruit hikes. b. (U) Signal. See Annex K for Communications instructions. Recruit Company Commanders are responsible for maintaining radio communications with Range Control, call sign “Long Rifle”, at all times during this hike. Communications will also be maintained at all times with the WFTBN S-3. The call sign “S-3” will be used during normal working hours; call sign “Phoenix”, for the 31A Guard, will be used before and after normal working hours and on Saturdays. No hike will begin without verbal permission from WFTBn S-3; the company must report number of recruits, number of weapons, RSO information, and corpsman information. During non-working hours, the recruit company will report the above information to “Phoenix.” The company will also report all checkpoints, Tab B, as they are achieved. Communications will also be maintained independently between the unit headquarters, the front and rear of the company, and the safety vehicle.
C-22-3
UNCLASSIFIED WFTBn O P 1513.8 Tabs: a. Edson Raider PME Materials b. Route Checkpoints and Route Overlay c. Hike Brief
OFFICIAL:
gA jtÄá{
W. T. WALSH Captain, USMC S-3, WFTBN
C-22-4
UNCLASSIFIED WFTBn O P 1513.8 TAB A (EDSON’S RAIDERS PME) TO APPENDIX 22 (REAPER 10-MILE HIKE) TO ANNEX C (OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U)
For extraordinary heroism and conspicuous intrepidity above and beyond the call of duty as Commanding Officer of the 1st Marine Raider Battalion, with Parachute Battalion attached, during action against enemy Japanese forces in the Solomon Islands on the night of 1314 September 1942. After the airfield on Guadalcanal had been seized from the enemy on 8 August, Col. Edson, with a force of 800 men, was assigned to the occupation and defense of a ridge dominating the jungle on either side of the airport. Facing a formidable Japanese attack which, augmented by infiltration, had crashed through our front lines, he, by skillful handling of his troops, successfully withdrew his forward units to a reserve line with minimum casualties. When the enemy, in a subsequent series of violent assaults, engaged our force in desperate hand-to-hand combat with bayonets, rifles, pistols, grenades, and knives, Col. Edson, although continuously exposed to hostile fire throughout the night, personally directed defense of the reserve position against a fanatical foe of greatly superior numbers. By his astute leadership and gallant devotion to duty, he enabled his men, despite severe losses, to cling tenaciously to their position on the vital ridge, thereby retaining command not only of the Guadalcanal airfield, but also of the 1st Division's entire offensive installations in the surrounding area. DISCUSSION/PME POINTS: At the top of the reaper, the recruit companies will split up by platoon, take a spot surrounding one of the Medal of Honor citations for General Edson, and the SDI from each platoon will read the Medal of Honor Citation. The SDI will spend 5-10 minutes discussing core values, before the platoon’s reform for the remainder of the hike.
C-22-A-1
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNCLASSIFIED WFTBn O P 1513.8 TAB B (CHECK POINTS & ROUTE OVERLAY) TO APPENDIX 22 (REAPER 10-MILE HIKE) TO ANNEX C (OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) ROUTE OVERLAY
OVERLAY FORM (UPDATED 05 JANUARY 06)
CP 12 609847
CP10 614853
CP8 618847
CP6 605835
CP 14 602824
START 608821
CP18 599819 CP2 604810
CP16 595814
END 607804
CAMP PENDLETON MIM (ELECTRONIC – SCALE VARIES) UNIT: WFTBN START TIME: VARIES EVENT: HIKE ROUTE # 10 END TIME: VARIES TRAINING OSCAR-1 OSCAR-2 AREAS/FACILITIES REQUESTED: REMARKS: CRUCIBLE HIKE ROUTE (primary) is used by Recruit Companies normally on Fridays unless schedule is modified due to holidays. Check Points are also designated Ambulance Pick-Up Points. POC: CAPT W. T. WALSH PHONE # 763-1279 DATE OF EVENT: VARIES FILL FORM IN COMPLETELY – PROVIDE A MINIMUM OF 2 GRID REFERENCES – YOUR START AND END POINTS AND DIRECTION OF MOVEMENT
C-22-B-1
UNCLASSIFIED WFTBn O P 1513.8
OVERLAY FORM (UPDATED 05 JANUARY 06)
CP10 614853 CP 12 609847 CP6 605835 CP8 618847 CP14 602824
CP18 599819
CP4 608821
CP2 604810
80
START/END 607804
CAMP PENDLETON MIM (ELECTRONIC – SCALE VARIES) UNIT: WFTBN EVENT: HIKE ROUTE # 11 START TIME: VARIES END TIME: VARIES TRAINING OSCAR-1 OSCAR-2 AREAS/FACILITIES REQUESTED: REMARKS: CRUCIBLE HIKE ROUTE (alternate) is used by Recruit Companies normally on Fridays unless schedule is modified due to holidays. Check Points are also designated Ambulance Pick-Up Points. POC: CAPT W. T. WALSH PHONE # 763-1279 DATE OF EVENT: VARIES FILL FORM IN COMPLETELY – PROVIDE A MINIMUM OF 2 GRID REFERENCES – YOUR START AND END POINTS AND DIRECTION OF MOVEMENT
C-22-B-2
UNCLASSIFIED WFTBn O P 1513.8 CHECKPOINTS 1.
The following check points are the only checkpoints approved by WFTBN.
Check Pt. 1
Grid 60761 80450
3
61193 80201
5
62703 81354
7
63095 80580
9
63563 79901
11
63566 78891
13
62820 78822
15
62105 80146
17
60479 79282
19
60765 77841
21
61846 77650
2
60495 81095
4
60879 82122
6
6065383589
8
61801 84719
10
61450 85384
12
60966 84740
14
60292 82413
16
59510 81458
18
59966 81964
Lat/Long N33,26.231 W117,42.128 N33,15.607 W117,24.998 N33,16.234 W117,24.029 N33,15.816 W117,23.774 N33,15.570 W117,23.740 N33,14.904 W117,23.467 N33,14.866 W117,23.950 N33,15.578 W117,24.415 N33,25.179 W117,42.426 N33,14.330 W117,25.271 N33,14.229 W117,24.572 N33,16.089 W117,25.451 N33,16.645 W117,25.205 N33,17.439 W117,25.355 N33,18.050 W117,24.624 N33,18.414 W117,24.846 N33,18.062 W117,25.157 N33,16.803 W117,25.585 N33,16.283 W117,26.087 N33,16.560 W117,25.794
Terrain Feature WFTBN Parade Deck Road Junct. enroute to 505 Rd Junct Concertina Wire Road Road Junction near Oscar-1 Bivouc Road Junction Mass 3 Road 12 Stall Road Junction Start of Delta Finger Road Junction Alpha Draw Tomato Field Entrance West Side I-5 MCCTSA Road Junction South End Tomato Field Road Junction South End Tomato Field Gate Road Junction Pistol Range/501 Road Range 501 Tower Road Junction Aliso Canyon And Backside Edson Ridge MOUT Town Parking Lot Top Of Reaper Firebreak Edson Ridge Old Crucible Ceremony Area Intersection Access Aliso Canyon and Range 501 Access Road Intersection Aliso Canyon and South Pistol Range Access Road Intersection Aliso Canyon and Pistol Range Impact area North Access Road
C-22-B-3
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNCLASSIFIED WFTBn O P 1513.8 TAB C (HIKE BRIEF) TO APPENDIX 22 (REAPER 10-MILE HIKE) TO ANNEX C (OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) CONDITIONING HIKE BRIEF 1. The Company Commander, Series Commander or Series Gunnery Sergeant will issue a verbal hike brief to all unit leaders, Corpsmen and drivers prior to a conditioning hike. At a minimum, the following items will be discussed. a.
The distance and route of the conditioning hike.
b.
The location of each Corpsman.
c.
The location of the safety vehicles.
d.
Medevac Procedures.
e.
The location of Check Points.
f.
When scheduled halts will occur.
g.
The initial order of march and subsequent changes.
h. Communications channels for the WFTBN S-3, as well as those internal to the company. i. Identify the Range Safety Officer (RSO) for the hike. The RSO must have a valid Camp Pendleton RSO card and coordinate with WFTBn S-3 prior to stepping off on the hike.
C-22-C-1
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 APPENDIX 23 (CRUCIBLE ROUTE MATRIX/TIMELINE) TO ANNEX C (CRUCIBLE OPERATIONS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) 1.
(U) Purpose. The purpose of this document is to provide a training schedule matrix for each day of the Crucible to be used at the Crucible Operations Center and each Drill Instructor who leads a Crucible Squad.
2.
(U) General. The Crucible has a maximum capacity of 32 Crucible Squads of 24 recruits each. (Recruit training companies MAY use smaller Crucible Squad sizes, as long as the fire teams remain intact—see Annex A to this SOP.) The recruit training company on “Series-Track” will have one Series start on the Range 505 side of the Oscar-1 Training Area while the other Series starts on the Range 501 side. During Company-Track, the recruit training company will coordinate with FWTCO staff as to what side the company will start on. (However, the recruit company will usually start on the Range 505 side during company-track unless there is a Recruiting Station Educator Workshop or other VIP visit.)
3.
(U) Crucible Squad Matrixes. Two Route Matrixes are supplied in this appendix for use by the Crucible Operations Center, Field Instructors, and Drill Instructors leading Crucible Squads. They are intended to serve as a general guide and timeline to each squad’s progression through the Crucible. Lead and Follow Series will rotate schedules on the second day.
OFFICIAL:
R. B. Richardson R. B. RICHARDSON Major, USMC CO, FWTCO
10-Jun-06
C-23- 1
C-23-2
FOLLOW SERIES
COPELAND's FIRE TEAM ASLT COURSE
MOVEMENT
PE 3: MAP READING & CCC
MOVEMENT/ FLEX TIME
PE 2: IA DRILLS
CORE VALUES (ISMs)
MOVEMENT
NOONAN'S CASUALTY EVAC
JENKIN'S PINNACLE
MOVEMENT
REACTION COURSE #1 MEDICAL CHECK
REACTION COURSE 2,4,6,8,10,12
REACTION COURSE 3,5,7,8,9,11
CORE VALUES (WHO AM I?)
MOVEMENT
GARCIA'S ENGAGEMENT
BASILONE'S CHALLENGE
MOVEMENT
CUKELA'S WALL
GONZALEZ'S CROSSING
MOVEMENT
BAC JANSON'S THRUST
MOVEMENT
MINUTES
45
10
45
20
45
45
20
35
35
25
20
120
120
25
25
35
35
15
35
35
20
75
15
1345 1145 1515 1255
1410 1410 1540 1540
1435 1510 1605 1640
1510 1435 1640 1605
1545 1545 1715 1715
1600 1635 1730 1805
1635 1600 1805 1730
1710 1710 1840 1840
1730 1730 0600 0600
N/A N/A 0715 0715
1645 1425 1810 1550
1710 1710 1835 1835
1735 1810 0600 0635
1810 1735 0635 0600
1845 1845 0710 0710
0600 0635 0725 0800
0635 0600 0800 0725
0710 0710 0835 0835
0730 0730 0855 0855
0845 0845 1010 1010
0910 0945 1045 1120
0945 0910 1120 1045
1020 1020 1155 1155
1035 1110 1210 1245
1110 1035 1245 1210
1145 1145 1320 1320
1205 1205 1340 1340
1320 1320 1455 1455
1435 1400 1540 1505
1510 1510 1615 1615
1530 1530 1635 1635
1645 1645 1750 1750
SQD 17 18 19 20 SQD 21 22 23 24 SQD 25 26 27 28 SQD 29 30 31 32
START TIMES 1125 1345 1255 1515
0600 0600 0730 0730
0645 0645 0815 0815
0655 0655 0825 0825
0740 0740 0910 0910
0800 0800 0930 0930
0845 0845 1015 1015
0930 0930 1100 1100
0950 1025 1120 1155
1025 0950 1155 1120
1100 1100 1230 1230
0900 0900 1025 1025
0945 0945 1110 1110
0955 0955 1120 1120
1040 1040 1205 1205
1100 1100 1225 1225
1145 1145 1310 1310
1230 1230 1355 1355
1250 1325 1415 1450
1325 1250 1450 1415
1400 1400 1525 1525
1425 1645 1550 1810
1445
1335 1135 1510 1510
1420 1420 1555 1555
1430 1430 1605 1605
1515 1515 1650 1650
1535 1535 1710 1710
1620 1620 1755 1755
1705 1705 1840 1840
1725 1800 0600 0635
1800 1725 0635 0600
1835 1835 0710 0710
0600 0820 0735 0955
0620
1700 1700 1805 1805
1745 1745 1850 1850
1755 1755 0600 0600
1840 1840 0645 0645
0600 0600 0705 0705
0645 0645 0750 0750
0730 0730 0835 0835
0750 0825 0855 0930
0825 0750 0930 0855
0900 0900 1005 1005
0925 1145 1030 1250
0945
LEAD SERIES
DAY'S DEFENSE / TEAM SHOOT
BALLARD'S SUCCESS
NIGHT PATROL REHEARSAL
MOVEMENT
CONFIDENCE COURSE: STAIRWAY TO HEAVEN
CONFIDENCE COURSE: BAPTISTA'S WEAVER
HANSEN'S ENCOUNTER/ WPNS MAINT
MINUTES
70
20
45
30
50
SQD 1 2 3 4 SQD 5 6 7 8 SQD 9 10 11 12 SQD 13 14 15 16
IAM'S DRIVE MOVEMENT PUGIL STICKS
60
5
CONFIDENCE CONFIDENCE COURSE: SKY COURSE: TWO-LINE BRIDGE SCRAPER 35
35
50
START TIMES 1150 1100 1335 1245
1145 1145 1315 1315
1445 1610 1610
0620 0755 0755
0820 0600 0955 0735
0845 0845 1020 1020
1050
1145 0925 1250 1030
1210 1210 1315 1315
1235 1310 1340 1415
1310 1235 1415 1340
1345 1345 1450 1450
1400 1435 1505 1540
MOVEMENT
COMPASS COURSE
HOWARD'S ASSAULT
OBSTACLE COURSE
BORDELON'S ASSAULT
PE 1: H&A SINGNALS, FORMATIONS, IND MVMNT
WPNS MAINT (Flex Time)
3 MILE HIKE/MED CHECK + WPNS MAINT
40
30
45
35
35
45
45
45
60
1240 1240 1425 1425
1320 1320 1505 1505
1350 1350 1535 1535
1435 1435 1620 1620
1510 1510 1655 1655
1545 1545 1730 1730
1630 1630 1815 1815
1715 1715 0600 0600
1800 1800 0645 0645
0945 1050
0600 0600 0745 0745
0710 0710 0855 0855
0730 0730 0915 0915
0830 0830 1015 1015
0835 0835 1020 1020
0920 0920 1105 1105
0950 1025 1135 1210
1025 0950 1210 1135
1100 1150 1245 1335
0915 0915 1025 1025
1025 1025 1135 1135
1045 1045 1155 1155
1145 1145 1255 1255
1150 1150 1300 1300
1235 1235 1345 1345
1305 1340 1415 1450
1340 1305 1450 1415
1415 1505 1525 1615
1505 1415 1615 1525
1555 1555 1705 1705
1635 1635 1745 1745
1705 1705 1815 1815
1750 1750 0600 0600
1825 1825 0635 0635
0600 0600 0710 0710
0645 0645 0755 0755
0730 0730 0840 0840
0815 0815 0925 0925
1140 1140 1220 1220
1250 1250 1330 1330
1310 1310 1350 1350
1410 1410 1450 1450
1415 1415 1455 1455
1500 1500 1540 1540
1530 1605 1610 1645
1605 1530 1645 1610
1640 1730 1720 1810
1730 1640 1810 1720
1820 1820 0600 0600
0600 0600 0640 0640
0630 0630 0710 0710
0715 0715 0755 0755
0750 0750 0830 0830
0825 0825 0905 0905
0910 0910 0950 0950
0955 0955 1035 1035
1040 1040 1120 1120
1400 1400 1510 1510
1510 1510 1620 1620
1530 1530 1640 1640
1630 1630 1740 1740
1635 1635 1745 1745
1720 1720 1830 1830
1750 1825 0600 0635
1825 1750 0635 0600
0600 0650 0710 0800
0650 0600 0800 0710
0740 0740 0850 0850
0820 0820 0930 0930
0850 0850 1000 1000
0935 0935 1045 1045
1010 1010 1120 1120
1045 1045 1155 1155
1130 1130 1240 1240
1215 1215 1325 1325
1300 1300 1410 1410
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 ANNEX D (LOGISTICS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) (U) REFERENCES: (a) (b) (c)
MCRD Parris Island Crucible SOP Recruit Training (Male) POI MCRD San Diego DepO P1510.30L (Recruit Training SOP)
(U) TIME ZONE:
Uniform
1. (U) Purpose. The purpose of this Annex is to provide detailed instruction on logistical support in support of the Crucible aboard Edson Range. 2. (U) General. Because of the standardized nature of the Crucible training package, logistics support processes are packaged the same for each training company. Special logistics needs or necessary deviations from the standard support can be requested through the Weapons and Field Training Battalion S-4 (Logistics) Office. Standard support provided to each company is broken down by commodity in a series of appendices as follows: a. (U) Gear and equipment support will be provided as per Appendix 1. b. (U) Subsistence support will be provided as per Appendix 2. c. (U) Sanitation support will be provided as per Appendix 3. d. (U) Ammunition and pyrotechnics support will be provided as per Appendix 4. e. (U) Billeting support will be provided as per Appendix 5. f. (U) Vehicle support will be provided as per Appendix 6. g. (U) Supply support will be provided as per Appendix 7. h. (U) A logistics map is provided below.
D-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 H EAD
RANGE 501 MED EVAC PT #2 MED EVAC PT #9 RANGE131
CONFIDENCE CHAMBER
PE 1 0 -12
CRUCIBLE LOGISTICAL SUPPORT
MED EVAC PT #12
H DAY/NIGHT PATROL
PE 7-9
WA L
GONZALES X’ING JANSEN’S THRUST BAC
O’COURSE BORDELONS ASLT
F IR E TEAM AS S C O U R S E (R 5 0 5 )
D
L E V IL L E S H O W A R D S A SS A U L T
P M I S HAC K
THE ‘CIRCLES’
C
LA ’S
T# 1
L
PE 4-6
RANGES B
CU KE
DE VA CP
12 STALL
PISTOL RANGE
C M R
ME
RANGE 505
G A R C IA ’ S B R A V OE N G A G E M EN T D RA W
C H EC K P O IN T 8
EDSON RANGE
NOONAN’S EVAC
J E N K I N ’ S P IN N A C L E
MED EVAC PT #21 EDSON’S RIDGE
BLEACHERS
C HB A S I L A L L ON EN E NI GE RE AP ER
BLEACHERS
UPPER SHELF
MI
IV E ’S D R IA M
H EAD
DAY’S DEFENSE(TEAM SHOOT) BA LL AR D’ S SUC CE SS
N
MED EVAC PT #3
LEGEND MED EVAC PTS
ARMORY H EN AN S O CO U N ’S N TE RS
PARADE DECK
MOTOR T
H
DUMPSTERS
MED EVAC PT #6
2L
SUPPLY
IN
PE 1-3
MEDICAL
G
BN CP
D-2 UNCLASSIFIED
S NC O B ARR AC KS
BARRACKS
C RUC IBLE C P
IS TA ’S BA PT N GE LE C HA LAV ER ) STAIRWAY TO E W ( HEAVEN
3 160 3
3 161 2
3 161 3
3 161 4
SKY SCRAPER
M E D EV A C P T # 7 M C TS SA B C H A C C ES S
RD EB
CONFIDENCE COURSE
MED EVAC PT #5
WATER BULL
MAIN GATE
BIVOUAC SITE PORT-O-JOHNS
H
HELO PAD HCWD/O POINT PHONE
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
MAJOR LOGISTICS NODES
RANGE 501 BIVOUAC
UPPER SHELF BIVOUAC
RANGE 505
12-STALL
#12
#2
5
#3
#1
NONE
1
1
1
1
5
7
1
1
H
CONFIDENCE COURSE
NONE
MAIN
MAIN
7
8
NONE 1 (1) 725-2760
CMR 1 2
15
H
NONE
NONE
1 NONE
5
H
NONE
NONE
1
NONE
NONE
H
1
1
NONE
NONE
8
8
NONE 1 (1) 725-2382
B RANGE
“C” RANGE
“D” RANGE
3
2
2
21
15
12
(1) 725-2460
(1) 725-2994
BASILONE CHALLENGE
LEVILLE’S COMP COURSE
1
1
5
3
D-3 UNCLASSIFIED
(1) 725-2743
NONE
(1) 725-2753
H
NONE 1 NONE
JANSEN’ S THRUST BAC 1
3
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
OFFICIAL
Benjamin Brown B. BROWN Major, USMC S-4, WFTBN
APPENDIXES -Appendix 1 -Appendix 2 -Appendix 3 -Appendix 4 -Appendix 5 -Appendix 6 -Appendix 7
— — – – – – -
Recruit Gear List Subsistence Sanitation Ammunition and Pyrotechnics Billeting Vehicles Supply
D-4 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 APPENDIX 1 (RECRUIT GEAR LIST) ANNEX D (LOGISTICS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) (U) REFERENCES: (a)
MCRD Parris Island Crucible SOP
(U) TIME ZONE:
Uniform
1. (U) Purpose. The purpose of this Appendix is to ensure coastal and inter-recruit symmetry with regards to the gear list that recruits are expected to bring to the field in order to conduct the Crucible and complete the 10-Mile Reaper Hike. This gear list matches the one contained in the reference and is consistent with original CMC guidance. 2. (U) Crucible Recruit Gear List. Utility Uniform (Worn) Day Pack: (Day 1 & 2 Events) Boots (Worn) 1 set of Poly Pros (Seasonal) Helmet w/Cover 3 pair of Socks from main pack Load Bearing Vest Gortex Top and Bottoms (Seasonal) 2 Canteens w/ Covers 1 MRE 1 Canteen Cup 1 Mouthpiece 2 Magazines 1 set Earplugs Rifle w/ Cleaning Gear 1 pair Black Leather Gloves Pack One 8-Point Cover 1 set of spare Utilities 1 First Aid Kit per Squad 2 set of Skivvies 1 Scrub Brush per Squad 5 pair of Socks Cammie Face Paint 8 Point Cover Black Leather Gloves Iso-Mat Poncho w/ Liner *(2 Ponchos in wet weather) E-Tool w/ Carrier Hygiene Gear Towel w/ Wash Cloth Foot Care Gear Flashlight Ear Plugs Sewing Kit Mouth Piece Seasonal Sleeping Bag w/ Waterproof Bag Shelter Half Complete (as issued) Gortex Top and Bottoms Polypro Top and Bottoms Glove Inserts Scrub Brush
D-1-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 *SEASONAL NOTE: One extra poncho per recruit will be issued in wet weather when recruits are using their primary ponchos to make a poncho shelter. This extra poncho may be bulk signed on an as-needed basis. ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
R. B. RICHARDSON Major, U. S. Marine Corps Commanding
D-1-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 APPENDIX 2 (SUBSISTENCE) TO ANNEX D (LOGISTICS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) (U) REFERENCES: (a) MCRD San (b) MCB Camp Beverage (c) Regional
Diego DepO P1510.30L (Recruit Training SOP) Pendleton Food Service Memorandum 01-05 (Hot/Cold Support Procedures) Garrison Food Service Contract (RGFSC)
1. (U) General. For the purposes of the Crucible event, Weapons and Field Training Battalion along with the 31 Area Mess Hall personnel will be responsible with providing subsistence to the recruit training company. Generally, the recruit training company will submit their subsistence requests AT LEAST one working day before the beginning of the Crucible event to the WFTBn S-4. 2. (U) Water. Water is available throughout the Crucible event area in the form of waterbulls (See Annex D (Logistics), Appendix 6 (Vehicles)) and at the Range 501 and upper-shelf bivouac area heads. It is the recruit training company’s responsibility to ensure each recruit stays hydrated and regularly fills his canteens. Any requests for additional waterbulls, waterbull location changes, or emergency waterbull refills must be made through the WFTBn S-4 (or OOD for after hours emergencies). 3. (U) Meals-Ready-to-Eat (MREs). Each recruit training company will request (3) MREs per recruit for the Crucible event. The recruit training company should specify in their request when and where the MREs are to be delivered. Supply will only deliver MREs during working hours and does not split deliveries between buildings/locations. 4. (U) Hot/Cold wets (HCWs). All HCWs will be prepared in the 31 Area Mess Hall and delivered to the recruit training company by the WFTBn Motor Transportation section in accordance with Annex D (Logistics), Appendix 6 (Vehicles). HCW preparation and delivery is standard and automatic for the Crucible, however; the recruit training company will provide WFTBn S-4 a head count NLT one day prior to the start of the event (Tues, T-43). In accordance with references (b) and (c), HCW's will consist of the following: -Two Pieces of fruit per recruit. -16 ounces of Gatorade (cold wets) or chicken/beef broth (hot wets) per recruit. WFTBn will deliver the cold wet menu at all times unless the recruit training company requests otherwise in advance. A D-2-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 mixture of (8) ounces of Gatorade with (8) ounces of broth is authorized if desired but must be requested in advance. Any changes to the delivery schedule or delivery locations must be made in advance. 5. (U) Ice. Ice is provided in the 31 Area Mess Hall on a self serve/as needed basis. Coolers are available through the S-4. Generally, the recruit training company uses plastic trash bags to carry and deliver the ice. 6. (U) Warriors Breakfast. Following the Reaper 10-Mile Hike, recruit companies will conduct a foot check on the 31 Area parade deck with the support of corpsmen from the Branch Medical Clinic and then proceed to the 31 Area Mess Hall for the Warriors Breakfast. The meal is executed just like all other meals in the 31 Area Mess Hall, except for the menu and time change. During the Warriors Breakfast, recruits are allowed second helpings after the entire company has been served. ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
OFFICIAL
Benjamin Brown B. BROWN Major, USMC S-4, WFTBN
D-2-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 APPENDIX 3 (SANITATION) TO ANNEX D (LOGISTICS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) (U) REFERENCES: NONE 1. (U) General. Maintaining the police of billeting and training areas is critical to the health and discipline of the large recruit units operating within close proximity to each other. Sanitation and police responsibilities include port-a-john cleanliness, field head cleanliness, police of the billeting area, police of training areas particularly Crucible event sites, and garbage disposal. 2. Port-a-johns. Port-a-johns are located at the billeting site and throughout the training areas. Only human waste and toilet paper are allowed in the port-a-johns. Only urine is allowed in the port-a-john urinals. Recruit Company staff must ensure items such as MRE trash, T-shirts, and other garbage do not get placed in the port-a-johns. Such articles violate the disposal contract and can result in the contractor refusing to empty and clean the port-a-johns. The recruit training company is responsible for the cleanliness of the port-a-johns in their assigned bivouac/training areas. Problems with any port-a-johns, such as overflow or damage, need to be addressed to the WFTBN S-4 immediately. Port-a-john locations and numbers can be found in Annex D (Logistics), Appendix 9 (Logistics Map). 3. Field head. Two field heads, referred to locally as the “Million Dollar Heads,” is available for all Marines and recruits at the Range 501 and Upper-shelf billeting areas. Only human waste and toilet paper are allowed in the toilets. Only urine is allowed in the urinals. Sinks and showers should only be used for their intended purposes. Recruit Company staff must ensure items such as MRE trash, T-shirts, and other waste items do not get placed in the toilets or drains. Camp Pendleton facilities maintenance will refuse to do work on projects resulting from obvious abuse. Any field head problems, such as overflow or damage, need to be addressed to the WFTBN S-4 immediately. Recruit companies must make all reasonable efforts to clear drainage problems before reporting them for repair. These heads will be signed for by the Recruit Company each week after conducting a joint inspection of the facility with the designated FWTCO representative. 4. Billeting area police. Field Company personnel will sign over the Range 501 bivouac area to include the “Million Dollar Head” and all port-a-johns in the immediate area to the recruit company chief drill instructor on T-43 (Tues). A joint inspection of the area must be done to identify any existing problems prior to the recruit training company signing for the D-3-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 area. Upon completion of the Crucible on T-46 (Fri) and after the Warrior’s Breakfast, the recruit training company chief drill instructor will coordinate with FWTCO and report to the Range 501 bivouac site with an eight-recruit working party. A second joint inspection of the area will be conducted with discrepancies noted and eliminated as possible using the working party. Any serious facilities maintenance problems should be reported to the WFTBn S-4 as soon as possible. 5. Training area police. Field Company Instructors will ensure that each Crucible squad conducts a thorough police call of the Crucible obstacle/training area before stepping off to the next obstacle/training event. 6. Garbage disposal. Garbage should be bagged and bags should be tied as much as possible and dumpster lids closed to avoid pest infestation. Dumpsters are emptied on request to WFTBn S-4. It is the responsibility of both the recruit training company and FWTCo to notify the S-4 when dumpsters become full. Dumpsters that have become overfilled and cannot be shut must be reported to the WFTBn S-4 as soon as possible. For a listing of dumpster locations, consult Appendix 9 (Logistics Map) of this annex. ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
OFFICIAL
Benjamin Brown B. BROWN Major, USMC S-4, WFTBN
D-3-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 APPENDIX 4 (AMMUNITION DELIVERY MATRIX) ANNEX D (LOGISTICS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) CHANGE 2 dtd 24 July 2006 (U) REFERENCES: (a) (b)
Marine Corps Order 1510.89B (MCCS Volume 1) Recruit Training Program of Instruction
(U) TIME ZONE:
Uniform
1. (U) Purpose. The purpose of this appendix is to provide the Range OIC, RSO, and WFTBN S-4 (Ordnance) a schedule of what ammunition/ munitions will be delivered, and when, in support of Field Skills and Crucible Training. 2. (U) Company Track Ammunition Delivery Matrix. FIELD WEEK COMPANY TRACK
DAY
TRACK
MONDAY
COMPANY
NLT DELIVERY TIME
DELIVERY LOCATION
0600 0600
R501 R501
AMMO 8 TRACER-TRAINER (A358) RNDS PER RECRUIT 22 5.56mm (A064/2) LINK PER RCT
TUESDAY
COMPANY
0830 0830 1200
R505 R505 U S BLEACHERS
23 BLANKS (A080) PER RECRUIT 36 SMOKES (G982) CS TABS
WEDNESDAY
COMPANY
0700 0700
U S BLEACHERS U S BLEACHERS
25 BLANKS (A080) PER RECRUIT 16 ARTY SIMMS (L594)
WEDNESDAY NIGHT DRAWS
COMPANY
1630
R505
44 GRND TRIP ILL (L495) 19+ BOOBY TRAP FLASH (L598)
1300
CONF COURSE
10 BLANKS (A080) PER RECRUIT
CRUCIBLE WEEK COMPANY TRACK COMPANY TUESDAY WEDNESDAY
COMPANY
0600 1600
R501 R501
THURSDAY
COMPANY
0600 1600
OLD MACKIE’S PASSAGE
505 BOX
D-4-1 UNCLASSIFIED
5.56 BALL, 10 PER RECRUIT 20 L312 WSP 15 BLANKS (A080) PER RECRUIT 10 L598 SIM, FLASH BOOBYTRAP
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
3. (U) Series Track Ammunition Delivery Matrix. FIELD WEEK SERIES TRACK NLT DELIVERY TIME
DELIVERY LOCATION
LEAD LEAD
0600 0600
R501 R501
TUESDAY
LEAD LEAD LEAD
0830 0830 1200
R505 R505 U S BLEACHERS
23 BLANKS (A080) PER RECRUIT 36 SMOKES (G982) CS TABS
WEDNESDAY
LEAD LEAD FOLLOW
0700 0700 1200
U S BLEACHERS U S BLEACHERS U S BLEACHERS
25 BLANKS (A080) PER RECRUIT 16 ARTY SIMMS (L594) CS TABS
COMPANY COMPANY
1700
R505 R505
FOLLOW FOLLOW FOLLOW
0700
U S BLEACHERS U S BLEACHERS U S BLEACHERS
0900
CONF COURSE
DAY
SERIES
MONDAY
WEDNESDAY NIGHT DRAWS
FRIDAY
CRUCIBLE WEEK SERIES TRACK FOLLOW MONDAY
AMMO 8 TRACER-TRAINER (A358) RNDS PER RECRUIT 22 5.56mm (A064/2) LINK PER RCT
44 GRND TRIP ILL (L495) 19+ BOOBY TRAP FLASH (L598)
48 BLANKS (A080) PER RECRUIT 36 SMOKES (G982) 16 ARTY SIMMS (L594)
10 BLANKS (A080) PER RECRUIT 6 TRACER-TRAINER (A358) RNDS PER RECRUIT 20 5.56mm (A064) LINK PER RCT 10 BLANKS (A080) PER RECRUIT
TUESDAY
FOLLOW FOLLOW LEAD
0600 0600 1300
R501 R501 CONF COURSE
WEDNESDAY AM
LEAD FOLLOW
0600 0600
OLD MACKIE’S PASSAGE
5.56 BALL, 10 PER RECRUIT 15 BLANKS (A080) PER RECRUIT
LEAD
0600
OLD MACKIE’S PASSAGE
15 BLANKS (A080) PER RECRUIT
FOLLOW
0600
R501
LEAD FOLLOW LEAD FOLLOW
1600 1600 1600 1630
R501 505 BOX 505 BOX R501
THURSDAY AM WEDNESDAY NIGHT THURSDAY NIGHT
R501
D-4-2 UNCLASSIFIED
5.56 BALL, 10 PER RECRUIT 20 L312 WSP 10 L598 SIM, FLASH BOOBYTRAP 10 L598 SIM, FLASH BOOBYTRAP 20 L312 WSP
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 4. (U) Emergency Pyrotechnics. Range 501 will maintain one red smoke for emergency MEDEVAC LZ markings, cease fire, and to wave-off wayward aircraft. ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
R. B. RICHARDSON Major, U. S. Marine Corps Commanding
D-4-3 UNCLASSIFIED
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 APPENDIX 5 (BILLETING) TO ANNEX D (LOGISTICS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) 1. (U) General. Drill Instructors and recruits involved in the Crucible bivouac in the billeting area on Range 501. A SEA Hut is available for recruit company staff billeting. Recruits will billet in shelters constructed of either shelter halves or ponchos. Shelter halves will be issued during inclement weather months as available from WFTBN Supply. 2. (U) Billeting Structure and Organization. The recruit Bivouac will be established per recruit training company SOP but allow enough space in between shelters to dig drainage ditches around the tents for inclement weather. 3. (U) Police. See Appendix 3 (Sanitation) for information about police of billeting areas. 4. (U) Barracks check-out. Prior to the end of the Crucible on T-45 (Thru) or T-46 (Fri) the recruit training company will coordinate with WFTBn S-4 on a start time for the check-out on T47 (Sat). Immediately following the Warriors Breakfast, the recruit training company will commence with gear accountability, gear maintenance/cleaning, and barracks field day. Barracks check-out will commence on T-47 (Sat) NLT 1230. The check-out will consist of a joint inspection by recruit training company and WFTBn S-4 personnel (see Tab A to this appendix for sample barracks check-out sheet). It is recommended that the Drill Instructor conducting the check-out have a small recruit working party present to handle discrepancies should they arise. It is important that any maintenance discrepancies that occurred while the recruit training company occupied the building are brought to the attention of the WFTBn S-4 personnel during check-out. This will facilitate timely reporting to Base Facilities Maintenance Division. ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OFFICIAL S/ B. BROWN Major, USMC S-4, WFTBN
D-5-1 UNCLASSIFIED
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 TAB A (INSPECTION SHEETS) TO APPENDIX 5 (BILLETING) TO ANNEX D (LOGISTICS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) BARRACKS CHECK IN/OUT SHEET COMPANY COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE SERIES GYSGT FACILITIES REPRESENTATIVE FIRE EXTINGUISHER DRYER CHAIN AND LOCK TRASH CANS PODIUM FANS
____________________________ ____________________________ ____________________________ ____________________________
DATE ______________
1 2 1 2 1 2
BUILDING NUMBER SQUADBAY NUMBER
_____________________________ ____________________________
PLATOON NUMBER PLATOON SIZE WASHERS BENCHES TOWEL HOOKS SOAP DISPENSER
________________________________ ________________________________ 2 2 44 13
QUARTERDECK ITEM
QTY
C in
INITIALS
SERVICEABLE
C OUT
HEAD
SQUAD BAY WINDOW SCREENS RACKS MATTRESSES PILLOWS FOOT LOCKERS DESK CHAIR
18 91 91 91 91 1 1 CLEANING SUPPLIES
CHEMICAL DISP SPRAY BOTTLES SWAB BUCKETS SWABS STREET BROOMS DUST PANS FOX TAILS PUSH BROOMS RAKE TOILET BRUSH TOILET PLUNGER
1 3 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1
D-5-A-1 UNCLASSIFIED
REMARKS
UNCLASSIFIED WFTBn O P 1513.8 DUTY HUT
*All Items SL3 Complete.* You are responsible for all components ITEM
DESK CHAIR TRASH CAN PHONE COMPUTER MONITOR KEY BOARD MOUSE PRINTER PRINTER CARTRIDGE PRINTER CABLE RACK MATTRESS PILLOW WALL LOCKER LOUNGE CHAIR COUCH END TABLE REFER MICROWAVE WINDOW BLINDS RIFLE RACK KEY SURGE PROTECTOR
QTY
C/IN
INITIALS
SERVICEABLE
C/OUT
REMARKS
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 2 1 2 1 1 4 1 1
ADDITIONAL REMARKS ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
D-5-A-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED WFTBn O P 1513.8
BARRACKS DISCREPANCIES DRYER 1 DRYER 2 PODIUM FRONT HATCH
QUARTERDECK ITEM
DISCREPANCY
LIGHTS LIGHTS WINDOWS WINDOWS SCREEN SCREEN
LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT
INT
SQUAD BAY
DUTY HUT CARPET WINDOWS PHONE COMPUTER MONITOR KEY BOARD MOUSE PRINTER SCREENS BLINDS
SHOWER / CHANGING ROOM SHOWERS SHOWERS HOOKS HOOKS BENCHES BENCHES
LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT
D-5-A-3 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED WFTBn O P 1513.8 WASHER 1 WASHER 2 TOILET 1 TOILET 2 TOILET 3 TOILET 4 TOILET 5 TOILET 6 TOILET 7 TOILET 8 TOILET 9 SINK 1 SINK 2 SINK 3 SINK 4 SINK 5 SINK 5 SINK 6 SINK 7 SINK 8 SINK 9 SINK 10 SINK 11 SINK 12 SINK 13 URINAL 1 URINAL 2 URINAL 3 URINAL 4 URINAL 5 URINAL 6 MIRROR 1 MIRROR 2 MIRROR 3 MIRROR 4 MIRROR 5 MIRROR 6 MIRROR 7 MIRROR 8 MIRROR 9 MIRROR 10 MIRROR 11 MIRROR 12 MIRROR 13
WASH RACK WASH RACK
LEFT RIGHT
SIGNATURE OF COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE ______________________________________________________________ SIGNATURE OF FACILITIES REPRESENTATIVE ______________________________________________________________
D-5-A-4 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 APPENDIX 6 (VEHICLES) TO ANNEX D (LOGISTICS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) (U) REFERENCES: (a) MCO P11240.106B (b) DepO P11240.2A (c) DoD 4500.36-R 1. (U) General. Adequate vehicle support is necessary for the safe conduct of the Crucible. Vehicles must be used safely and within applicable regulations. 2. (U) Vehicle Issue/Dispatch. Each company is authorized three (3) government pickup trucks for the Crucible. Each vehicle must have a new NAVMC 11240 trip ticket completed every 24 hours. Company staff personnel other than the Marine listed on the trip ticket may drive the truck within the Edson Range cantonment area, however, the Marine listed on the trip ticket will remain solely responsible for any and all vehicle damage that may occur. WFTBn Motor Transport dispatch hours are 0430-1730 M-F. 3. (U) Vehicle use. Vehicles issued for use during the Crucible are issued for use only aboard Edson Range. The vehicles can be driven elsewhere aboard Camp Pendleton to re-fuel or for emergency purposes. The vehicles can be driven off Camp Pendleton, but such activity requires special authorization as annotated on the trip ticket. Additionally, in accordance with the references, any vehicle that leaves the Edson Range cantonment area MUST be tripped out and driven ONLY by the Marine listed on the trip ticket. Camp Pendleton Roadmasters may impound a vehicle driven by a person not listed on the trip ticket. Vehicles will be used for official recruit training purposes only. 4. (U) Motor transport support. Weapons and Field Training Battalion’s motor transport section provides the following support during the Crucible in addition to the (3) vehicles issued to the recruit training company: a. Safety Vehicles: WFTBn Motor Transport will provide (1) additional safety vehicle with driver for the Reaper Hike. Recruit training companies must coordinate with the Motor Transportation section on the step-off time for the hike. b. Deliveries: WFTBn Motor Transport will deliver hot/cold wets (HCWs) three times per day on T-44 and T-45 as required in the Hot/Cold Wet SOP of this order. See Para (5) below. c. Heavy Truck Support: (1) 3-ton with waterbull will be staged in the Range 130 (MOUT Town) parking lot for the Reaper
D-6-1
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 Hike to provide water refill and HCWs. Recruit training companies must coordinate with the Motor Transportation section on the step off time for the hike. d. Waterbulls: Waterbulls are checked daily. Emergency refill/replacement request must be submitted through the S-4 or OOD after hours. Additional waterbulls for larger companies are available, request through S-4. A total of (10) waterbulls are stationed, one per location, in support of the Crucible as follows: 12-Stall* Basilone Challenge Gonzalez’s Crossing Oscar 1 bivouac* Bayonet Assault Course Mackie’s Passage Fire Team Assault Course* Levilles’ Compass Course CM Range* Confidence Course *Waterbull is stationed full time. All other waterbulls are positioned on T-43 (Tues) and removed on T-46 (Fri). See Appendix 9 (Logistics Map) for details on waterbull locations. 5. (U) Hot/Cold wet delivery. Weapons and Field Training Battalion Motor Transport Section will deliver HCWs (3) times daily on T-44 (Wed) and T-45 (Thurs), once in the morning, once in the afternoon, and once in the evening to HCW “stations.” Each Crucible squad will use the stations to receive HCWs as they pass through. There are four HCW stations: Twelve Stall, Range 505 Weapons Maintenance, Range 501 Team Shoot, and the Confidence Course (See Appendix 9). During daytime “Company Track,” Motor Transport will deliver HCWs to two of the stations on the side occupied by the training company. During daytime deliveries on “Series Track,” HCWs will be delivered to all four stations. The evening delivery will be delivered to Range 501 NET 1830. a. Morning Delivery: HCWs are picked up at the 31 Area Mess Hall at 0730 and delivered to stations by 0800. b. Afternoon Delivery: HCWs are picked up at the 31 Area Mess Hall at 1230 and delivered to stations by 1300. c. Evening Delivery: HCWs are picked up at the 31 Area Mess Hall at 1800 and delivered NET 1830 to Range 501 only. HWC content will conform to specifications listed in Annex D (Logistics), Appendix 2 (Subsistence). In Cold/Wet SOP conditions, only hot wets will be delivered. The recruit
D-6-2
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 training company may request hot wets at specific times or a 50/50 mix of broth and sports drink. Requests to alter the HCWs must be made one day prior through the battalion S-4. ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
OFFICIAL
Benjamin Brown B. BROWN Major, USMC S-4, WFTBN
D-6-3
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 APPENDIX 7 (SUPPLY) TO ANNEX D (LOGISTICS) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) 1. (U) General. Due to the large numbers inherent to recruit training and the time constraints at the end of the Crucible, accountability and care of gear is extremely important. The gear turned in by the outgoing company makes up the bulk of the gear issued to the incoming company. Recruit training companies must ensure accountability and serviceability of gear before, during, and after the Crucible event. 2. (U) Actions prior to turn-in. After the Warriors Breakfast, the recruit training company will begin cleaning and accounting for supply gear. All washing of “deuce” gear will be done on the wash racks at the company’s respective barracks. NO DEUCE GEAR IS ALLOWED IN THE WASHERS/DRYERS. Companies will use water and fabric bristle scrub brushes. Mild detergents are authorized. No metal bristle brushes or harsh cleansers (bleach, etc) will be used on deuce gear. Companies will thoroughly wash all gear, focusing on removing caked-on mud/dirt, accumulated mud/dirt in pockets and pouches, and mud/dirt that inhibit the operation of snaps and buckles. After the gear has been washed, it will be hung on the drying lines to dry. Once the gear is dry, each recruit will consolidate his gear inside his pack for turn-in. 3. (U) Turn-in. Supply turn-in will commence NET 0630 on T-47 (Sat) and end at 1130. If the turn-in is not completed by 1130, recruits will go to chow and return to finish the turn-in. Upon arrival to supply, each platoon will be turned over to their respective WFTBn Supply Marine. The Supply Marine will first conduct an inventory of gear “sets” or “packs” by counting the number of consolidated gear sets in the platoon. Once all packs are accounted for, the Supply Marine will commence surveying each individual item. Each recruit in the platoon will hold the item in the air to verify it is on hand. The Supply Marine will note items that are missing, heavily soiled, or unserviceable. Missing, heavily soiled, and unserviceable items will be replaced/cleaned/repaired on the spot. Each Supply Marine conducting the platoon survey has the final say when determining serviceability/cleanliness. 4. (U) Missing gear. Once the platoons are surveyed, the Drill Instructor for each platoon will be notified of any items missing. If there are no missing items, the platoon will be turned back over to the Drill Instructor and allowed to leave the area. Platoons that have missing items will be allowed to leave the area, but the Drill Instructor must leave at least three recruits behind while he attempts to locate the missing gear. It is the Drill Instructor’s responsibility to locate or replace missing gear. Drill Instructors may turn in an item of equal or
D-7-1
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 greater value of the missing item. Once all means have been exhausted to locate or replace a missing item, the Drill Instructor may take his remaining recruits. Once the entire turn-in is complete, all missing and excess gear will be reported to the Supply Administrative Section so that the property records can be adjusted to reflect the gains/losses. ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
OFFICIAL
Benjamin Brown B. BROWN Major, USMC S-4, WFTBN
D-7-2
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 ANNEX E (MAINTENANCE) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) 1. (U) SITUATION.
See Basic Order.
2. (U) MISSION. Field and Weapons Training Company (FWTCo) is responsible for conducting maintenance of all obstacles and grounds associated with the Crucible within its capabilities. FWTCO will coordinate all maintenance efforts which exceed its capabilities with Weapons & Field Training Battalion (S-4) in order to properly support the execution of the Crucible. 3. (U) EXECUTION. follows:
Maintenance support is provided to the Crucible as
a. (U) Maintenance responsibilities for the Crucible obstacles are outlined in Appendix 1 to Annex E (Concept and Relations). b. (U) Maintenance inspections and repairs are executed in accordance with the guidelines given to the FWTCO Company Gunnery Sergeant and Police Sergeant as outlined in Appendix 2 to Annex E (Maintenance Guidelines). The Company Gunnery Sergeant shall work with the Platoon Leader, Field Training Platoon in the execution of these inspections and routine maintenance. APPENDIXES: 1 - Concept and Relations
R. B. RICHARDSON Major, U. S. Marine Corps Commanding
E-1 UNCLASSIFIED
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNCLASSIFIED APPENDIX 1 (CONCEPT AND RELATIONS) TO ANNEX E (MAINTENANCE) to MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) REFERENCES: (a) Marine Corps Order 3500.42 (MARINE CORPS HELICOPTER ROPE SUSPENSION TRAINING POLICY (HRST) AND PROGRAM ADMINISTRATION) 1. (U) Maintenance Concept. Maintain all Crucible obstacles so that they are safe and functional. Actual repairs and replacement of Crucible obstacles or components thereof will be accomplished by coordinating with the FWTCO Police Sergeant and/or Company Gunnery Sergeant. In turn, they will coordinate with the WFTBN S-4 as required. 2.
(U) Maintenance Responsibilities
a. (U) Field Training Platoon. Complete routine maintenance and inspections of Crucible obstacles within capabilities. Coordinate all repairs which exceed inherent capabilities with Field & Weapons Company Gunnery Sergeant. b. (U) Field & Weapons Training Company Gunnery Sergeant. When required, provide technical assistance, equipment and operator support, material purchasing support, and new work design and planning to support maintenance of the Crucible obstacles. c. (U) Weapons & Field Training Battalion S-4. The WFTBN provides technical assistance on safety matters, purchasing support, mishap investigations, and safety/improvement recommendations as directed by the Commanding Officer, WFTBN. The WFTBN S-4 will assist FWTCO on the purchase of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) and Fall Protection Equipment (FPE). 3. (U) Inspection Procedures. a. (U) Field Training Platoon. Inspect the obstacles and turn in a maintenance report every week. This report is due to the FWTCO Company Gunnery Sergeant before the close of business on the last day of the work week. The maintenance report is used to track deficiencies in the obstacles associated with the Crucible. See Tab 1 to this Appendix for Inspection Worksheets. b. (U) Rope Logs. Field Training Platoon will maintain a Rope Log for the Stairway to Heaven belay lines IAW the reference. Ropes will be inspected weekly for visible signs of wear and will be replaced every 1,000 belays.
R. B. RICHARDSON Commanding TAB A-Inspection Worksheets
E-1-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED TAB A (INSPECTION WORKSHEETS) TO APPENDIX 1 (CONCEPT AND RELATIONS) TO ANNEX E (MAINTENANCE) to MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP
MONTH
CRUCIBLE STATIONS
MAINTENANCE wk1 LEADERSHIP REACTION CRS ( 12 STALL ) CHECK FOR : Police call, cut weed overgrowth, fill and rake gravel pits, paint red areas Read boards, railroad ties, cat walk, all wire, dummies, poles, planks, ropes ladders, poles, combo locks, flak jackets, barrels, storage lockers PE 1-3 - CHECK FOR : Police call, fill and rake gravel pit, pallets, railroad ties, weed overgrowth PE MATERIALS Inspect large scale map, check pace count distance ALPHA DRAW - CHECK FOR : Police call, pallets, railroad ties, weed overgrowth, read boards, all signs, ammo cans, storage lockers, combo locks Trench, Culverts, Wall, Tangle Foot, Pyro pit, BAYONET ASSAULT CRS - CHECK FOR : police call, read boards, bayonets, dummies, flaks, tents, ropes / bridge back crawl, fighting holes, porta johns, storage areas, weed overgrowth BASILON'S CHALLENGE - CHECK FOR : police call, read boards, bayonets, dummies, flaks, tents, ropes / bridge
, ammo cans, sandbags, fighting positions, all signs
aiming stakes, cammo net, starting point, MOH Citation, porta johns GARCIA'S ENGAGEMENT - CHECK FOR : Police call, read boards, MOH Citation, fill / rake gravel pit, railroad ties all signs, pallets, weed overgrowth, count flak jackets, lube combo locks, storage lockers, porta johns CUKELA'S WALL - CHECK FOR : Police call, read boards, MOH Citation, rake pit, railroad ties, pallets, weeds count flak jackets, lube combo locks, storage lockers, porta johns, ROPE BORDELON'S ASSAULT - CHECK FOR : Police call, read boards, MOH citation, railroad ties, all signs, all wire Machine gun bunker, weed overgrowth, storage locker, lube combo lock PE 4-6 - CHECK FOR : Police call, pallets, railroad ties, weed overgrowth, read boards, all signs, , storage lockers, combo locks Trench, Culverts, Wall, Tangle Foot, Pyro pit, JENKINS PINNACLE - CHECK FOR : Police call, read boards, MOH Citation, rake gravel pit, cut weed overgrowth railroad ties, cables, boards, fasteners and covers, painted area's, weed's vertical posts, horizontal beam, weed overgrowth, all signs storage lockers, lube combo lock, replace broken pallets HOWARD'S ASSAULT - CHECK FOR : Police call, read boards, MOH Citation, ammo cans, water jugs, railroad ties wall, all wire, all signs, broken pallets, count flaks weed overgrowth, machine gun bunker, storage locker, lube combo locks
E-2-A-1
wk2
wk3
wk4
REMARKS:
UNCLASSIFIED GONZALES CROSSING - CHECK FOR : Police call, read boards, MOH citation, vertical posts, cables, fasteners Rope, podioms, gas masks, gas mask display board, sanitizing station count flak jackets, lube combo lock, storage lockers, rake gravel pit, all signs railroad ties, pallets, weed overgrowth, dummies, taped / painted areas PE 7-9 - CHECK FOR : Police call, read boards, MOH Citation, vertical posts, horizontal beam, 45 degree posts, inspect netting Red tape, all signs, pallets, count flak jackets, safety cushions railroad ties, rake gravel pit, weed overgrowth, storage locker, locks LAVILLE'S DUTY - CHECK FOR : Police call , read boards, all ropes, railroad ties, all tires, podioms, signs horizontal beam, vertical posts, cables, fasteners, red areas, weeds rake gravel, pallets OBSTACLE COURSE - CHECK FOR : Police call, read boards, sweep amtracks, ammo cans, railroad ties wall, all poles / posts / beams, fasteners / covers, all signs, pallets red areas, all ropes, weed overgrowth, NOONAN'S CASUALTY - CHECK FOR : Police call, read boards, MOH Citation, inspect litters & FIRST AID KIT, count flake jackets all signs, pallets, weed overgrowth, storage lockers, lube combo lock, porta johns UPPER SHELF - CHECK FOR : Police call, read boards, Million Dollar Head, DI Hooch, Gratter, Bleachers all wire, all signs, podioms, turn charts, patrolling course weed overgrowth, storage locker, lube locks, porta johns RANGE 505 - CHECK FOR : Police call, pyro pit, read boards, fences, culverts, wall, all wire, signs weed overgrowth, breach, trenches, sandbags, cover stakes, pallets back crawl area, sweep box, adjust / count tools, clean bullet, porta johns serve mart list, bleachers, tower, pack staging area FIRING LANES: Gravels rake, grass cut in front of firing position/support positions serviceable Light post, bleachers planks, handrails not loose or crack Round robin stations marked and visible, painted colors and numbers Sand bags replace as needed, blocks marked, brass turn in BIVOUAC SITE: Head clean, light serviceable, site drag, GP tent clean Bivouac site light post serviceable, hygiene pit Grass cut, trash disposed of in dumpster TARGETS: Targets maintain replace as needed Power points, PITTS, antennas, perms, grass cut around targets Wires checked for frays, cracked and holes TOWER HOUSE: Ladder well sturdy, hand rails, electric outlets safe Comm., phone lines operational/speakers, lights serviceable RANGE HOUSE: Storage house maintain, gear accounted Electric outlets safe, phone lines serviceable BODY SPARRING/PUGIL STICK:
E-2-A-2
UNCLASSIFIED pits rake, signs marked, head gear, gloves, pugil sticks protective wear, flaks, helmet serviceable post and check for wear, pallets/read boards BALLARDS/AMBUSH SITE: fighting holes, obstacles taped and marked, sign post marked first aid ammo can check for sharp edges, read boards HANSEN COUNTER/PE 10-12: pads check,gravels raked, planks check for wear, nail flush NBC gear and locker maintain, mask clean, trail marked, pallets, read boards TWO-LINE BRIDGE: read boards, pallets, lumber for wear, cables, clevises, turnbuckles splinters removed, bolt and bolt covering secured, ropes ammo crates, water cans check for sharp edges WEAVER: read boards, pallets, sand bags, loose bolts wear and splintering on logs, worn fire hose safety net is secure, no tear/ cuts, ammo cans free of sharp edges frame stable and not rotted at base, fire holse serviceable SKYSCRAPER: read boards, pallets, obstacle structure wear/ splintering loose bolts, worn fire hose, pulley, rope and dummy, porta john, cargo net secure to frame and tight/ check for frays and cuts STAIRWAY TO HEAVEN: read board, pallets, sand bags, upright post, guy lines horizontal lumber tight, excessive wear/ splintering, orange seat (2) life safety harnesses (16), carabineers, figure 8's, pulleys, ropes (3) ensure gravel raked or add gravel
Belay Rope Log, Ropes, Harnesses, and D-rings S=SATISFACTORY M=MISSING U=UNSERVICEABLE Other items and the date requested:
E-2-A-3
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 ANNEX F (DANGEROUS AND INCLEMENT WEATHER) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) (U) REFERENCES: (a) (b) (c) (d)
MCO 6200.1E DepO P1510.30L MCBO 1515.1D FMFM 7-21
1. (U) Purpose. The purpose of this Annex is to provide uniform contingency instructions for conducting recruit field training and Crucible operations in the event of dangerous and inclement weather and to promulgate instructions to reduce heat casualties. 2. (U) General. Periodically, the recruit training companies will execute these SOPs in order to safely continue field training and Crucible operations during dangerous and inclement weather. 3. (U) Execution. See the appendixes to this annex for specific dangerous and inclement weather SOPs. ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT APPENDIXES 1-Hot Weather SOP 2-Thunderstorm and Lighting SOP 3-Cold and Wet Weather SOP
R. B. RICHARDSON Major, U. S. Marine Corps Commanding
F-1 UNCLASSIFIED
(This Page is Intentionally Left Blank)
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 APPENDIX 1 (HOT WEATHER SOP) TO ANNEX F (DANGEROUS AND INCLEMENT WEATHER) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) (U) REFERENCES: (a) (b) (c)
MCO 6200.1E DepO P1510.30L MCBO 1515.1D
1. (U) Purpose. To provide guidance for conducting recruit field and Crucible training in the event of hot weather and to promulgate instructions to reduce heat casualties. 2. (U) General. Periodically, the recruit training companies will execute this Hot Weather SOP in order to safely continue field training and Crucible operations in hot weather. 3. (U) Execution. Heat stress data from the WBGT index will be recorded hourly by the Weapons and Field Training Battalion (WFTBN) S3 from 0700-1700, between 1 April through 31 October or when temperatures exceed 75 degrees Fahrenheit. a. The 31 Area Guard under the staff cognizance of the S-3 will: (1) Be responsible for the care, use and recording of the hourly readings of the WBGT System. The format in paragraph 5 below will be used to record the hourly readings. (2) Immediately notify the WFTBN S-3 and/or the Officer of the Day when the WBGT index reaches or exceeds 80 degrees Fahrenheit and when the Heat Condition Code as described in paragraph 5 below changes. (3) Maintain two heat condition code pennants of each color (green, yellow, red and black measuring two feet of the hoist by six feet on the fly) which indicate that a particular Heat Condition Code has been reached. b. When the WBGT reading exceeds 80 degrees Fahrenheit, the WFTBN S3 Officer, or the Officer of the Day after normal working hours, will expeditiously disseminate the reading to the following units via radio and confirm receipt an hourly basis: (1) Headquarters Company (2) Range Company (3) Field & Weapons Training Companies (4) The recruit training companies aboard Edson Range F-1-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 (5) The 31 Area Branch Medical Clinic (6) ACU-5 (7) Marine Corps Tactical Systems Support Activity (MCTSSA) (8) 41 Area, Camp Pendleton (9) The Range Control Officer, Marine Corps Base, Camp Pendleton c.
Upon receipt of readings that alter the Heat Condition Code (up or down), ensure that those personnel listed in paragraph 3b above are immediately informed and that those activities authorized by references (b) and (c) are directed to proceed in accordance with paragraph 4 below.
d.
During Crucible Week, upon receipt of readings which alter the Heat Condition Code to Black Flag, the S-3 Officer, Field Company Commander and Recruit Training Company Commander will meet to discuss continued training with specific modifications. They will then present the plan to the Battalion Commander, WFTBN, for final approval.
e.
During Yellow Flag conditions or above in hot weather, Gatorade supplements may be provided as deemed appropriate by the recruit training company commander and as coordinated with the WFTBN S-4 and 31 Area Mess Hall.
f. The Commanding Officer of Field & Weapons Training Company will: (1) Further disseminate the WBGT reading to recruit companies in the field. (2) Maintain a green, yellow, red and black head condition code pennant at Range 501 and Range 505. g. The Commanding Officer of Range Company will: (1) Disseminate the WBGT reading to the lettered ranges, Marksmanship Training Unit, and the Pistol Range. (2) Maintain a green, yellow, red, and black heat condition code pennant at MTU and fly appropriate heat condition code pennant. h. Range Safety Officers at Ranges 501 and 505 will fly the appropriate heat condition code pennant. i. Recruit training company commanders will submit a Serious Incident Report through their battalions to the Recruit Training Regiment on any suspected heat casualties. F-1-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 j. The 31 Area Medical Officer will, upon receipt of any suspected heat casualty, ensure immediate notification of the Battalion S-3 Officer or the Battalion Executive Officer, or during non-working hours, the Battalion Officer of the Day. Additionally, per reference (d), the Medical Officer will complete a Report of Heat Casualty (NavMed 6500/1) and forward it via the appropriate channels to the CO, Navel Hospital, Camp Pendleton for submission to the Bureau of Medicine & Surgery (BUMED) as required in reference (a). k. All persons in command or leadership capacitates Edson Range will ensure that personnel for whom they are responsible confine their activities to the guidelines set forth in paragraph 4 below. 4. (U) WBGT System. a. When the WBGT Index exceeds 80 degrees Fahrenheit, all training for un-acclimated personnel should be conducted with extra caution and supervision. b. When the WBGT Index exceeds 85 degrees Fahrenheit, strenuous outdoor classes in the sun are to be avoided. c. When the WBGT Index exceeds 88 degrees Fahrenheit, all physical training will be halted for those troops who have not become thoroughly acclimated by at least 12 weeks of living and working in the area. Those troops who are acclimated may carry on limited activity not to exceed six hours per day. The only exceptions to this policy are authorized by the references for Firing Week and Crucible Week. d. When the WBGT Index exceeds 90 degrees Fahrenheit, all strenuous activity will be halted for all troops. The only exceptions are to be authorized by the Area Commander for Firing Week and Crucible Week. The following contacts will be notified when the WBGT Index exceeds 90 degrees Fahrenheit: Unit Phone # MCTSSA (2617) ACU 5 (2370) HqCo (2557/2570) FWTCo (2317/2765) All RCT Companies
Unit 41 Area Range Control, MCB RngCo Medical
Phone# (2864) (4604,4367) (2410/2411) (2037/2707)
e. On weekends or holidays during hot weather, the guard will notify each recruit company of flag condition. A WBGT reading will be taken every hour and recruit companies will be notified hourly until the WBGT Index drops below 90 degrees Fahrenheit. 5. (U) Heat Stress Data Log. F-1-3 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8
ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
R. B. RICHARDSON Major, U. S. Marine Corps Commanding
F-1-4 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 APPENDIX 2 (THUNDERSTORM AND LIGHTNING SOP) TO ANNEX F (DANGEROUS INCLEMENT WEATHER) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) 1. (U) Purpose. This appendix outlines procedures to be initiated upon notification of a thunderstorm, lighting, and/or flashflood advisory in order to ensure the safety of recruits and instructor staff. 2. (U) General. Camp Pendleton on occasion has thunderstorms that produce lightning and flashfloods. Lightning may cause serious injury or death to personnel not under cover. 3. (U) Execution. Notification of thunderstorm warnings to the training units will come from Base Range Control (Long Rifle) via radio on Channel 12. This warning will be further confirmed by the Corporal of the Guard (COG) using the lightning detectors. During working hours the COG will notify the S-3 in the event of a thunderstorm warning alarm from the detector. After working hours the COG will notify the Officer of the Day (OOD) in the event of such a warning alarm from the detectors. If the evacuation threshold of 15 miles is reached, the S-3 will notify the training units during the day and the OOD will notify the training units after hours. In the event of severe weather including flashfloods, the training units will be instructed to seek shelter or evacuate the training area per the coordinating instructions below. The S-3 or OOD will inform the training units of any flashflood warnings that are disseminated from the Camp Pendleton Weather Station. a. Thunderstorm Condition 2 (TC2) is when thunderstorms are likely within 40 nautical miles. Once notified by Range Control, S-3 or OOD will notify Recruit Companies and WFTBN Staff that Camp Pendleton is in TC2. No other action will be taken. b. Thunderstorm Condition 1 (TC1) is when thunderstorms are likely within 10 nautical miles. Once notified by Range Control or by the COG using the lightning detector, WFTBN S-3 or OOD will notify Recruit Companies and WFTBN Staff that Camp Pendleton is in TC1. The S-3 or OOD will instruct the Recruit Companies and WFTBN Staff to execute the evacuation/shelter plan per coordinating instructions. c. Anytime the lightning detector senses lightning within 15 miles of 31 Area, the COG will notify the S-3 during working hours and the OOD after working hours. Because the lightning detector sometimes gives a false reading, the S-3/OOD will contact the Camp Pendleton weather station to verify that an actual storm system is moving into the area. Upon confirmation from the weather station, the S-3/OOD will then give the recruit companies and WFTBN staff the order to evacuate to the designated shelter areas. F-2-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 d. Evacuation shelter areas: (1) Field/Crucible Week: a. Recruits at or near obstacles on the Range 501 area will be moved inside the Range 501 concrete head. b. Recruits near the Confidence Course area will be moved back to the barracks. c. Recruits near Ranges 503, 505, 505A, and 505B will move back to their barracks. d. Recruits series/companies using the Oscar-1 Training Area’s “Upper Shelf” to include Mackie's Passage, the NBC Confidence Chamber, Bayonet Assault Course, Land Navigation Course, and the Twelve Stall will move to the Upper Shelf’s concrete head.
ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT
R. B. RICHARDSON Major, U. S. Marine Corps Commanding
F-2-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 APPENDIX 3 (COLD/WET WEATHER SOP) TO ANNEX F (DANGEROUS INCLEMENT WEATHER) TO MCRD SAN DIEGO CRUCIBLE SOP (U) (U) REFERENCES: (a) DepO P1510.30L (Recruit Training SOP) (b) FMFM 7-21 (Tactical Fundamentals for Cold Weather Warfighting) (c) MCWTC Bridgeport, California Winter Mountain Leader’s Course POI 1. (U) Purpose. To provide updated guidance for recruit field training and Crucible Operations in the event of cold and/or wet weather. 2. (U) General. Aboard Edson Range recruit training companies will periodically execute the Cold/Wet Weather SOP in order to provide continued field training, Crucible operations and all other recruit outdoor training in cold and/or wet weather. 3. (U) Execution. The Cold/Wet Weather SOP applies when: (1) (U) Directed by the BN CO or BN XO. (2) (U) The air temperature remains below 50°F with no rain and the humidity level is low (75%). 4. (U) Tasks. (1) (U)
S-3
(a) (U) Coordinate all aspects of the Cold/Wet Weather SOP. (b) (U) During cold/wet weather, monitor weather conditions and take hourly air temperature readings. (c) (U) Inform the BN CO, BN XO, S-4, FWTCO CO, and the recruit training companies of any changes or modifications to the Cold/Wet Weather SOP. (2) (U) S-4. When the Cold/Wet Weather SOP is in effect, the following will apply: (a) (U) Coordinate all additional logistical requirements in order to continue field training, Crucible operations and all other recruit outdoor training in cold and/or wet weather. If recruits are using their F-3-1 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 ponchos to build expedient shelters, then a second poncho will be issued in wet weather to keep recruits dry during movement from station to station. The issue of a second poncho for recruits avoids the potential for heat injuries associated with wearing Gortex outerwear to keep recruits dry in cold, wet weather. (b
(U) Crucible Hot Wets. During cold/wet weather (60 degrees Fahrenheit of less), “hot wets” will be provided to recruits conducting the Crucible twice during the day events and once while waiting for the night event to commence in accordance with references (a) and (b). The recruit company will coordinate with the WFTBN S-4 and 31 Area Mess Hall for hot wets. During the daytime Crucible events, the S-4 shall provide hot wets by establishing four hot wet stations at the following locations (during “Series Track”): Twelve Stall, Range 505 Weapons Maintenance, R501 Team Shoot, and the Confidence Course. (During “Company Track,” hot wets will be delivered to only on side of the training area.) During the night events, the S-4 will provide hot wets at Range 501 NET 1830.
(c) (U) Field Week Hot Wets. Recruits conducting training during Field Week may receive hot wets in accordance with the references (a) and (b). The WFTBN S-4 will be prepared to deliver hot wets to the recruit training company at the Combat Marksmanship Range and the Oscar1 Training Area twice during the day and once at night as requested by the recruit training company commander. (d) (U) Ensure there is sufficient medical support in order to support any additional requirements. (e) (U) Ensure wool blankets are available for corpsman use at the Charlie Box, 12-Stall Medical Station, 505 Day/Night Movement Course Medical Station, 501 Medical Station and in the corpsman roving vehicle. (3) (U) Supply (a) (U) Ensure recruit training companies conducting training at Edson Range between October and April receive snivel gear during field gear issue. Additional snivel gear items toe be issued are: the black watch cap, polypropylene tops and bottoms, and the black sleeping bag. To prevent cold weather heat injuries in accordance with references (a) and (c), recruits and recruit trainers should refrain from wearing warming layers or Gore-Tex outerwear while conducting administrative movements. Gore-Tex and warming layers F-3-2 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 will not be worn while negotiating any of the assaultstyle courses or obstacles aboard Edson Range. One extra poncho per recruit will be issued in wet weather when recruits are using their primary poncho to make a poncho shelter. This extra poncho may be bulk signed on an as-needed basis. (b) (U) As requested by the recruit company commander, issue the canvas shelter halves. (4) (U) Commanding Officer, Field Company (a) (U) Ensure Field Company Marines are briefed on and understand the contents of this SOP. (b) (U) Monitor recruit activities during cold and/or wet weather, and make recommendations to the S-3 for any training modifications. (c) (U) Provide a copy of this SOP to recruit training companies during the Field Week Pick-up Brief. (5) (U) Commanding Officer, Recruit Training Company (a) (U) Ensure Drill Instructors are briefed on and understand the contents of this SOP. (b) (U) Monitor recruit activities during cold and/or wet weather, and make recommendations to the S-3 for any training modifications. (c) (U) In addition to normal gear list contents, ensure the following contents are waterproofed and carried to the field during field week and the Crucible: One set utilities (three total), one skivy roll consisting of skivy shirt and drawers rolled in one pair of socks (five total), two additional pairs of socks, warming layer (sweats or poly-pro long johns), one set Gore-Tex top and bottom, black sleeping bag. 5. (U) Coordinating Instructions (2) (U) No obstacles or movement courses will be artificially wetted down during cold/wet operations. (3) (U) Gore-Tex may be worn as deemed necessary during cold and/or wet weather. However, caution must be exercised when wearing Gore-Tex while moving in order to prevent heat casualties. To keep personnel dry during administrative movements in cold weather without increasing the risk of F-3-3 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 heat injuries, the poncho should be used. Gore-Tex will not be worn on courses that require assaults. (4) (U) If recruits are submerged or clothes are soaked to the skin, the following table applies to all obstacles/training events: Temp: 65°F-60°F Must put dry utilities on within eight hours of skin getting wet.
Temp: 59°F-55°F Must put dry utilities on within four hours of skin getting wet.
Temp: 54°F-50°F Must put dry utilities on within two hours of skin getting wet.
Temp: 49°F and Less Must put dry utilities on within one hour of skin getting wet.
Table-1 (5) (U) The following table applies to Crucible obstacle modifications:
Station All
Temp < 65°F No Rain
Temp < 65°F With Rain
See Table-1
Local security in knealing or standing, roving security is OK, avoid standing water (exception: triple threat [BAC, 505 Mvmt Crs, Alpha Draw] see Table-1). Stack weapons, no flack, no LBV, gas masks & helmets only. Pass weapons. No barrel. No casuality evac, barrel only.
Gonzalez's Crossing No Mod 12-Stall # 4 & 5 12-Stall # 7 12-Stall # 12
No Mod. No Mod. No Mod.
O-Course
No Mod.
Low obstacles only, straddle logs (no walking), start dummy at wall, no rope climb.
Laville's Duty Jenkin's Pinnacle Stairway to Heaven Skyscraper Weaver
No No No No No
Retrive first tire instead of jumping. No gloves. No gloves, no ammo can. No gloves, no dummy. No gloves, move on top of logs only.
Mod. gloves. gloves. gloves. gloves.
Table-2 6.
(U) Admin/Logistics. a.
(U) See S-4 under Tasks.
b.
(U) In the event of a cold casualty, do the following: F-3-4 UNCLASSIFIED
UNCLASSIFIED P1513.8 (1)
(U) Remove victim’s wet clothing and wrap victim in a wool blanket or sleeping bag. Place clothes in a plastic bag and keep with victim.
(2)
(U) Encourage conscious victims to drink warm liquids.
(3)
(U) Hypothermic cases (body temp
View more...
Comments
